PHILIPS intellivue Patient Monitor Service Manual

PHILIPS intellivue Patient Monitor Service Manual

C O N F I G U R A T I O N G U I DE

IntelliVue Patient Monitor

M P 2 / 5 / 2 0 / 3 0 / 4 0 / 5 0 / 6 0 / 7 0 / 8 0 / 9 0

M P 5 T / X 2

For monitor release G.0 with software revision G.0x.xx

P a t i e n t M o n i t o r i n g

Philips Medizin Systeme Boeblingen GmbH

Hewlett-Packard Str. 2

71034 Boeblingen

Germany

© Copyright 2002-2008

Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.

All Rights Reserved

Part Number M8000-9306M

Reorder Number: 4535 641 12621

Printed in Germany 10/08

1

Table Of Contents

1 Understanding Configuration

Who is this Guide for?

Which Monitor Models is this Guide for?

What is Configuration Mode?

Who Can Change the Monitor Configuration?

Understanding Profiles and Settings

Entering and Leaving Configuration Mode

About the IntelliVue Support Tool

2 Configuring Profiles and Settings Blocks

Getting Started

Modifying an Existing Profile

Modifying an Existing Settings Block

Creating New Profiles

Deleting a Settings Block or Profile

Renaming a Settings Block or Profile

Changing the Monitor’s Default Profile

Unlocking a Settings Block or Profile

Configuring a Second / Third Main Display

3 Configuring Screens

Understanding Screen Settings

Modifying an Existing Screen

Creating New Screens

Configuring Screens on an XDS Remote Display

Changing the Content of Screen Elements

Changing the Size and Position of Screen Elements

Configuring SmartKeys

Configuring Special Screen Settings

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

About Configuration Settings

Profile Settings

Measurement Settings

Monitor Settings

Unique Monitor Settings

Global Settings

Hardware Settings

Monitor Database Configuration

H Option-Specific Settings

Release-Specific Information

17

19

21

21

22

17

18

18

18

25

176

184

187

188

84

118

147

25

28

29

9

13

13

13

13

14

9

10

11

11

1

3

6

6

2

2

1

1

1

2

5 Screen & Profile Overview

About the Screen Configurations

Sample Screen Image (.bmp)

MP60/MP70/MP80/MP90 Configuration Overview

MP40/MP50 Configuration Overview

MP20/MP30 Configuration Overview

MP20 Junior & MP20L Configuration Overview

MP5 Configuration Overview

MP5T Configuration Overview

MP2/X2 Configuration Overview

Screen Overview

MP60/MP70/MP80/MP90 Screen Overview

MP40/MP50 Screen Overview

MP20/MP30 Screen Overview

MP20 Junior (M20) & MP20L (M21) Screen Overview

MP5 Screen Overview

MP5 Options B10/B11/B14 Screen Overview

MP5T Screen Overview

MP2 Screen Overview

X2 Screen Overview

191

230

235

236

241

214

215

216

225

202

206

208

213

191

193

194

198

242

243

244

1

1

Understanding Configuration

Who is this Guide for?

This book is for anyone making permanent changes to the configuration of an IntelliVue Patient

Monitor. You must understand English, be familiar with the monitor and its Instructions for Use, know how to make changes to measurements and settings in monitoring mode, and understand the clinical implications of any changes you make.

WARNING

Before starting monitoring, check that the configuration meets your requirements, especially patient category, alarm limits and paced setting.

WARNING

Changing the configuration may alter the way the monitor performs when monitoring patients. Do not change anything unless you are aware of the possible consequences, especially if you are monitoring a patient whilst in configuration mode.

Which Monitor Models is this Guide for?

The descriptions and configuration settings in this configuration guide are valid for IntelliVue Patient

Monitors MP2, MP5, MP20/30, MP40/50, MP60/70, MP80/90, and the IntelliVue X2 Multi-

Measurement Module (when used as a standalone monitor), release G.0 with software G.0x.xx. This guide can not be used for other monitor models or IntelliVue monitors with other software releases.

Not all information contained in this guide applies to all monitor models. If a certain section applies only to certain models, this is indicated next to the section heading.

For example, if a certain section does not apply to the MP2 and X2, or - in other words - only applies to monitor models MP5, MP20/30, MP40/50, MP60/70, and MP80/90, it would be indicated like this:

MP5-90 only

<Section Heading>

1

2

1 Understanding Configuration

For example, when you access the Setup SpO

2

menu in monitoring mode, you will only be able to see and change these settings.

In configuration mode, these additional settings become visible.

What is Configuration Mode?

What is Configuration Mode?

The monitor ships with preset configurations that are suitable for common monitoring situations. To develop and store your own configurations you must switch to the monitors configuration mode.

Configuration mode is a password-protected operating mode that lets expert users make permanent changes to the monitor configuration. It is an extension of monitoring mode; it contains all of the settings available in monitoring mode plus some settings that are accessible only in configuration mode.

Setup SpO

2

High Limit

Low Limit

: 100

: 90

Desat Limit

Alarms

SpO2

Pulse (Sp0

2

)

Label

Set Perf Ref.

:

:

:

:

80

On

On

SpO

2

QRS Volume : 1

Tone Modulation : Yes

Tone Mod. Type

Perfusion

:

:

Enhanced

On

Average : 10 sec

High Alarm Delay : 10 sec

Low Alarm Delay : 10 sec

Desat Delay : 20 sec

NBP Alarm Suppr.

: On

Extd. Auto OnOff : Disabled

Color : Cyan

In monitoring mode, you can change settings, but cannot permanently store the changes to the monitor configuration.In configuration mode, you can change and permanently store settings to the monitor configuration.

Who Can Change the Monitor Configuration?

Only people authorized to do so by their institution should make changes in configuration mode. They require the configuration mode password.

Understanding Profiles and Settings

1 Understanding Configuration

Understanding Profiles and Settings

The IntelliVue patient monitor is highly configurable. To manage its various settings, settings are grouped into six main categories:

• Profiles

• Screens

• Monitor settings

• Measurement settings

• Global settings

• Hardware settings

All settings except hardware settings can be changed in configuration mode. Hardware settings can be changed in service mode only (with some exceptions).

Profiles

Profiles are named combinations of the following “building blocks”:

• Patient category

Profiles

• Paced status

Profile : Profile Adult

• (Display) Screen

• Measurement Settings block

Patient Category : Adult

• Monitor Settings block.

Paced : Yes

A monitor can have up to 20 different Profiles.

When you load a Profile, the configured combination of building blocks becomes active.

This provides a powerful method to easily adapt the

Display : 6 Waves A

Measmnt. Settings : Measmt. Adult

Monitor Settings : Monitor A

monitor to specific clinical scenarios or users, or switch back and forth between different configurations depending on specific phases within a case.

Consider this example: You are in the ER. Your monitor is configured for an adult patient. Your next patient is a 5-year old child. By switching to a predefined pediatric ER Profile, you can have appropriate measurement settings (such as alarm limits), patient category and so forth very easily, instead of having to alter measurements and limits individually. In this example, your monitor’s Profiles can be based on the age and condition of your patient, but there are of course other use models.

3

1 Understanding Configuration

Understanding Profiles and Settings

This graphic illustrates the concept of Profiles and their building blocks in the IntelliVue Patient Monitor.

4

Patient Category

For each profile, a patient category is defined. This patient category becomes active when you load the

Profile. It determines

– the algorithm the monitor uses to process and calculate some measurements (for example arrhythmia),

– the safety limits that apply for some measurements (for example NBP), and

– the alarm limit ranges for all measurements.

Note that a change of the patient category does not change any alarm limits to fit this category.

Paced

Notice that settings blocks and screens are only linked to a Profile. This indicates that storing a changed

Profile saves the combination of building blocks, but not individual monitor settings, measurement settings, or Screens. Changes that you have made to measurement or monitor settings, or screens can only

be stored in the appropriate type of settings block or Screen. For details, see "Modifying an Existing

Settings Block" on page 11.

For each profile, the paced status is defined. The defined paced status becomes active when you load the

Profile. The paced setting determines whether the monitor shows pacemaker pulses or not. When Paced is set to No, pace pulses are filtered and therefore do not show in the ECG wave. For paced patients,

Paced

must be set to Yes.

Understanding Profiles and Settings

1 Understanding Configuration

Display Screens

A Screen defines the overall selection, size and position of measurement waves, numerics and SmartKeys on the monitor display. A monitor can have a maximum of 20 preconfigured Screens, optimized for common monitoring scenarios. Examples of different Screens include the Big Numerics, the 12-

lead ECG

, and the Horizon Screen. For a complete list of Screens supplied with your monitor model,

see the section "Screen Overview" on page 215.

For each Profile, a Screen is defined. This Screen becomes the active Screen when you load the Profile. If you are using two or three main displays, for each main display a different Screen can be configured.

Measurement Settings

Measurement settings are settings specific to each measurement, for example alarm limits, measurement

color, or measurement unit. For a complete list of measurement settings, see the section "Measurement

Settings" on page 29.

A monitor can have a maximum of 10 blocks of measurement settings. Each block includes the complete list of measurement settings available. You can configure individual measurement settings differently for each settings block. By configuring different settings blocks, you can provide customized combinations of measurement settings for different profiles.

A typical example are the measurement settings blocks provided in the factory default configurations

(documented in this guide). The measurement settings blocks Measmt. Adult, and Measmt.

Pedi

, for example, differ mainly by the alarm limits which are configured differently for different patient ages. When you switch to a different Profile, for example from Profile Adult to Profile Pedi, the measurement settings block defined for that Profile becomes active.

Monitor Settings

Monitor settings define general aspects of how the monitor works, and include settings that affect more than one measurement, such as alarm volume, report settings, or display brightness. For a complete list of

monitor settings, see the section "Monitor Settings" on page 84.

A monitor can have a maximum of 10 blocks of monitor settings. Each block includes the complete list of monitor settings available. You can configure individual monitor settings differently for each settings block. By configuring different settings blocks, you can provide customized combinations of monitor settings for different profiles.

For example, you could generate a monitor settings block, in which the monitor’s display brightness is lowered and the alarm volume is softened, and call it “Night”. When you then assign this block to a new

Profile and name it accordingly, for example “Profile Night”, you can easily switch between day and night settings.

Global Settings

Global settings are typically set once at monitor installation by service personnel and include settings such as Altitude, Line Frequency, or Label Set. Global settings are not part of a Profile. They can be changed in configuration mode only and are automatically stored in the monitor’s configuration with

each change. For a complete list of Global Settings, see the section "Global Settings" on page 147.

Hardware Settings

Most hardware settings can only be changed in service mode. They are typically set once at monitor installation by service personnel, and include settings, such as Keyboard layout, the configuration of the monitor interfaces, or video settings, such as Display Type, Display Size, and Display

5

6

1 Understanding Configuration

Entering and Leaving Configuration Mode

Resolution

. Like global settings, hardware settings are independent of Profiles, and any changes you make to the hardware settings configuration are automatically stored, there is no need to save them in an

extra step. For a complete list of Hardware Settings, see the section "Hardware Settings" on page 176, or

refer to the Service Guide of your monitor model, provided on the Documentation DVD supplied with your monitor.

Entering and Leaving Configuration Mode

Switching between monitoring and configuration mode does not affect the active settings. You can even continue to monitor patients while in configuration mode. The password for configuration mode is given in the monitor’s service documentation.

1

2

To enter configuration mode:

In the Main Setup menu, select Operating Modes.

Select Config and enter the password.

The monitor displays Config at the right hand side of the status line and in the center of the Screen while you are in configuration mode.

Before you leave configuration mode, always be sure to store any changes you made. You must store changes made to each Settings Block and to each Profile, individually. As it may be difficult to remember whether the settings you changed belong to a Monitor Settings block or a Measurement Settings block, we recommend that you store each block before you leave configuration mode.

WARNING

If you are handing over the monitor to the end-users directly after configuration, make sure that it is in

Monitoring mode.

To leave configuration mode either:

In the Main Setup menu, select Operating Modes require or and then select the operating mode you

Switch the monitor off, then switch it on again.

– If you switch the monitor off and then on again after less than one minute, it returns in monitoring mode with the same settings (“hotstart”).

– If you leave the monitor switched off for more than one minute, the Profiles and settings loaded

when you switch back on are determined by the Automat. Default setting. See “Global

Settings” on page 147.

About the IntelliVue Support Tool

The IntelliVue Support Tool is a PC-based software application that is designed to help configuring

IntelliVue monitors and to manage IntelliVue Monitor configurations.

Using the Support Tool, you can, for example, read in (clone) a configuration from an IntelliVue monitor to a PC, modify this configuration offline on the PC, and then store (clone) the changed version back to the monitor. With the Support Tool you can clone configurations to more than one monitor at a time.

You can also use the Support Tool to make backups of your configurations, or generate configuration reports. The configuration files generated by the Support Tool are stored in a format that can be e-mailed.

About the IntelliVue Support Tool

1 Understanding Configuration

What Can I Configure with the Support Tool?

You can configure everything you can configure on the monitor, except that you cannot change individual monitor and measurement settings.

In addition to the configuration on the monitor, the Support Tool allows, for example:

• Changing the order of items in the lists of Screens, measurement or monitor settings blocks.

• Unlocking Profiles, Screens and settings blocks.

• Making realtime waves, or screen trends overlap on the Screen.

• Importing Screens into a configuration, and copying Screens between configurations.

• Importing SmartKey configurations into a configuration.

• Copying monitor settings, measurement settings, and global settings between config files.

• Importing, creating and modifying drug calculator configurations.

For a complete description of the Support Tool functionality, refer to the Support Tool Instructions for

Use, provided with the Support Tool.

How Can I Get a Support Tool License Key?

To use the Support Tool, you must have a license key. To get a license key, you must complete a special training. Please contact your local Philips Customer Response Center for further details.

The Support Tool functionality your license key permits you to use, depends on your function (e.g.

Biomed / CE / Configuration Expert) and your level of training.

License keys are issued to individuals and they may not be shared. The Support Tool tracks the use of each license key: you will be held responsible for any configuration changes made using your license key.

7

8

1 Understanding Configuration

About the IntelliVue Support Tool

2

2

Configuring Profiles and

Settings Blocks

Getting Started

To start configuring your monitor, access Profiles by selecting either:

• the Profiles screen element from the monitor’s Info Line, or

• the Profiles SmartKey , or

Profiles from the Main Setup menu.

The configuration pop-up keys will appear to let you carry out configuration tasks.

Using the Configuration Pop-up Keys

In configuration mode, the pop-up keys allow you to: activate a Profile or settings block create a new Profile or settings block based on the current one rename the selected

Profile or settings block save active settings into the selected settings block, or settings blocks into the selected Profile.

delete the selected

Profile or settings block make the current Profile the default Profile

Select the Confirm pop-up key to apply your changes.

9

2 Configuring Profiles and Settings Blocks

Modifying an Existing Profile

Modifying an Existing Profile

You can change the settings within an existing Profile. The monitor remembers any changes made when you switch between monitoring mode and configuration mode. All changes can be permanently stored in configuration mode, as described in the following sections.

Be aware that if you don’t store changes they will be reset to the monitor’s stored configuration when you

• change from configuration or monitoring mode to service or demonstration mode,

• load Profiles or Settings Blocks, or

• switch off the monitor for more than one minute (if the Global Setting Automat. Default is set to Yes).

Changing the Combination of Settings Blocks in an Existing Profile

To permanently save a different combination of settings blocks into an existing Profile:

1

Select the Profile you want to change and select the Load pop-up key to activate it.

2

3

Change the patient category and paced status if necessary.

Load the settings blocks you want to have into the activated Profile one after the other by selecting them in the Profiles menu and then selecting the Load pop-up key. These settings become active immediately in the monitor, but the asterisk beside the Profile name in the Profiles menu shows that the newly loaded blocks are not yet stored as part of the Profile.

4

Select the Profile again.

5

Select the Store pop-up key.

This example shows the changing of a Profile. The

existing Profile 1

was built from a combination of

Screen A + Monitor Settings Block A + Measurement Settings Block A.

The

new Profile 2

is built from a combination of Screen B + Monitor Settings Block D + Measurement

Settings Block C. This is now the active Profile, because it is loaded into the monitor’s active memory.

Active settings

Display

screens

load

Monitor settings

load

A

A

Settings blocks

B

B

C

C

D

D

Measurement settings

load

A

B

Existing Profile 1

C

D

New Profile 2

E

E

Examples

screens layout content

E alarm volume alarms latching alarm off time

QRS volume

Network setting

ECG alarm limits

ABP alarms on/off

NBP repeat time

Resp trigger mode

10

Modifying an Existing Settings Block

2 Configuring Profiles and Settings Blocks

Modifying an Existing Settings Block

To change settings in an existing settings block:

1

Select the settings block you want to change and select the Load pop-up key to activate it.

2

3

Make the changes to the individual measurements or monitor settings.

Select the Store pop-up key to overwrite the existing settings. Changes to a settings block affect all

Profiles in which this block is used.

Creating New Profiles

Follow these steps to create a new Profile ICU B based on the Profile ICU A and add it to the list of

Profiles stored in the monitor. As creating a Profile requires you to activate different settings, you should not do this while monitoring a patient. Each new name you assign to Profiles or Settings Blocks must be unique, otherwise you have two items with the same name and you will not be able to distinguish them.

Existing Profile:

Profile to be created:

Profiles

Profile : ICU A

Patient Category : Adult

Paced : No

Display : 6 Waves A

Measmnt. Settings : Measmt. A

Monitor Settings : Monitor A

Profiles

Profile : ICU B

Patient Category : Pedi

Paced

Display

:

:

No

6 Waves B

Measmnt. Settings : Measmt. B

Monitor Settings : Monitor B

1

2

3

Choose a Profile similar to the one you want to create from the list of Profiles available in the monitor.

To preview the combination of settings blocks contained in any Profile, in the Profiles menu, select that Profile from the list. The Profiles menu (which is grayed-out) changes to indicate the contents of the selected Profile. To view the settings blocks of the active Profile, select Current.

Select Load to activate this Profile.

Create a new Profile that references the same settings as the active Profile: a. In the Profiles menu, select Profile.

b. Select the pop-up key New. c. Use the on-screen keyboard to type a meaningful name for the new Profile, in this case ICU B. If you do not name the Profile, the monitor will assign a default name. You can rename the Profile later.

d. Select Enter. e.

Select Load to activate the new Profile.

4

Create new settings blocks for the new Profile.

a. In the Profiles menu, select Monitor Settings.

11

2 Configuring Profiles and Settings Blocks

Creating New Profiles e. Repeat this procedure to create a new measurement settings block.

You have now prepared the structure of the Profile you are creating.

5

Select the required Patient Category for the new Profile. In the Profiles menu, select either

Adult

, Pedi, or Neo, or select As Is to retain the patient category active at the time this Profile is activated. Note that if you configure Patient Category in the default Profile to As Is, the monitor starts after a coldstart with Patient Category set to Neo. A coldstart will be caused,

for example, after changing the monitor’s database configuration, see "Monitor Database

Configuration" on page 184.

6

7

b. Select the pop-up key New. c. Use the on-screen keyboard to type the name of the new settings block, in this case Monitor B.

If you do not name the Settings Block, the monitor will assign a default name. You can rename the

Settings Block later.

d. Select Enter. You have now created a new settings block containing the same monitor settings as the block Monitor A.

Select the required Paced mode for the new Profile. In the Profiles menu, select Yes for paced patients, No for non-paced patients, or

As Is

to retain the paced status active at the time this Profile is activated. Note that if you configure Paced in the default Profile to As Is, the monitor starts after a coldstart with Paced set to Yes. A coldstart will be caused, for example, after changing the

monitor’s database configuration, see "Monitor Database Configuration" on page 184.

Select a Screen for the new Profile.

a. In the Profiles menu, select Display b. Select the Screen you require from the pop-up list of available Screens.

c. Select Load to confirm your choice. d. If the monitor has more than one main display, repeat these steps for the additional displays.

N O T E

8

If you are using an XDS Remote Display as second or third main display, the default Screen for this display must be configured in the XDS Application software. It cannot be stored as part of the Profile configuration of the IntelliVue monitor. For more detail, refer to the Installation and Configuration

Guide for the XDS Application.

Adjust monitor and measurement settings as required.

9

Store the changed settings to the settings blocks. In the Profiles menu, select

Measmnt. Settings

, and then select Store and then Confirm to apply your changes.

Repeat this for Monitor Settings. There is no undo function.

10

Store the finished Profile. In the Profiles menu, select Profile and then select Store and then Confirm to apply your changes. There is no undo function.

CAUTION

When changing settings, you are strongly advised to create new settings blocks, rather than storing changes to the existing ones. Similarly, when changing a Profile, you are strongly advised to create a new Profile, rather than storing changes to an existing one. Once you store changes to a settings block or Profile, there is no way to undo these changes, unless you have saved a backup using the Support Tool. Settings blocks may be used in more than one Profile. If you edit a settings block it will change in the other Profiles in which it is used.

12

Deleting a Settings Block or Profile

2 Configuring Profiles and Settings Blocks

Deleting a Settings Block or Profile

You cannot delete a locked settings block, or one that is used in any Profile. You must remove it from the

Profile or delete the Profile first.

1

2

From the Profiles menu, select the block or Profile you want to delete.

Select the Delete pop-up key.

Renaming a Settings Block or Profile

If you rename a settings block that is used in other Profiles, the name changes in the other Profiles too.

1

From the Profiles menu, select the block or Profile you want to rename.

2

Select Rename.

3

Use the on-screen keyboard to type the new name, then select Enter to apply the change.

Changing the Monitor’s Default Profile

Every monitor has one default Profile. This is marked with a black diamond.The monitor loads the default

Profile:

• when returning to monitoring mode after leaving demonstration Mode (but not after leaving configuration or service mode).

• after discharging a patient.

• after being switched off for more than 60 seconds (only if Automat. Default is set to Yes).

To change the default Profile:

1

In the Profiles menu, select the Profile you want to set as default.

2

From the pop-up keys select

Set Default

. The “default diamond” jumps to this Profile to indicate that it is now this monitor’s default Profile. This setting takes effect immediately, you do not have to switch the monitor off and on again.

Unlocking a Settings Block or Profile

Profiles and settings blocks can be locked to prevent them from being modified or deleted. This ensures that a minimum configuration is always available. A locked Profile or settings block is identified (in configuration mode only) by a lock symbol.

You cannot unlock Profiles or settings blocks in the monitor’s configuration mode. To lock or unlock Profiles or settings blocks you need to use the IntelliVue Support Tool.

13

2 Configuring Profiles and Settings Blocks

Configuring a Second / Third Main Display

Configuring a Second / Third Main Display

To distinguish between individual main displays, the displays are numbered on the Screen. The number is shown next to the Screen Name field.

A second main display can be used with

• an MP90 with a Dual CPU, or

• an MP2/X2, MP5, MP60/70, MP80, or MP90 with a single CPU, when using an XDS Remote

Display as the third display.

Display 1

is always the built-in display or the display connected to the first CPU of the Dual CPU

MP90 monitor. Display 2 is the display connected to second CPU of the Dual CPU MP90 monitor or the XDS Remote Display.

Profiles

Profile : ICU B

Patient Category : Adult

Paced : Yes

Display 1

Display 2

: 6 Waves B

: 12 Lead ECG

Measmnt. Settings : Measmt. B

Monitor Settings : Monitor B

A third main display can be used with

• a D80 Intelligent Display connected to a Dual CPU MP90 monitor, or

• an MP90 with a Dual CPU, when using an XDS Remote Display as the third display.

Display 1

is always the display connected to the first CPU of the MP90 monitor. Display 2 is the display connected to second CPU, and Display 3 is the display connected to either the D80 or the

XDS Remote Display.

14

Configuring a Second / Third Main Display

2 Configuring Profiles and Settings Blocks

Profiles

Profile : ICU B

Patient Category : Adult

Paced

Display 1

:

:

Yes

6 Waves B

Display 2

Display 3

: 12 Lead ECG

: Big Numerics

Measmnt. Settings : Measmt. B

Monitor Settings : Monitor B

Loading a Screen on a Second / Third Display

To load a Screen onto the second or third main display,

• on the second/third display, enter the Change Screen menu and select a Screen from the list of available Screens, or

• on any display, enter the Profiles menu, select Display 2 (or Display 3) and select a Screen from the list of available Screens (not possible on the main display of MP2 and X2 monitors).

N O T E

If you are using an IntelliVue monitor with the XDS Remote Display as either the second or third display, the selection of Screens available for the XDS Remote Display can be different from the Screen selection for the other displays.

Changing Elements on a Second / Third Display

To change elements on the second or third main display:

1

2

Load the Screen that you want to modify onto the second/third display.

Make the required changes to the Screen.

3

Store the Screen. To do this, enter the monitor’s configuration mode, select Profiles ->

Display 2

(or Display 3), then select the Store pop-up key.

N O T E

Any change to a Screen will mark that Screen modified. In the Change Screen menu, the modified

Screen is shown linked to the original Screen and marked with an asterisk (*).

If you load the same Screen onto more than one display, then modify them differently, and then store one of the Screens, the modified Screen on the other displays will still be available. The stored Screen will be available on all displays except on the XDS Remote Display.

Changes made to a Screen viewed on an XDS Remote Display will be stored on the PC connected to the

XDS Remote Display and will not be part of the monitor configuration, see "Configuring Screens on an

XDS Remote Display" on page 18.

15

2 Configuring Profiles and Settings Blocks

Configuring a Second / Third Main Display

16

3

3

Configuring Screens

During monitoring, you can change the content of most of the Screen elements, for example you can exchange a Resp wave for a Pressure wave. These changes can be permanently stored as part of the

Screen settings in configuration mode.

You can also use the IntelliVue Support Tool to configure Screens offline on a personal computer and then upload them as part of a configuration file to one or more patient monitors. To use the IntelliVue

Support Tool for Screen configuration, you must have a support tool and a support tool license key

that entitles you to use the Screen configuration functionality. See "About the IntelliVue Support

Tool" on page 6 and the Support Tool Instructions for Use.

Understanding Screen Settings

Screen settings are stored in the Screen. Changing a Screen setting modifies the Screen. This is indicated by an asterisk (*) in front of the Screen name. In the Change Screen menu, modified Screens are shown linked to their parent Screens.

Screen settings include:

• the basic layout of a Screen, i.e. the selection, size, and position of any Screen element visible on the

Screen. The Screen layout cannot be modified in the monitor’s configuration mode.

• the content of each Screen element, i.e. the information displayed in each Screen element.

• the selection and sequence of SmartKeys available on a Screen.

• special settings that determine the behavior of certain Screen elements, such as Screen trends, realtime waves, embedded trend windows, or embedded Other Bed Overview windows.

17

3 Configuring Screens

Modifying an Existing Screen

Modifying an Existing Screen

To change an existing Screen:

1

Load the Screen and make the changes to the Screen.

2

3

In configuration mode, select Profiles -> Display (or Display 2, or Display 3).

In the list of Screens, the modified Screen is shown linked to the original Screen and marked with an asterisk (*). Select the Store pop-up key to overwrite the existing Screen. Changes to the Screen affect all Profiles in which this Screen is used.

N O T E

Changes made to a Screen viewed on an XDS Remote Display will be stored on the PC connected to the

XDS Remote Display and will not be part of the monitor configuration, see "Configuring Screens on an

XDS Remote Display" on page 18.

Creating New Screens

1

2

Load a Screen similar to the one you want to create from the list of Screens available in the monitor.

Create a new Screen based on the active Screen: a. In the Profiles menu, select Display (or Display 2, or Display 3).

b. Select the pop-up key New. c. Use the on-screen keyboard to type a meaningful name for the new Screen. If you do not name the

Screen, the monitor will assign a default name. You can rename it later.

3

d. Select Enter.

Change the content of the Screen as required.

4

Store the finished Screen: a. In the Profiles menu, select Display (or Display 2, or Display 3).

b. Select the pop-up key Store and then Confirm to apply your changes. There is no undo function.

N O T E

Changes made to a Screen viewed on an XDS Remote Display will be stored on the PC connected to the

XDS Remote Display and will not be part of the monitor configuration, see "Configuring Screens on an

XDS Remote Display" on page 18.

Configuring Screens on an XDS Remote Display

For certain IntelliVue monitor models, the XDS Remote Display (IntelliVue XDS solution) can be used as second or third main display.

When you make changes to a Screen that is viewed on an XDS Remote Display, be aware of the following implications:

• The changes are stored on the XDS Remote Display and not on the monitor.

• The changed Screen is not part of the monitor configuration and can therefore not be cloned to another monitor using the IntelliVue Support Tool.

• The changed Screen can be modified with the Screen Editor of the IntelliVue Support Tool.

18

Changing the Content of Screen Elements

3 Configuring Screens

For more details regarding the configuration of the XDS Remote Display, refer to the Installation and

Configuration Guide for the XDS Application.

Changing the Content of Screen Elements

Changing the Content of a Wave Element

To change the content of a wave element on a Screen,

1

2

Select the wave you want to change.

From the wave menu that appears, select Change Wave and then select the wave you want to be displayed.

Changing the Content of a Numeric Element

To change the content of a numeric element on a Screen,

1

2

Select the numeric you want to change. You can only change numerics that are not directly associated with (aligned to) a wave.

From the Setup menu that appears, select Change Numeric and then select the numeric you want to be displayed.

Changing the Content of a Screen Trend Element

To change the content of a screen trend element on a Screen,

1

Select the screen trend you want to change.

2

From the trend menu that appears, select Change Trend and then select the screen trend you want to be displayed.

Changing the Content of a High Resolution Trend Element

MP5-90 only

To change the content of a HiRes Trend element on a Screen,

1

Select the HiRes Trend you want to change.

2

From the menu that appears, select the HiRes trend you want to be displayed.

Depending on the H option (see "Understanding H and M Options" on page 27) and C option of your

monitor, the following parameters are available for selection:

btbHR

Any SpO

2

Resp tcpO

2

H10 / H40

X

X

X

H20

X

X

X

X

H30

X

X

X

Comments

These 4 parameters are included in the OxyCRG option

(C08)

MP5: tcpO

2 not available.

19

3 Configuring Screens

Changing the Content of Screen Elements

Pulse

Any Perf tcpCO

2

CO

2

ABP

PAP

CVP

ICP

CPP

BIS

CCO

AWP

Any Agent

Delta SpO

2 inO

2

H10 / H40

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

H20

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

H30

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Comments

MP20 -90 monitors only

Displaying Timers on the Main Screen

MP5-90 only

If you want to have a timer displayed on the Main Screen, you can substitute it for a numeric which is not directly associated with a wave.

To display a timer on the Main Screen,

1

Select the numeric you want to substitute.

2

Select Change Numeric.

3

Select Any Timer. The monitor automatically uses the timer label with the highest priority that is

not displayed on the Screen yet. See "Configuring Timers" on page 139.

Be aware of the following restrictions:

• If limited space is available, some elements displayed in the Timers window may not be displayed. The minimum information displayed is the elapsed or remaining time.

• The maximum number of timers that can be displayed on the Main Screen depends on your monitor model:

– MP60-90: four timers

– MP40-50: three timers

– MP20-30: two timers

– MP5/MP5T: one timer

– MP2/X2: no timer

• Any timer label can only be used once per Screen.

Displaying a Clock on the Main Screen

MP5-90 only

If you want to have a clock displayed on the Main Screen, you can substitute it for a numeric which is not directly associated with a wave.

To display a clock on the Main Screen,

20

Changing the Size and Position of Screen Elements

3 Configuring Screens

1

2

Select the numeric you want to substitute.

Select Change Numeric.

3

Select Clock.

Be aware of the following restrictions:

• Only one clock can be displayed per Screen

• If limited space is available, the label “Clock” may not be displayed. The minimum information displayed is the time.

Displaying a ProtocolWatch Status Indicator on the Main Screen

MP5-90 only

If you want to have a ProtocolWatch status indicator displayed on the Main Screen, you can substitute it for a numeric which is not directly associated with a wave.

To display a ProtocolWatch status indicator on the Main Screen,

1

Select the numeric you want to substitute.

2

3

Select Change Numeric.

Select PW Status.

Only one ProtocolWatch status indicator can be displayed per Screen.

Changing the Size and Position of Screen Elements

You cannot change the size and position of Screen elements. This is a configuration service that is provided, at a charge, by Philips, for monitors with option C20.

Configuring SmartKeys

There are two ways to configure SmartKeys:

• Configuring a different list of SmartKeys for each Screen (not possible for MP2/X2)

• Configuring a global list of SmartKeys that applies for all Screens

Configuring a Different List of SmartKeys for Each Screen

MP5-90 only

The selection and order of SmartKeys that are specific to a Screen are stored as part of the Screen, i.e. as a

Screen setting. This can be configured on the monitor (in configuration mode) or by using the Support

Tool Screen Editor. The following describes how to configure SmartKeys on the monitor. For a detailed description on how to use the Support Tool Screen Editor, see the Support Tool Instructions for Use.

To change the selection of SmartKeys displayed,

1

Select Main Screen, then select the left double arrow key to scroll back one page of SmartKeys.

2

Select the SmartKey SmartKeys to open a menu that lists all SmartKeys currently configured for that Screen. From the pop-up key line, select Add to open a second menu that contains all available

SmartKeys.

3

From the second menu, select the desired SmartKey. This adds the new key to the bottom of the list of configured SmartKeys (on the left). The maximum number of SmartKeys per Screen is 30 for the

MP60/70/80/90, and 24 for the MP40/50, MP20/30, and MP5.

21

3 Configuring Screens

Configuring Special Screen Settings

To delete a SmartKey from the list of configured SmartKeys,

♦ select it in the list, then select the pop-up key Delete.

To move a SmartKey to a different position,

Use the Sort Up and Sort Down pop-up keys. The number of SmartKeys visible at a time depends on the monitor’s display resolution:

SVGA: 6

XGA: 7

SXGA: 9

WXGA: 9

WXGA+: 10

WSXGA: 11

Configuring a Global List of SmartKeys for All Screens

The global list of SmartKeys is stored as a unique monitor setting in the monitor configuration. See the

section "Configuring User Interface Settings - Keys" on page 143 for details on how to configure the

global SmartKey list.

Individual SmartKey configurations for each Screen override the global SmartKey configuration. The global SmartKey list will therefore only be visible when you load a Screen that has no SmartKeys configured to it.

If you want to use the global SmartKeys for all Screens on a monitor, you must delete all individual

SmartKeys from all Screens in the configuration.

Configuring Special Screen Settings

Configuring the Wave Channel Speed

To change this setting, select the measurement wave on the Screen to open the related Wave menu.

Change Speed

This setting determines the wave speed of the related wave channel.

If set to Global, the speed of the wave channel follows the monitor setting Global Speed (or

RespiratorySpeed

, or EEG Speed) as described under "Configuring User Interface Settings" on page 110.

If set to any of the fixed speeds (6.25, 12.5, 25, 50 mm/sec), the speed of that wave channel follows its own distinct setting and is not affected by any changes of the Global Speed. The wave channel speed is independent of the wave (label) depicted in the channel. If you change the wave, the new wave will retain the set channel speed.

Configuring Screen Trends

To change the following settings, select the screen trend on the Screen to open the related Trend menu.

Change TrendTime

This setting determines in a screen trend. If set to Global, the trend time in the screen trend channel follows the monitor setting Screen Trend Time as described under

"Configuring Screen Trend Settings" on page 91. If set to any of the fixed times (30min, 1h, 2h, 4h,

8h

, 12h), the screen trend time follows its own distinct time setting and is not affected by any changes of the global Screen Trend Time.

22

Configuring Special Screen Settings

3 Configuring Screens

Change View

The screen trend presentation can be configured to Tabular, Graphical,

Horizon

, or Histogram. The Tabular view can only be used with aperiodic measurements, such as

NBP, C.O., C.I., PAWP. If you configure the view of an NBP trend, for example, to Tabular, and during monitoring the user changes the trend to a periodic measurement, such as ABP, the view automatically switches to Graphical.

ShowHorizon Trend

The horizon view is made up of 4 elements:

1

2

a horizon, drawn in white, as a reference baseline to help you visualize changes in the patient’s condition.

a graphical trend, displaying patient data for the set TrendTime.

3

4

a trend indicator arrow, indicating how the patient trend has developed in the last ten minutes.

a deviation bar, showing how the currently measured value deviates from the stored baseline.

If you set ShowHorizon Trend to Yes, all 4 elements of the horizon view are shown. If you set it to

No

, the graphical trend information (2) is not displayed in the trend channel.

Configuring an Embedded Trend Window

To change the following settings, select the embedded Trend window on the Screen to open the related pop-up key line. Note that the following settings are Screen settings and therefore do not affect the behavior of the normal (not embedded) Vital Signs and Graph Trend windows.

Select Interval

This setting defines the trend interval that will be used in the embedded trend window when the corresponding Screen (with the embedded trend window) is opened.

Graph Trend / Vital Signs

This setting defines the view (Graphical Trends or Vital Signs table) of the embedded trend window when the corresponding Screen is opened. The view can be changed at any time.

Select Group

This setting defines the trend group that is displayed in the embedded trend window when the corresponding Screen is opened.

The following setting applies for embedded Graph Trend windows only. To change the setting, select the embedded Graph Trend window on the Screen, then select one of the segments on the left side of the window to open the segment menu.

No. of Segments

This setting defines the number of trend segments displayed in the embedded

Graph Trends window when the Screen is opened.

Configuring an Embedded CSA Window

MP40-90 only

To change the following settings, select the embedded CSA window on the Screen to open the related pop-up key line. Note that the following settings are Screen settings and therefore do not affect the behavior of the normal (not embedded) CSA window.

On/Off SEF

defines whether the SEF trend line is displayed in the embedded CSA window when the corresponding Screen is loaded.

On/Off MDF

defines whether the MDF trend line is displayed in the embedded CSA window when the corresponding Screen is loaded.

On/Off PPF

defines whether the PPF trend line is displayed in the embedded CSA window when the corresponding Screen is loaded.

23

3 Configuring Screens

Configuring Special Screen Settings

Buffer

defines which of the three preconfigured buffers is used when the Screen with the embedded

CSA window is loaded.

On/Off Clipping

Set Clipping to On to improve the 3-D presentation of the embedded CSA and make it more “readable”. When set to On, peaks in the spectral lines are artificially clipped at a certain

height (see "CSA Window Configuration Implications" on page 98). If Clipping is Off, peaks can be

displayed over the full window height which may result in a more cluttered presentation.

Clipping

Hidden lines

Frequency Scale

defines the bandwidth displayed in the embedded CSA.

Configuring an Embedded Other Bed Window

MP5-90 only

For Screens with an embedded Other Bed window, you can configure which bed is displayed in the Other

Bed window each time the Screen is loaded.

To configure the embedded Other Bed window,

1

select the Other Bed window on the Screen

2

select the pop-up key My Care Group. This opens the Care Group menu where you can choose between the following settings:

– Bed <xx> (Bed ID)

If you select a specific Bed ID, the monitor displays the associated bed every time the Screen is loaded. If this bed is unavailable, the message “No data from bed” is shown in the embedded window.

– Any Bed

Select Any Bed if you want the monitor to display the first bed shown in the care group list. If this bed is removed from the care group, the new first bed in the care group is automatically displayed.

The setting Any Bed might be unavailable if it has been disabled for this Screen using the Support

Tool.

– Blank (Factory Default)

This is the factory default setting used on the “Other Bed” Screen that is part of the Support Tool

Screen library. If an embedded Other Bed window is configured to Blank, the window is empty when the Screen is loaded.

At any time during monitoring, the user can select the Other Bed window and temporarily change the current setting.

24

4

4

Configuration Settings

Appendix

About Configuration Settings

The IntelliVue Patient Monitor is pre-configured with factory default settings when it is shipped. This section documents the factory default settings and lists the configuration implications that need to be considered when changing settings from their default.

The configuration implications are only provided in this guide. You must read this document before you modify monitor configurations.

The settings documented here are valid for IntelliVue Patient Monitors release F.0 with software

F.0x.xx.

Documenting Monitor Configurations

If you change settings from their default, this document will no longer reflect your configuration.

A Philips representative or trained biomedical engineer can generate a detailed report of the changed monitor configuration using the IntelliVue Support Tool. Make sure you review the description of this functionality in the Support Tool Instructions for Use before you interpret the content of this report.

Understanding Configuration Implications

When you permanently change any element of the configuration, you must consider the effect of the new configuration on both patient and application behavior. For additional information on the context of the configuration settings, see your monitors Instructions for Use. Always ensure that the monitor users are aware of the configuration settings.

Using the Configuration Tables

The “breadcrumb trail” at the top of each table indicates which Settings Block the settings are grouped under. For example, “Measurement Setting: Main Setup -> Measurements ->

ECG

” means that the ECG settings in the table below the heading are part of the Measurement Settings

Block. This is also the path you should follow to access the settings in the table: in this example, to configure ECG settings, in the Main Setup menu, select Measurements and then select ECG.

How to read the configuration tables

The following is a (modified) example of a configuration table, as you will find it in the sections of this manual.

25

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

About Configuration Settings

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP20 - MP90

(H10/20/40)

MP5 - MP90

(H30)

MP20 (M20/M21)

MP5 (H10/20/40)

MP2/X2

MP5T

MP5 (B10/B11/B14)

MP2/X2

C M Profile

Adult

Profile

Pedi

Profile

Neo

Profile

Adult

Profile

Pedi

Profile

Neo

Profile

Adult

Profile

Pedi

Profile

Neo

Profile

Adult

Profile

Pedi

Profile

Neo

Profile

Outdoor

Alarms from

Sys. High

Sys. Low

Alarms x x x x x Sys.

x 160 x 90 x On

120

70

90

40

180

70

160

90

Repetition Time x x 15 min

Mode

Done Tone

NBP Time x x x x Auto Manual

3 min 10 min 10 min

Manual

15 min

Auto

Off On

Off

not applicable, this setting is stored in the Monitor Settings Block: see "Configuring User Interface Settings" on page 110.

Item Name The leftmost column in each table lists the individual configuration items. The names and order of these items correspond to those of the menu items in the related setup menu in the monitor.

Oper. Mode These two columns indicate in which operating mode the setting is available/visible. If both columns are marked with an “x”, the setting is available in both modes. If only one column is marked, the setting is available in the corresponding mode only. Abbreviations used for the operating modes in this guide are: C for Configuration mode, M for Monitoring mode, S for Service mode.

Monitor Models (Options) This section lists the actual factory default settings for each configuration item. Some factory default settings may differ between different monitor models or H (application area) options. If this is the case, this section will be divided into subsections. In the above example, you see the following subsections:

• MP20 - MP90 with options H10, H20, or H40 (i.e. all except H30),

• MP5 - MP90 with option H30

• MP20 with model option M20 or M21, MP5 with options H10, H20, or H40, and MP2/X2

• MP5T and MP5 with options B10, B11, or B14

• MP2/X2 (Profile Outdoor only)

Some settings are only entered once per table row with the table entry extended to cover all columns. In our example, you can see this for the settings Alarms from and Alarms. These settings are the same across all monitor models, options, and profiles and are therefore only entered once in the table, in the leftmost column.

26

About Configuration Settings

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Profile Adult / Profile Pedi / Profile Neo / Profile Outdoor All IntelliVue monitor models are shipped with different profiles to accommodate different monitoring environments and patient categories.

Therefore, the default values for some settings differ between different profiles. In the example table above, you can see this for the settings Sys. High, Sys Low, and Auto/Manual for which the subsections are divided into different columns representing the different profiles. The column headings correspond to the names of the profiles in the monitor, for example Profile Adult, or Profile Outdoor.

To keep the tables as readable as possible, the following rules apply:

– If the same default value applies to more than one profile in the same subsection, the table entry will be extended to cover all profiles that apply, and the value will be listed in the leftmost column only

(see Repetition Time or Auto/Manual).

– If the same default value applies to the same profile in different subsections, it is only listed in the leftmost subsection. For example, the default for Sys. High in Profile Pedi in MP5 through MP90 monitors with option H30 (second subsection from the left) is the same as it is in

Profile Pedi

in MP20 through MP90 monitors with options H10/20/40 (leftmost subsection). It is therefore only listed in the leftmost subsection and the corresponding table entry in the column Profile Pedi for MP20 through MP90 monitors with option H30 is left empty.

not applicable Whenever you see a statement in the settings tables starting with “not applicable” (as in

NBP Time

), this can mean two things (the exact reason will always be given in the context):

• the setting appears as a menu item in the related Setup menu, but is actually stored in a different context. For example, the NBP Time setting appears in the Setup NBP menu. However, it is not stored as an NBP measurement setting, but as a monitor setting in the User Interface menu.

• the setting appears as a menu item in the related Setup menu, but cannot be stored in the monitor

configuration. For example, the setting C.O. in the Cardiac Output Setup menu (see "C.O.

Configuration Implications" on page 56) defines the On/Off status of the C.O. measurement, i.e.

whether the Cardiac Output measurement is switched On or Off. However, the C.O. measurement (as most other measurements in the IntelliVue monitor) can only be switched On if a C.O. transducer is connected to the monitor. Therefore this setting cannot be permanently stored in the monitors configuration.

Understanding H and M Options

Application Area Options

H10

H20

H30

H40

General/Intensive Care

Neonatal

Anesthesia

Cardiac Care

MP20 Model Options

M20

M21

1

MP20 Junior

MP20L

1.MP20 option M21 is available in the US only.

27

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Profile Settings

Profile Settings

Profile Settings: Main Setup -> Profiles

Factory default settings for Profiles depend on the monitor model, as well as the monitor’s H and A option. For detailed information on all factory-provided default Profiles, see the section “Configuration

Overview”, starting on page 194.

The monitor does not need a Profile to start monitoring. If, in the case of an error, no configuration is loaded, or if a loaded configuration is corrupt, the monitor will be operational and use the factory defaults documented in the configuration tables of this guide. The Paced status will be set to Yes and the

Patient Category

will be set to Neo. An appropriate configuration should then be loaded onto the monitor using the IntelliVue Support Tool.

The default Profile is used after discharging a patient, leaving demonstration, or when the monitor is switched off for more than 60 seconds (if the global setting Automat. Default is set to Yes).

28

Measurement Settings

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Measurement Settings

This section lists all the settings grouped in the Measurement Settings Block. They define how the monitor measures and displays patient data. Read any information on configuration implications at the end of each section before you make any configuration changes.

ECG

ECG/Pulse Alarms

System Pulse

Arrhythmia

ST Analysis

QT Analysis

SpO

2

Delta SpO

2

NBP

Invasive Pressure

CPP

PPV

C.O.

CCO

SVR

SO

2

Sp-vO

2 tcGas

Measurement Settings

Page

30

CO

2

(Capnometry)

33

awRR (from Capnometry)

35

Resp (Impedance Respiration)

36

Spirometry

39

RRspir (Respiration from Spirometry)

41

EEG

42

EEG Montages

45

BIS

46

Temperature

47

Predictive Temperature

53

Delta Temp

54

VueLink

55

IntelliBridge

56

Gas Analyzer

57

CO

2

(from Gas Analyzer)

58

awRR (from Gas Analyzer)

59

MAC

60

Page

76

76

81

82

83

72

74

75

75

67

67

69

71

62

63

64

65

29

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Measurement Settings

High Limit

Low Limit

ECG/Arrhy Alarms

AlarmSrc (ECG/AR)

ECG

Paced

QRS Volume

Primary Lead

Secondary Lead

Va Lead

Vb Lead

Analysis Mode

Lead Placement

Mod.LeadPlacment

Filter

SyncPulse Sensit.

SyncPulse Marker

Auto Filter

Fix PacerAmplit

Default ECG Size

Color

Asystole Threshold

Δ ExtrTachy

Tachy Clamp

Δ ExtrBrady

Brady Clamp

ECG Al. OFF Inop

Fallback

Alarms Off

AlarmSource Sel.

PulseAlarms Tele

Configuring ECG

Measurement Settings: Main Setup -> Measurements -> ECG

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP5 - MP90 (H10/20/40)

MP5T

MP2/X2

MP5 - MP90 (H30) MP2/X2

C M Profile

Adult

Profile

Pedi

Profile

Neo

Profile

Adult

Profile

Pedi

Profile

Neo

Profile

Outdoor

x

x not applicable, see "Configuring ECG/Pulse Alarms" on page 33.

x x x x x x x x On x

x not applicable, the paced status is stored as in a Profile, see "Profile Settings" on page

28

x

x not applicable, this setting is stored in the Monitor Settings Block, see "Configuring

User Interface Settings" on page 110

x x II x x V (V1) x x V2 x x V5 x x Multi Lead x x Standard x x Off x x Monitor Filter

Monitor

x x x x Medium (MP2/X2, MP5 only) x x On (MP2/X2, MP5 only)

not applicable, these settings are stored in the Monitor Settings Block, see "ECG

Application Configuration" on page 99

x x x x x x x x x x Green x x 4.0 sec x

3.0 sec

not applicable, see "Configuring ECG/Pulse Alarms" on page 33

Cyan

On

not applicable, see "Configuring ECG/Pulse Alarms" on page 33

White

4.0 sec

30

Measurement Settings

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

ECG Configuration Implications

ECG

This setting lets you switch the ECG measurement On or Off. If ECG is switched Off, the monitor will change to Pulse as alarm source, if a Pulse is available. One exception to this rule can arise

when you have a telemetry device paired with your monitor. If PulseAlarms Tele (see "Configuring

ECG/Pulse Alarms" on page 33) is configured to Disabled, the monitor does not fall back to the

System Pulse as alarm source.

Primary Lead / Secondary Lead / Analysis Mode

The monitor uses the primary and secondary lead to compute HR and to analyze and detect cardiac arrhythmias. They are also available for recordings and for display on the Information Center. The Secondary Lead setting is used only if

Analysis Mode

is configured to Multi Lead (instead of Single Lead) arrhythmia analysis. It determines which additional lead will be used for arrhythmia analysis.

Va Lead / Vb Lead

If you are using a 6-lead ECG cable, the two chest leads can be positioned at any two of the V1 to V6 positions. The Va Lead / Vb Lead settings tell the monitor which positions you have used so that the chest leads will be correctly labeled on the monitor and in printouts. If the

Global setting ECG Cable Color is set to IEC, these settings are labeled Ca Lead and Cb Lead.

Lead Placement

Set this setting to EASI if you are using EASI lead placement. This tells the monitor that you are using EASI lead placement. The label “EASI” will be shown beside the 1mV calibration bar on the ECG wave on the display, and “EASI” is marked on any recorder strips and printouts.

Mod.LeadPlacment

When Mod.LeadPlacment is set to On, 12 Lead ECG Reports will be labelled 12 Lead ECG Report (Mason-Likar), and captured 12-lead ECGs will be labelled Mason-Likar to the right of the bandwidth annotation at the Information Center. When Mod. LeadPlacment is set to Off, 12 Lead ECG Reports will be labelled 12 Lead ECG Report, and captured 12-lead ECGs will not be annotated at the Information Center.

Filter

The Filter setting defines how ECG waves are smoothed.

Monitor: The Monitor filter results in an ECG bandwidth of 0.5 - 40 Hz for the Adult, and 0.5 -

55Hz for the Pedi and Neo patient category. Use under normal measurement conditions.

Extended Monitoring: This setting is only available for the Pedi and Neo patient category. Using this filter results in an ECG bandwidth of 0.5 – 150 Hz. Use for pediatric and neonatal patients when diagnostic quality is required but low frequency interference or a wandering baseline may be expected.

The upper edge frequency is the same as the Diag setting and the lower edge frequency is the same as the Monitor setting.

Filter: Using this filter reduces interference to the signal and results in an ECG bandwidth of 0.5 –

20 Hz for all patient categories. It should be used if the signal is distorted by high frequency or low frequency interference. High frequency interference usually results in large amplitude spikes making the

ECG signal look irregular. Low frequency interference usually leads to a wandering or rough baseline. In the operating room, the Filter reduces artifacts and interference from electrosurgical units. Under normal measurement conditions, selecting Filter may suppress the QRS complexes too much and thus interfere with the clinical evaluation of the ECG displayed on the monitor. This does not affect the

ECG analysis performed by the monitor. If AutoFilter ("ECG Application Configuration" on page

99) is set to On, the filter setting will automatically be set to Filter if electromagnetic interference is

detected.

31

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Measurement Settings

Diag (Diagnostic): The setting Diag selects the highest available ECG bandwidth which is 0.05 to

150 Hz for all patient categories. Use when diagnostic quality is required. The unfiltered ECG wave is displayed so that changes such as R-wave notching or discrete elevation or depression of the ST segments are visible.

SyncPulse Sensit / SyncPulse Marker

These settings are only available in MP2/X2 and

MP5 monitors. In the MP5 it is only available if an MIB/RS232 interface is installed and the driver ECG

Sync Pulse

is configured for one of the MIB ports (see the MP5 Service Guide for detailed setup information). If these requirements are met, the monitor outputs a SyncPulse via the MIB/RS232 interface (MP5) or the ECG Sync Pulse Output Connector (MP2/X2) which can be used to synchronize external medical devices (such as CT scanners) to the patient’s ECG. Both settings are available in monitoring mode and configuration mode.

• Set SyncPulse Marker to On to display SyncPulse markers in the ECG wave on the monitor

Screen.

SyncPulse Sensit lets you change the sensitivity of the Sync Pulse detection. If

SyncPulse Marker

is switched On, and not every QRS complex in the ECG wave on the monitor is marked with a Sync Pulse marker, you should increase the sensitivity (Medium or High) until you see a marker for each QRS complex. If you see Sync Pulse markers in areas of the ECG wave other than the QRS complexes, lower the sensitivity (Medium or Low).

Asystole Threshold

This setting lets you adjust the time period between the point where the monitor cannot detect a QRS complex and the indication of an asystole alarm. It also affects the way the

enhanced asystole detection behaves, see "General Global Settings Configuration Implications" on page

148.

Color

The color setting defines the color for ECG, Arrhythmia, ST, and QT. The color setting for

Pulse is taken from the system pulse source.

ECG AL. Off Inop

If ECG alarms are off or Pulse is selected as active alarm source, the INOP

ECG/ARRH ALARM OFF is shown permanently. If you do not want this INOP to appear, you must set

ECG AL. Off Inop

to Off. If you want the ECG/ARRH ALARM OFF INOP to be automatically escalated to a yellow alarm after a fixed time, configure it to one of the available choices: Yellow @2h,

Yellow @4h

, Yellow @6h, or Yellow @8h.

Fallback

If Fallback is configured On and there is a LEAD OFF INOP in the primary lead (and in the secondary lead, if you are using multi-lead monitoring) for longer than 10 seconds, and if another lead is available, this available lead automatically becomes the primary lead. This is known as lead fallback.

When the Leads Off condition is corrected, the leads are automatically switched back.

32

Measurement Settings

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Configuring ECG/Pulse Alarms

Measurement Settings:

Main Setup -> Measurements -> ECG -> AlarmSrc(ECG/AR), or

Main Setup -> Measurements -> Pulse -> AlarmSrc(ECG/AR)

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP20 - MP90 (H10/20/

40)

MP5 - MP90 (H30) MP20 (M20/M21)

MP5 (H10/20/40)

MP5T

MP2/X2

MP2/X2

C M Profile

Adult

Profile

Pedi

Profile

Neo

Profile

Adult

Profile

Pedi

Profile

Neo

Profile

Adult

Profile

Pedi

Profile

Neo

Profile

Outdoor

Auto Auto Auto Alarms Source x x ECG/Arrhythm

ECG/Arrhy Alarms x x On

Pulse Alarms

High Limit x x x x x Off x 120 x 50

20

160

75 Low Limit

Δ ExtrTachy

Tachy Clamp

Δ ExtrBrady

Brady Clamp

Alarms Off x x x x

200

20

40

Enabled

220

AlarmSource Sel.

PulseAlarms Tele x x

Enabled

Enabled

200

100

240

50

40

60 80

120

50

200

40

ECG/Pulse Alarms Configuration Implications

Alarms Source

In most cases the heart rate and Pulse numerics are identical. In order to avoid simultaneous alarms on heart rate and Pulse, the monitor uses either ECG or Pulse as its active alarm source. The Alarm Source setting lets you choose ECG, Pulse or Auto as the source of heartrelated rate alarms.

ECG/Arrhythm: Select ECG/Arrhythm if you want the heart rate from the ECG to be the alarm source.

Even with Alarm Source set to ECG/Arrhythm, if you switch the ECG measurement off, the monitor will automatically use Pulse as alarm source, provided a pulse source is switched on and available.

Pulse

: If you select Pulse as the active alarm source, the monitor will prompt you to confirm your choice. Be aware that if you select Pulse, all arrhythmia and ECG HR alarms are switched off.

Auto: If the Alarm Source is set to Auto, the monitor will use the heart rate from the ECG measurement as alarm source whenever the ECG measurement is switched on and at least one ECG lead can be measured without an INOP condition.

The monitor will automatically switch to Pulse as the alarm source if:

33

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Measurement Settings

– a valid ECG lead can no longer be measured

and

– a Pulse source is switched on and available.

The monitor then uses the pulse rate from the measurement currently active as system pulse. While

Pulse

is the alarm source, all arrhythmia and ECG HR alarms are switched off. If an ECG lead becomes available again, the monitor automatically uses ECG/Arrhythm as alarm source.

N O T E

If the ECG measurement is switched off, the monitor will always change to Pulse as alarm source, if a

Pulse source is available. One exception to this rule can arise when you have a telemetry device paired with your monitor. The monitor ECG is then deactivated but the monitor may be configured to allow only

ECG as the active alarm source (see setting AlarmSource Sel.). In this case the monitor will not switch to Pulse as alarm source and Pulse will not be available as a selection in the ECG/Pulse Alarms menu.

WARNING

Selecting Pulse as the active alarm source for HR/Pulse switches off most arrhythmia alarms (see the

Instructions for Use), including Asystole, Vfib and Vtach alarms, and the heart rate alarms. This is indicated by the crossed-out alarm symbol beside the ECG heart rate numeric and the message

ECG/ARRH ALARM OFF, if configured (see "ECG Configuration Implications" on page 31).

High and low pulse rate and extreme bradycardia and extreme tachycardia alarms from Pulse are active.

ECG/Arrhy Alarms

This setting is only available if Alarm Source is set to ECG/Arrhythm or

Auto

. Be aware that with Alarm Source set to ECG/Arrhythm, if you switch ECG/Arrhy

Alarms

off, all Pulse alarms are switched off as well.

Pulse Alarms

This setting is only available if AlarmSource is set to Pulse and a pulse signal is currently measured. Be aware that with Alarm Source set to Pulse, if you switch Pulse Alarms off, all ECG and Arrhythmia alarms are switched off as well.

High Limit/Low Limit

ECG and Pulse share the same alarm limits. These alarm limits apply to the currently selected alarm source, either ECG/Arrhythm or Pulse. Note that if you change the High/Low alarm limits in the ECG/Pulse Alarms menu, this will also change the High/Low alarm limits in the

Setup Pulse menu and Setup ECG menu and vice versa.

Δ

ExtrTachy,

Δ

ExtrBrady

Extreme bradycardia and extreme tachycardia alarms are based on the

ECG/Pulse limit alarms. Use the

Δ

ExtrTachy

and

Δ

ExtrBrady

setting to define the difference between the heart rate limit and the extreme limit. For example, if the heart rate high limit is 120 bpm and the difference is 20 bpm then the extreme tachycardia limit is 140.

ECG and Pulse share the same alarm limits. The

Δ

ExtrTachy

and

Δ

ExtrBrady

settings apply to the currently selected alarm source, either ECG or Pulse. If you change the

Δ

ExtrTachy

or

Δ

ExtrBrady

setting in the ECG/Pulse Alarms menu, this will also change the

Δ

ExtrTachy

or

Δ

ExtrBrady

setting in the Setup Pulse menu and Setup ECG menu and vice versa.

34

Measurement Settings

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Tachy Clamp, Brady Clamp

The Brady and Tachy clamp allows you to configure a safety threshold for the extreme bradycardia and tachycardia alarm limits. For example, if the low heart rate limit is 50 bpm and the

Δ

ExtrBrady

setting is 20 bpm (50 bpm - 20 bpm = 30) with a Brady clamp set at

40, the resulting extreme bradycardia limit would be 40 bpm (instead of 30 bpm). If the clinician sets the

ECG alarm limit above or below the limit clamps for an individual patient, the limit clamps become the extreme brady or extreme tachy alarm (these are red alarms). Be sure to set the clamps beyond the configured ECG limits.

ECG and Pulse share the same alarm limits. The Tachy Clamp and Brady Clamp settings apply to the currently selected alarm source, either ECG or Pulse. If you change the Tachy Clamp or Brady

Clamp

setting in the ECG/Pulse Alarms menu, this will also change the Tachy Clamp or Brady

Clamp

setting in the Setup Pulse menu and Setup ECG menu and vice versa.

Alarms Off

If this setting is configured to Disabled, the user cannot switch off ECG alarms in monitoring mode. Note that changing the Alarms Off setting in the ECG/Pulse Alarms menu, also changes the Alarms Off setting in the Setup Pulse menu and Setup ECG menu and vice versa.

AlarmSource Sel.

If you do not want the Alarm Source setting to be available in monitoring mode, you must set AlarmSource Sel. to Disabled. Note that if you change the

AlarmSource Sel.

setting in the ECG/Pulse Alarms menu, this will also change the

AlarmSource Sel.

setting in the Setup Pulse menu and Setup ECG menu and vice versa.

PulseAlarms Tele

This setting affects the monitor’s behavior only while it is paired with a telemetry transmitter. In paired mode, if the Tele transmitter delivers a valid ECG, the monitor automatically deactivates the internal ECG and displays the ECG from the telemetry transmitter. With the internal ECG deactivated, and PulseAlarms Tele configured to Enabled, the monitor automatically falls back to the monitor’s System Pulse as alarming source if a System Pulse is available.

With PulseAlarms Tele configured to Disabled, the monitor does not fall back to the System

Pulse as alarm source. In this case no ECG/Pulse alarms from the bedside monitor are active. When the monitor ECG becomes available again, or the telemetry transmitter is unpaired, the monitor automatically activates the internal ECG and the configured ECG/Pulse alarms are active again. Note that if you change the PulseAlarms Tele setting in the ECG/Pulse Alarms menu, this will also change the

PulseAlarms Tele

setting in the Setup Pulse menu and Setup ECG menu and vice versa.

Configuring the System Pulse

Measurement Settings: Main Setup -> Measurements -> Pulse

Factory Defaults

Item Name

High Limit

Low Limit

Pulse Alarms

AlarmSrc (ECG/AR)

System Pulse

QRS Volume

Oper.

Mode

MP5 - MP90 (H10/20/40)

MP5T

MP2/X2

MP5 - MP90 (H30)

C M Profile

Adult

Profile

Pedi

Profile

Neo

Profile

Adult

Profile

Pedi

Profile

Neo

x

x not applicable, see "Configuring ECG/Pulse Alarms" on page 33.

x x x x x x x x SpO

2

Auto x

x not applicable, see "Configuring User Interface Settings" on page 110.

MP2/X2

Profile

Outdoor

SpO2

35

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Measurement Settings

Factory Defaults

Item Name

Δ ExtrTachy

Tachy Clamp

Δ ExtrBrady

Brady Clamp

Alarms Off

AlarmSource Sel.

PulseAlarms Tele

Oper.

Mode

MP5 - MP90 (H10/20/40)

MP5T

MP2/X2

MP5 - MP90 (H30)

x x x x x x x

C M Profile

Adult

Profile

Pedi

Profile

Neo

Profile

Adult

Profile

Pedi

Profile

Neo

not applicable, see "Configuring ECG/Pulse Alarms" on page 33.

MP2/X2

Profile

Outdoor

System Pulse Configuration Implications

System Pulse

The System Pulse setting allows you to configure the measurement source for the

System Pulse.

The pulse rate chosen as system pulse:

• is monitored as system pulse and generates alarms when you select Pulse as the active

Alarm Source

• is sent via the network to the Information Center, if available

• is trended in the HighRes Trends and stored in the monitor’s databases.

The choices are SpO

2

, SpO

2 pr, SpO

2 po, SpO

2

r, SpO

2

l, %SpO

2

T, P, ABP, ART,

Ao, PAP, UAP, FAP, BAP,

and Auto. If you select Auto, the monitor automatically chooses a pulse rate to be used as system pulse. It looks through the list from top to bottom and activates the first pulse rate that is switched on and available.

Configuring Arrhythmia

Measurement Settings: Main Setup -> Measurements -> Arrhythmia

Factory Defaults

Item Name

Arrhythmia

Asystol. Threshold

Pause Threshold

VTach HR

VTach Run

Oper.

Mode

MP5 - MP90 (H10/20/40)

MP5T

MP2/X2

MP5 - MP90 (H30)

C M Profile

Adult

Profile

Pedi

Profile

Neo

Profile

Adult

Profile

Pedi

x x On x x 100 x x 5

Off Off x

x not applicable, see "Configuring ECG" on page 30.

x x 2.0 sec 1.5 sec

120 150

Profile

Neo

MP2/X2

Profile

Outdoor

On

2.0 sec

100

36

Measurement Settings

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Vent Rhythm

SVT HR

SVT Run

PVCs/min

Non-Sustain

Vent Rhythm

Run PVCs

Pair PVCs

R-On-T PVCs

V.Bigeminy

V.Trigeminy

PVCs/min

Multif.PVCs

Pacer N.Cap

Pacer N.Pac

Pause

Missed Beat

SVT

Afib

IrregularHR

HR Alarms

Analysis Mode

TimeOut 1st

TimeOut 2nd

ArrhyOff Message

SOME ECG... Inop

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP5 - MP90 (H10/20/40)

MP5T

MP2/X2

MP5 - MP90 (H30) MP2/X2

C M Profile

Adult

Profile

Pedi

Profile

Neo

Profile

Adult

Profile

Pedi

Profile

Neo

Profile

Outdoor

x x 14 x x 180 x x 5 x x 10 x x On x x On x x On x x On x x On x x On x x On x x On x x On x x On x x On x x On x x On x x On x x On

200

5

210

5

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

180

10

On

On

Off

On

x x x x On x Short Yellow

Off x

x not applicable, see "Configuring ECG" on page 30

x 3 min x

10 min not applicable, this setting is stored in the Monitor Settings Block, see

"Configuring User Interface Settings" on page 110

On Off

On

On

On

On

On

On

On

On

Arrhythmia Configuration Implications

Pause

This setting lets you adjust the time period between the point where the monitor cannot detect a

QRS complex and the indication of a Pause alarm.

HR Alarms

With Arrhythmia switched On, high and low heart rate alarms were traditionally part of the yellow arrhythmia alarm chain and were therefore signaled as short yellow alarms. The setting HR

Alarms

lets you configure high and low heart rate alarms to be treated as normal (long) yellow alarms. Be aware that when you configure HR Alarms to Yellow, high and low heart rate alarms are not subject to arrhythmia timeouts and arrhythmia alarm chaining.

37

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Measurement Settings

Timeout 1st, TimeOut 2nd

The timeout period for first level yellow alarms can be configured for between 0 and 5 minutes. The timeout period for second level yellow alarms can be configured for between 0 and 15 minutes.

SOME ECG... Inop

If users want to be notified whenever the On/Off settings for ECG/Arrhythmia alarms differ from the current Profile, you must configure Some ECG... Inop to On (short for Some

ECG Alarms Off INOP message). If this message is configured Off, it is important for the clinician to check the on/off status of the alarms.

Arrhythmia Alarms

PVC alarms that combine runs of PVCs and rate are chained together and the configuration of one effects the configuration of others.

VTach

Run = > 5

HR = > 100

To set the Ventricular tachycardia alarm, you must configure both the Vtach run limit, and the Vtach heart rate limit. Both criteria must be met to cause an alarm.

Non Sustain VTach

Run < 5

HR = > 100

Vent Rhythm

Run = > 14

HR < 100

Non-sustained ventricular tachycardia cannot be configured. The criteria for this alarm is based on the Vtach settings. It must be a run less than the Vtach run limit but the heart rate limit must be the same as Vtach.

Ventricular Rhythm can be configured for the number of PVCs in a run (Ventricular limit) but the heart rate limit is automatically set to be less than the Vtach heart rate.

Run of PVCs

Run > 5 < 14

HR < 100

A Run of PVCs must be more than two but less than the Ventricular Rhythm

Pair of PVCs

Run = 2 a Pair of PVCs is by definition two PVCs in a run.

Configuring Arrhythmia Alarm Recordings

(See "Configuring Alarm Recordings" on page 88) Arrhythmia recordings are affected by the settings

Record HR

and Record PVC, as some arrhythmia alarms have both a HR component and a PVC component. To receive all arrhythmia alarm recordings, you must configure both these alarms on. If PVC alarm recording is off but HR alarm recording is on, these PVC alarms are not recorded:

Non-Sustain Vtach; Vtach; Ventricular Rhythm; Run of PVCs; Pair of PVCs; R on T PVC; V Bigeminy;

V Trigeminy; PVC/min; MultiFocal PVC.

Arrhythmia and Visible and Audible Alarm Latching

(Main Setup -> Alarms -> Alarm Settings; see "Configuring Alarms" on page 85) Alarm visual and audio

latching settings can affect the arrhythmia alarm sounds. Visual and Audible Latching should be set to

Red

or Red and Yellow if Arrhythmia is On.

38

Measurement Settings

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Configuring ST Analysis

ST segment monitoring is intended for use with adult patients only and is not clinically validated for use with neonatal and pediatric patients. For this reason, the recommended - and default - setting for

ST monitoring in neonatal and pediatric modes is ST Analysis: Off.

Lead-Independent Settings

Measurement Settings: Main Setup -> Measurements -> ST Analysis

Factory Defaults

Item Name

ST Analysis

ST Alarm Mode

Alarms

ST-Index

Show ST In Wave

Oper.

Mode

MP2 - MP90

X2

ISO Point

J Point

1

ST Point

2

ST Uses

1.Setting only available when ST Uses is set to J+60 or J+80.

2.Setting only available when ST Uses is set to ST Point.

MP5T

C M Profile Adult

Profile Outdoor

Profile Pedi Profile Neo Profile Adult Profile Pedi Profile Neo

x x x x x x On x x Single ST

Off Off x x On x x x On Off On

not applicable, this setting is stored in the Monitor Settings Block: see "Configuring User

Interface Settings" on page 110

-80 ms

48 ms

---

J+60

-68 ms

---

80 ms

ST Point

-56 ms

---

60 ms

ST Point

ST Alarm Mode

If you set ST Alarm Mode to Multi, the monitor will announce an ST alarm, only if more than one ST lead is violating its alarm limit. For each mode, Multi and Single, a different set of ST alarm limits can be configured.

ST Analysis

This setting lets you switch ST Analysis On or Off.

ST-Index

This setting lets you switch the ST-Index numeric On or Off for display. The ST index numeric (STindx) is the sum of the absolute values for the ST leads V2, V5, aVF. Because it is based on absolute values, it is always a positive number. If you haven’t selected one of the leads V2, V5, and aVF for

ST analysis, the STindx numeric will display a question mark “?”.

ST Uses

If ST Uses is set to J+60 or J+80, the position of the ST Point is set relative to the

J Point. Change the ST Point by positioning the J Point up to 380ms after the peak of the R-wave.

If ST Uses is set to ST Point, the ST Point can be set directly and independently of the J Point position. The ST Point can be positioned up to 460ms after the peak of the R-wave.

Note that switching between the settings does not move the J Point position.

39

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Measurement Settings

Lead I, II, III, aVR, aVL, aVF, V, V

1-6

, MCL Settings

Measurement Settings: Main Setup -> Measurements -> ST Analysis

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP2 - MP90

MP5T

X2

C M Profile Adult

Profile Outdoor

ST

(Label) x

For Alarm Mode = Single-ST x On

ST

(Label)

High

ST

(Label)

Low x x

For Alarm Mode = Multi-ST x x

+2.0 mm

-2.0 mm

ST

(Label)

High

ST

(Label)

Low x x +1.0 mm x x -1.0 mm

Profile Pedi

Off

Profile Neo

Selecting Leads for ST Analysis

You select which leads to use for ST analysis in the Setup ST Analysis menu.

To select a lead for ST Analysis,

1

2

Select Main Setup -> Measurements -> ST Analysis to enter the Setup ST Analysis menu.

Select Setup ST Leads to open the Setup ST Leads menu. All leads currently chosen for ST monitoring are listed here.

1

2

3

4

Select the Add key. This opens the Choices pop-up window.

Choose a lead from the list. This closes the Choices window and adds the selected lead to the list of chosen leads.

To disable ST monitoring for a lead,

In the Setup ST Leads menu, choose a lead from the list.

Select the Delete key. This removes this lead from the list of chosen leads.

The order in which ST leads are listed in the Setup ST Leads menu determines the order in which ST leads are displayed on the monitor screen.

To change the order in which ST leads are displayed,

1

In the Setup ST Leads menu, choose a lead from the list.

2

Select the Sort Up or Sort Down key to move the lead up or down in the list.

Changing ST Alarm Limits

The monitor can detect alarms on each ST lead separately, so you can set high and low ST alarm limits individually for each ST lead. You can also set separate alarm limits for single-lead and multi-lead ST monitoring.

40

Measurement Settings

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Configuring QT Analysis

Measurement Settings: Main Setup -> Measurements -> QT Analysis

Factory Defaults

Item Name

QT Lead

QTc High Limit

ΔQTc High Limit

QTc High Alarm

ΔQTc High Alarm

QT Analysis

QTc Formula

Oper.

Mode

MP2 - MP90

MP5T

X2

C M Profile Adult

Profile Outdoor

x x All x x 500 x x 60 x x On x x On x x Off x Bazett

Profile Pedi

480

Profile Neo

460

QT Analysis Configuration Implications

QT Lead

For QT Monitoring you can select one of the following QT Lead modes:

All: all available leads (I, II, III, V, MCL, V1 - V6) are used to produce a global QT measurement. For

EASI lead placement, directly acquired AI, AS and ES leads are used.

Primary: the primary lead will be used for QT measurement. If the original primary lead becomes unavailable or is changed, QT measurement will continue with the new primary lead.

I,II,III,MCL,V,V1-V6: a single lead selected from all available leads (except the augmented leads) will be used for QT measurement. QT measurement will stop if the selected lead becomes unavailable.

QT Analysis

This setting lets you switch QT Analysis On or Off.

QTc Formula

This setting lets you change the correction formula used to correct the measured QT interval for the patients heart rate.

The QT interval has an inverse relationship to heart rate. Faster heart rates shorten the QT interval and slower heart rates prolong the QT interval. Researchers have generated correction formulas to normalize the effects of heart rate. Heart rate corrected QT interval is abbreviated as “QTc”.

Several commonly used heart rate correction formulas are available. In clinical practice, the most commonly used formula is the Bazett formula. The setting QTc Formula let you configure either the

Bazett or Fridericia formula. The differences are shown here:

Correction Method

Bazett

Fridericia

Formula

QTc = QT / (RR)1/2

QTc = QT / (RR)1/3

41

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Measurement Settings

For more detail about the QT/QTc measurement and correction formulas, refer to the IntelliVue

Instructions for Use, as well as the Application Note “QT/QTc Interval Monitoring”. Both documents are available on the IntelliVue Documentation DVD.

Configuring SpO

2

The configuration settings for SpO

2

SpO

2 r, SpO

2 l, and %SpO

2

T.

can be set individually for each label - SpO

2

, SpO

2 pr, SpO

2 po,

N O T E

The label %SpO

2

T is only available on monitors that are currently connected to a telemetry device.

SpO

2

, SpO

2

pr, SpO

2

po, SpO

2

r, SpO

2

l, and %SpO

2

T Settings

Measurement Settings: Main Setup -> Measurements -> <SpO

2

Label>

High Limit

Low Limit

Desat Limit

Alarms

SpO

2

(or other label)

Mode

1

Pulse <SpO

2

Label>

QRS Volume

Tone Modulation

Tone Mod. Type

Perfusion

Signal Quality

2

Average

Average in Mon.

High Alarm Delay

Low Alarm Delay

Desat Delay

NBP Alarm Suppr.

Extd. Auto OnOff

Color

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP2 - MP90

MP5T

X2

MP2/X2

C M Profile Adult Profile Pedi Profile Neo Profile Outdoor

x x x x x x x x x x x x 100 x x 90 x x 80

95

85

80

100

90

80

x x On x x not applicable, the SpO

2

On/Off state is not a setting, see "SpO2 Configuration

Implications" on page 43.

x x Continuous x

x not applicable, see "Configuring Pulse from SpO2" on page 44.

x x not applicable, these settings are stored in the Monitor Settings Block: see x x

"Configuring User Interface Settings" on page 110.

x

On

On

10 sec

No

10 sec

10 sec

20 sec

On

Disabled

Cyan White

1.Setting is only available for the label %SpO

2

T and on monitors that are currently connected to a telemetry device via a Short

Range Radio (SRR) connection.

2.Setting is only applicable for monitors with FAST SpO

2

(Option A01) and OxiMax compatible SpO

2

(Option A02).

42

Measurement Settings

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

SpO

2

Configuration Implications

<SpO

2

Label>

The On/Off state of the SpO

2 automatically switched On when an SpO

2

measurement cannot be preconfigured. SpO

sensor is connected to the monitor.

2

is

Mode

This setting is only applicable for monitors that have a Short Range Radio (SRR) interface installed. It is only available for the label %SpO

2

T. Configure Mode to Manual to allow %SpO

2

T measurements from the telemetry device to be made on request and not continuously, helping to save the telemetry device’s battery power when it is connected to a monitor via a short-range radio link.

To ensure there is no gap in SpO

2

measurements when moving from standard telemetry transmission to short range radio transmission, the SpO

2

mode will be automatically switched to Continuous in this situation unless Manual mode is set in both the telemetry device and the monitor.

Perfusion

If Perfusion is switched Off, Perfusion is not measured and the Perf numeric disappears from the Screen. Note that you will only see the Perfusion numeric on the Screen if

Perfusion

is switched On, and a Perf numeric is configured on the Screen.

Signal Quality

Set Signal Quality to Off, if you don’t want the signal quality indicator to be displayed next to the SpO

2

numeric on the Screen. Note that this setting is only applicable for monitors with FAST SpO

2

(Option A01) and OxiMax compatible SpO

2

(Option A02).

Average

The SpO

2

numeric represents an average value calculated from several SpO

2 values.

Average

lets you adjust the averaging time between 5, 10, and 20 seconds. It represents the approximate time period used for the calculation. The exact averaging algorithm depends on the SpO

2 technology (option) used and on the signal conditions. The longer the averaging time, the longer the time needed until the SpO

2

value reflects the physiological event. Fast averaging is useful for situations where an extremely fast measurement is required or few artifacts are expected. Use slow averaging where you expect the number of artifacts to be relatively high.

Average in Mon.

This setting determines whether the setting Average can be changed in

Monitoring mode. Set Average in Mon. to Yes to enable the user to change the averaging time in

Monitoring mode.

High/Low/Desat Alarm Delay

The alarm delay defines the amount of time that the averaged

SpO

2

value needs to be above or below the corresponding alarm limits before an alarm is activated.

NBP Alarm Suppr.

This setting has an effect only when using SpO

2

options FAST-SpO

2

or

OxiMax-compatible SpO

2

. Set NBP Alarm Suppr. to On to suppress INOPs that would otherwise be generated when you measure NBP on the same limb as SpO

2 to On, the monitor automatically remembers the SpO

2

. If NBP Alarm Suppr. is configured

value measured before cuff inflation and suppresses any SpO

2

INOPs while the cuff is inflated.

Extd. Auto On/Off

The default for this setting is Disabled. If Enabled, the SpO

2 measurement will be automatically switched Off when the SpO

2

sensor comes off the patient’s finger and at least one of the following criteria is met:

• the resulting SpO2 Sensor Off INOP is silenced,

• alarms are paused or switched off. This also applies if alarms are remotely suspended from a connected

Information Center,

• both the SpO

2

alarm and the Pulse(SpO

2

) alarms are switched off.

If the sensor is reapplied, the SpO

2

measurement is automatically turned On.

43

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Measurement Settings

Note that the setting Extd. Auto On/Off has no effect if the label %SpO

2 telemetry device is connected to the monitor via a short range radio connection.

T is used, and the

WARNING

Never set Extd. Auto On/Off to Enabled if continuous SpO

2 the SpO

2

measurement may be inadvertently turned off, when

monitoring is intended, because

• the SpO

2

sensor is off the patient’s finger and the user silences other alarms, or

• all alarms are off when the sensor comes off the finger, or

• the Pulse (SpO

2

) and the SpO

2

alarms are switched off when the sensor comes off the finger, or

• the user switches all alarms off while the sensor is off the finger, or

• the user switches off the Pulse (SpO

2

) and the SpO

2

alarms, while the sensor is off the finger.

CAUTION

Consider the implications when you configure Extd. Auto On/Off differently for different

Measurement Settings Blocks and Profiles.

Configuring Pulse from SpO

2

Measurement Settings:

Main Setup -> Measurements -> <SpO

2

Label> -> Pulse (<SpO

2

Label>)

Factory Defaults

Item Name

High Limit

Low Limit

Pulse Alarms

AlarmSrc (ECG)

Pulse (<SpO

2

Label>)

System Pulse

QRS Volume

Δ ExtrTachy

Tachy Clamp

Δ ExtrBrady

Brady Clamp

Alarms Off

AlarmSource Sel.

PulseAlarms Tele

Oper.

Mode

MP2 - MP90

MP5T

X2

C M Profile Adult Profile Pedi Profile Neo

x x x x x x

x not applicable, see "Configuring ECG/Pulse Alarms" on page 33.

x x x x x x x x x x On x

x not applicable, see "Configuring the System Pulse" on page 35.

x

x not applicable, see "Configuring User Interface Settings" on page 110.

not applicable, see "Configuring ECG/Pulse Alarms" on page 33.

44

Measurement Settings

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Pulse from SpO

2

Configuration Implications

Pulse (<SpO

2

Label>)

This setting lets you switch the Pulse from the related SpO

2

label On or

Off

. If you switch Off a Pulse that is currently selected as the source for the System Pulse (see

"Configuring the System Pulse" on page 35), the monitor will use the next available Pulse from the list of

possible pulse sources as system pulse.

Configuring

ΔSpO

2

(Oxygen Saturation Difference)

MP40-90 only

Δ

SpO

2 is a derived measurement.

Measurement Settings: Main Setup -> Measurements ->

ΔSpO2

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP40 - MP90

C M Profile Adult

First SpO

2 x x SpO

2

Second SpO

2 x x SpO

2

r

Δ SpO

2 x x Off

Measurement x Enabled

Color x Green

Profile Pedi Profile Neo

ΔSpO

2

Configuration Implications

First SpO

2

/Second SpO

2

This setting is only available when Measurement is Enabled. The formula used to calculate the

Δ

SpO

2 value is:

Δ

SpO

2

= First SpO

2

- Second SpO

2

. Possible sources are:

SpO

2

, SpO

2 pr, SpO

2 po, SpO

2

r, SpO

2

l.

Measurement/

Δ

SpO

2

switch the

Δ

SpO

2 switch Off

Δ

SpO

Set Measurement to Enabled, if you want the monitor to automatically

measurement On when both configured SpO

2

sources are available. The user can still

2

in monitoring mode.

Set Measurement to Disabled, if you want the

Δ

SpO

2

measurement to be permanently disabled, which means that in monitoring mode it will not be possible to switch

Δ

SpO

2

On.

45

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Measurement Settings

Configuring NBP

(Non-Invasive Blood Pressure)

Measurement Settings: Main Setup -> Measurements -> NBP

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP20 - MP90

(H10/20/40)

MP5 - MP90

(H30)

MP20 (M20/M21)

MP5 (H10/20/40)

MP2/X2

MP5T

MP5 (B10/B11/B14)

MP2/X2

C M Profile

Adult

Profile

Pedi

Profile

Neo

Profile

Adult

Profile

Pedi

Profile

Neo

Profile

Adult

Profile

Pedi

Profile

Neo

Profile

Adult

Profile

Pedi

Profile

Neo

Profile

Outdoor

Alarms from

Sys. High

Sys. Low

Dia. High x x Sys.

x x 160 x x 90 x x 90

120

70

90

40

180

70

160

90

90

70 60

Dia. Low

Mean High

Mean Low x x x x 50 x 110 x 60

40

90

50

20

70

24

65

50

110

60

Alarms x x On

NBP x x On

Repetition Time x x 15 min

Auto/Manual

Sequence A

1 every

1

Sequence B

1 every

1

Sequence C

1 every

1

Sequence D

1 every

1

Pulse(NBP) x x x x x Auto x 4 Times x 5 min x 4 Times

Unit

Done Tone

Start Time

VP Pressure

Reference

NBP Time

Color

Manual

5 Times

15 min

5 Times

3 min 10 min 10 min

Manual

10 min

Auto

x x x x x 10 min x 4 Times x 15 min x 4 Times

15 min

5 Times

15 min

5 Times

15 min x x x x 30 min x x On x x x x x mmHg

Off

Synchronized

On

Not Synchron.

Off

Synchroni zed

60 mmHg

40 mmHg

Auscultatory

30 mmHg

Invasive

60 mmHg

Auscultatory

not applicable, this setting is stored in the Monitor Settings Block: see "Configuring User Interface Settings" on page

110.

Red Magenta White

1.Settings are only visible when Auto/Manual is set to ’Sequence’.

46

Measurement Settings

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

NBP Configuration Implications

Sequence A (B/C/D), every

These settings are only visible if Auto/Manual is set to

Sequence

and you select Setup Sequence in the Setup NBP menu. You can then define up to four measurement cycles which will run consecutively. For each cycle you can set the number of measurements and the interval between them. If you want to run less than four cycles in a sequence, set the number of measurements for one or more cycles to Off.

Pulse(NBP)

This lets you enable (On) or disable (Off) display of the Pulse numeric derived from the

NBP measurement. If the NBP numeric area on the monitor screen is configured large enough, the

Pulse(NBP) numeric will be displayed next to the NBP label in the NBP segment.

Start Time

If you set Start Time to Synchronized, the monitor will time the second measurement in a series to coincide with the next easy-to-document time. For example, if you start the first measurement at 08:23, and the Repetition Time is set to 10 minutes, the monitor will automatically perform the next measurement at 8:30, then 8:40 and so on.

Done Tone

Set Done Tone to On if you want to hear a short prompt tone and see a prompt message at completion of each NBP measurement.

VP Pressure

This setting determines the cuff pressure used during a Veni Puncture inflation. The cuff deflates automatically after a set time (adult/pediatric: 170 seconds, neonatal: 85 seconds) if it is not manually deflated beforehand.

Reference

The NBP measurement reference method can be Auscultatory or Invasive.

Invasive

delivers NBP values that very closely approximate values measured intra-arterially.

Auscultatory

delivers NBP values that very closely approximate values measured using the manual cuff method. The two references can exhibit a difference of 20 to 30 mmHg in patients with elevated pressures, with the auscultatory reference registering the lower values. Note that when Patient

Category

is set to Neo, the setting Reference is not shown. For the Neo patient category, the

Reference

used will always be Invasive. For further information, see the Application Note on NBP supplied on the monitor documentation DVD.

Configuring Invasive Pressure

Not

MP5T

When an MMS is connected to the monitor for the first time, it uses the default Pressure label ABP. When a Measurement Extension Module is connected for the first time, the Pressure label used for the combined

Pressure/Temp connector is CVP, the label used for the single Pressure connector is PAP; plug-in Pressure modules use the label P. If you then change the pressure label in monitoring mode, each device will remember the new label the next time they are reconnected.

The configuration settings for Invasive Pressure can be set individually for each Pressure label. The

selection of labels depends on the configured Label Set, see "Global Settings" on page 147.

47

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Measurement Settings

P

1

, ABP, ART, Ao, UAP, FAP, BAP, P1, P2, P3, P4 Settings

Measurement Settings: Main Setup -> Measurements -> <Press Label>

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP5 - MP90 (H10/20/40)

MP2/X2

MP5 - MP90 (H30) MP2/X2

C M Profile

Adult

Profile

Pedi

Profile

Neo

Profile

Adult

Profile

Pedi

Profile

Neo

Profile

Outdoor

Alarms from

Sys. High

Sys. Low

Dia. High

Dia. Low

Mean High

Mean Low

Alarms

ABP (or other label)

Pulse (<Press Label>) x

x not applicable, see "Configuring Pulse from Invasive Pressure" on page 53.

Scale x x 150 100 100

Mean Only

Filter x x x No

12 Hz

Mercury Cal

Artifact Suppr.

Unit

Color

Extreme Alarms

Δ Extreme High

Δ Extreme Low

Sys. High Clamp x x x x x x x x

Yes

60 sec mmHg

Red

Disabled

15

15

190

10

10

140

5

5

105

Sys. Low Clamp

Dia. High Clamp

Dia. Low Clamp

Mean High Clamp

Mean Low Clamp x x x x x x x Systolic x x 160 x x 90 x x 90

120

70

70

90

55

60

180

70

160

90

90

x x 50 x x 110 x x 70 x x On

40

90

50

20

70

36 x

x not applicable, the Pressure On/Off state is not a setting, see "Invasive Pressure

Configuration Implications" on page 51.

50

110

70

80

100

45

125

65

60

80

35

100

45

45

75

15

75

30

65

150

White

15

15

190

80

100

45

125

65

48

1.The label P will be interpreted as P1 by the IntelliVue Information Center. It is therefore not recommended to use P and P1 simultaneously on the IntelliVue monitor when connected to an IntelliVue Information Center.

Measurement Settings

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

CVP, RAP, LAP, UVP Settings

Measurement Settings: Main Setup -> Measurements -> <Press Label>

Factory Defaults

Item Name

Alarms from

Sys. High

Sys. Low

Dia. High

Dia. Low

Mean High

Mean Low

Alarms

CVP (or other label)

Scale

Mean Only

Filter

Mercury Cal

Artifact Suppr.

Unit

Color

Extreme Alarms

Δ Extreme High

Δ Extreme Low

Sys. High Clamp

Sys. Low Clamp

Dia. High Clamp

Dia. Low Clamp

Mean High Clamp

Mean Low Clamp

Oper.

Mode

MP5 - MP90 (H10/20/40)

MP2/X2

MP5 - MP90 (H30) MP2/X2

C M Profile

Adult

Profile

Pedi

Profile

Neo

Profile

Adult

Profile

Pedi

Profile

Neo

Profile

Outdoor

x x x x x x x x x x Mean x x 14 x x 6 x x 6

10

2

2

10

2

2 x x -4 x x 10 x x 0 x x On

-4

4

0

-4

4

0 x x

not applicable, the Pressure On/Off state is not a setting, see "Invasive Pressure

Configuration Implications" on page 51.

-4

10

0

14

6

6

x x x x x x x x 30 x x Yes

12 Hz

Yes

60 sec mmHg

Cyan

Disabled

Blue White

10

-5

15

-5

5

5

20

0

5

-5

10

-5

5

5

15

0

5

-5

10

-5

5

5

15

0

10

-5

15

-5

5

5

20

0

49

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Measurement Settings

PAP Settings

Measurement Settings: Main Setup -> Measurements -> PAP

Factory Defaults

Item Name

Alarms from

Sys. High

Sys. Low

Dia. High

Dia. Low

Mean High

Mean Low

Alarms

PAP

Scale

Mean Only

Filter

Mercury Cal.

Artifact Suppr.

Unit

Color

Extreme Alarms

Δ Extreme High

Δ Extreme Low

Sys. High Clamp

Sys. Low Clamp

Dia. High Clamp

Dia. Low Clamp

Mean High Clamp

Mean Low Clamp

Oper.

Mode

MP2 - MP90

X2

MP2/X2

C M Profile Adult Profile Pedi Profile Neo Profile Outdoor

x x x x x x x x x Diastolic x x x x 16 x x 0 x x x 34 x 10 x 20 x 0

60

24

4

-4

26

12

60

24

4

-4

26

12

34

10

16

0

20

0

x x On x

x not applicable, the Pressure On/Off state is not a setting, see "Invasive Pressure

Configuration Implications" on page 51.

x x 30 x x x x x x x x No x 12 Hz

Yes

60 sec mmHg

Yellow

Disabled

5

White

5

45

5

20

-5

25

-5

15

5

-5

35

5

5

5

65

15

5

-5

35

5

5

5

65

5

20

-5

25

-5

5

5

45

50

Measurement Settings

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

ICP, IC1, IC2 Settings

Measurement Settings: Main Setup -> Measurements -> <Press Label>

Alarms from

Sys. High

Sys. Low

Dia. High

Dia. Low

Mean High

Mean Low

Alarms

ICP (or other label)

Scale

Mean Only

Filter

Mercury Cal

Artifact Suppr.

Unit

Color

Extreme Alarms

Δ Extreme High

Δ Extreme Low

Sys. High Clamp

Sys. Low Clamp

Dia. High Clamp

Dia. Low Clamp

Mean High Clamp

Mean Low Clamp

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP2 - MP90

X2

MP2/X2

C M Profile Adult Profile Pedi Profile Neo Profile Outdoor

x x x x x x x x x Mean x x x x 6 x x -4 x x x x x x

14

6

10

0

2

-4

4

0

10

2

10

2

2

-4

4

0

14

6

6

-4

10

0

x x On x x

not applicable, the Pressure On/Off state is not a setting, see "Invasive Pressure

Configuration Implications" on page 51.

x x 30 x x x x x x x x Yes x 12 Hz

Yes

60 sec mmHg

Magenta

Disabled

10

White

10

20

0

10

-5

15

-5

0

5

-5

10

-5

10

10

15

0

5

-5

10

-5

10

10

15

0

10

-5

15

-5

10

10

20

Invasive Pressure Configuration Implications

Alarms From

lets you choose the pressure alarm source. You can monitor for alarm conditions in systolic, diastolic and mean pressure, either singly or in parallel.

<Pressure Label>

The On/Off state of a Pressure label cannot be preconfigured. A pressure label is automatically switched On when a pressure transducer is connected to a pressure socket on the monitor.

Mean Only

If you configure Mean Only to Yes, only the mean pressure numeric will be displayed.

51

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Measurement Settings

Filter

This setting lets you apply a 12 Hz or a 40 Hz filter to the pressure signal. Use the 12 Hz filter when the pressure transducer is connected to the intra-arterial catheter via a fluid filled tubing system

(pressure line). The 12 Hz filter reduces resonant effects that can be introduced by the tubing system. The

40

Hz filter should only be selected when using special pressure transducers, such as catheter-tip pressure transducers, or transducers that are directly connected to the intra-arterial catheter without the need for a fluid filled tubing system.

Mercury Cal

This setting determines whether the menu entries Cal. Press and Cal.

Factor

are shown in the pressure’s setup menu. If you want users to be able to perform a mercury calibration while in monitoring mode, set Mercury Cal to Yes.For detailed information about performing a mercury calibration, see the monitor Instructions for Use.

Artifact Suppr.

Some clinical procedures may affect blood pressure, for example, a flush procedure or a blood sample. The setting Artifact Suppr.lets you suppress the monitor’s normal response (alarming) to these non-physiological artifacts for a specified duration (30, 60, or 90 seconds, or

Off

). During artifact suppression, the monitor shows the INOP message “<Pressure Label>

ARTIFACT”, and a question mark is shown beside the pressure numerics. Pressure alarms and the

“<Pressure Label> Non-Pulsatile” INOP are suppressed during the configured period.

Extreme Alarms

This setting let you enable or disable the extreme pressure alarms.

Δ Extreme High/Low Extreme High and Low pressure alarms are based on the pressure limit alarms. Use the

Δ

Extreme High

and

Δ

Extreme Low

setting to define the difference between the pressure limit and the corresponding extreme limit. For example, if the High Limit for a pressure is 160 mmHg and

Δ

Extreme High

is 15 mmHg, the resulting Extreme High limit is 175 mmHg. Note that the

Δ

Extreme High

and

Δ

Extreme Low

settings are the same for all pressure alarm sources: systolic, diastolic, and mean.

Sys.High/Low Clamp

The Sys.High Clamp and Sys.Low Clamp allow you to configure a safety threshold for the Extreme Low and Extreme High systolic pressure alarms. For example, if the High

Limit for the systolic pressure is 180 mmHg and the

Δ

Extreme High

setting is 15 mmHg (180 + 15 =

195) with a Sys. High Clamp set at 190, the resulting extreme high systolic pressure alarm would be signalled at 190 instead of 195 mmHg. If the clinician sets the high or low systolic pressure alarm limits above or below the limit clamps, the normal yellow alarm limits become extreme pressure limits and a red alarm is signalled when the limit is violated. Be sure to set the clamps beyond the configured pressure limits.

Dia.High/Low Clamp

The Dia.High Clamp and Dia.Low Clamp allow you to configure a safety threshold for the Extreme Low and Extreme High diastolic pressure alarms. For example, if the Low

Limit for the diastolic pressure is 60 mmHg and the

Δ

Extreme Low

setting is 15 mmHg (60 - 15 = 45) with a Dia.Low Clamp set at 50, the resulting extreme low diastolic pressure alarm would be signalled at 50 instead of 45 mmHg. If the clinician sets the high or low diastolic pressure alarm limits above or below the limit clamps, the normal yellow alarm limits become extreme pressure limits and a red alarm is signalled when the limit is violated. Be sure to set the clamps beyond the configured pressure limits.

Mean High/Low Clamp

The Mean High Clamp and Mean Low Clamp allow you to configure a safety threshold for the Extreme Low and Extreme High mean pressure alarms. For example, if the High Limit for the mean pressure is 120 mmHg and the

Δ

Extreme High

setting is 15 mmHg

(120 + 15 = 135) with a Mean High Clamp set at 125, the resulting extreme high mean pressure alarm would be signalled at 125 instead of 135 mmHg. If the clinician sets the high or low mean pressure alarm limits above or below the limit clamps, the normal yellow alarm limits become extreme pressure limits and

52

Measurement Settings

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

a red alarm is signalled when the limit is violated. Be sure to set the clamps beyond the configured pressure limits.

Configuring Pulse from Invasive Pressure

Not

MP5T

Measurement Settings:

Main Setup -> Measurements -> <Press Label> -> Pulse (<Press Label>)

Factory Defaults

Item Name

High Limit

Low Limit

Pulse Alarms

AlarmSrc (ECG)

Pulse (<Press Label>)

System Pulse

QRS Volume

Δ ExtrTachy

Tachy Clamp

Δ ExtrBrady

Brady Clamp

Alarms Off

AlarmSource Sel.

PulseAlarms Tele

Oper.

Mode

MP2 - MP90

X2

C M Profile Adult Profile Pedi Profile Neo

x x x x x x x

x not applicable, see "Configuring ECG/Pulse Alarms" on page 33.

x x x x x x x x On x

x not applicable, see "Configuring the System Pulse" on page 35.

x

x not applicable, see "Configuring User Interface Settings" on page 110.

x

not applicable, see "Configuring ECG/Pulse Alarms" on page 33.

Pulse from Invasive Pressure Configuration Implications

Pulse (<Press Label>)

This setting lets you switch the Pulse from the related Invasive Pressure label On or Off. If you switch Off a Pulse that is currently selected as the source for the System Pulse (see

"Configuring the System Pulse" on page 35), the monitor will use the next available Pulse from the list of

possible pulse sources as system pulse.

Configuring CPP

(Cerebral Perfusion Pressure)

Measurement Settings: Main Setup -> Measurements -> CPP

CPP is a derived measurement. The measurement unit used for the CPP calculation depends on the unit setting for arterial source and ICP.

53

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Measurement Settings

Factory Defaults

Item Name

High Limit

Low Limit

Alarms

CPP

Measurement

Arterial Source

Scale

Color

Oper.

Mode

MP2 - MP90

X2

C M Profile

Adult

Profile

Pedi

x x 130 x x 50 x x On x x Off x Enabled x x ABPm x 105 mmHg x Magenta

100

40

Profile

Neo

90

30

MP5T

MP5 (B10/B11/B14)

Profile

Adult

Profile

Pedi

Profile

Neo

MP2/X2

Profile

Outdoor

130

50

Disabled

Off

White

CPP Configuration Implications

CPP / Measurement

Set Measurement to Enabled, if you want the monitor to automatically switch the CPP measurement On when both the ICP and the set arterial source are available. The user can still switch Off CPP in monitoring mode.

Set Measurement to Disabled, if you want the CPP measurement to be permanently disabled, which means that in monitoring mode it will not be possible to switch CPP On.

Arterial Source

This setting is only available when Measurement is Enabled. The formula used to calculate CPP is: CPP = Arterial Source - ICP. Possible sources are: ABPm, ARTm, AoM, FAPm,

BAPm

Configuring PPV

(Pulse Pressure Variation)

MP5-90 only

Measurement Settings: Main Setup -> Measurements -> PPV

PPV is a derived measurement. Pulse Pressure Variation can be calculated in two different ways on this monitor - directly from the pressure measurement or in conjunction with the continuous cardiac output

(CCO) measurement. Note that PPV settings made here do not apply to the PPV calculated by the

continuous cardiac output measurement. Only one PPV can be active at a time. See "Configuring CCO

(Continuous Cardiac Output)" on page 56.

Factory Defaults

Item Name

Arterial Source

PPV

Measurement

Oper.

Mode

MP5 - MP90

C M Profile Adult

x x ABP x x Off x Disabled

Profile Pedi Profile Neo

54

Measurement Settings

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

PPV Configuration Implications

PPV / Measurement

If you set Measurement to Enabled, the user can switch the PPV measurement On in monitoring mode, provided the set arterial source is available. If Enabled, the

derived PPV may generate a label conflict with the PPV calculated by the CCO measurement, see "CCO

Configuration Implications" on page 57.

If set to Disabled, the PPV measurement is permanently disabled, which means that in monitoring mode it will not be possible to switch PPV On.

Arterial Source

This setting is only available when Measurement is Enabled. Possible sources are: P, ABP, ART, AO, FAP, BAP. The formula used to calculate PPV is:

Configuring C.O.

(Cardiac Output)

Not MP5

Measurement Settings: Main Setup -> Measurements -> C.O.

Factory Defaults

Item Name

Method

Measuring Mode

Auto-Calibration

1

RL Shunt

1/2

C.O.

Oper.

Mode

MP20 - MP90 (H10/20/40)

Tblood High Limit

Tblood Low Limit

Alarms

Temperature Unit

Color

1.Setting only available if Transpulmonary method is selected.

2.Setting not available in the U.S.A or in clinical environments under FDA control.

MP20 - MP90 (H30)

C M Profile

Adult

Profile

Pedi

Profile

Neo

Profile

Adult

Profile

Pedi

Profile

Neo

x x x

x not applicable, this is not a setting, see "C.O. Configuration Implications"

x x Standard

On

Off x

x not applicable, the C.O. On/Off state is not a setting, see "C.O. Configuration

Implications".

x x 39.0

º

C x x 36.0

º

C x x On x

º

C x Green Yellow

55

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Measurement Settings

C.O. Configuration Implications

Method

This lets you choose the C.O. method to configure the settings for each method. If a cardiac output catheter is connected, the correct method is automatically detected from the catheter type connected and cannot be manually changed.

If you use the Transpulmonary method, and the PPV derived from an arterial source is Enabled

(see "Configuring PPV (Pulse Pressure Variation)" on page 54), a label conflict with the PPV derived from

the continuous cardiac output measurement may be generated.

Measuring Mode

This setting lets you change the C.O. measurement mode. If set to Auto, the clinician will be able to quickly perform a series of injections without further interaction with the monitor.

After the clinician has initially started the C.O. measurement, for example by selecting the pop-up key

Start C.O.

, the monitor will prompt the clinician when the measurement is ready for the next injection, and the injection can be performed. If no injection is detected within 30 seconds (Right-Heart method) or 90 seconds (Transpulmonary method), the user is prompted again. If set to Standard, the clinician has to select the pop-up key Start C.O. again for each new injection.

Auto-Calibration

This setting is only available if Method is set to Transpulmonary. Set this to Off if you do not want to automatically trigger a CCO calibration every time you save the C.O. value.

This results in two separate pop-up keys in the Cardiac Output Procedure window: one labeled Save

C.O.

, the other labeled Cal CCO. If Auto-Calibration is set to On, both functions are combined and only one pop-up key will be available: Save C.O.&Cal CCO.

RL Shunt

This setting is only available if Method is set to Transpulmonary. Set RL Shunt to

On

to enable Right-Left Shunt detection. This setting is not available in the U.S.A or in clinical environments under FDA control.

C.O.

The On/Off state of the Cardiac Output measurement cannot be preconfigured. Cardiac Output is automatically switched On when a C.O. transducer is connected to the monitor. In configuration mode,

C.O.

can be manually switched On, even if no catheter is connected.

Configuring CCO

(Continuous Cardiac Output)

Not MP5 Measurement Settings: Main Setup -> Measurements -> CCO

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP20 - MP90 X2

C M Profile Adult Profile

Pedi

Profile

Neo

Profile

Adult

Profile

Pedi

Profile

Neo

Profile

Outdoor

Settings common to CCO and CCI

Alarms From x x CCO

CCO From

PPV From CCO

CCO x x x ABP

Off

Color

CCO settings

x

x not applicable, the CCO On/Off state is not a setting, see "CCO Configuration

Implications" on page 57.

x Green White

CCO High Limit x x 8.5 l/min 3.7 l/min 1.3 l/min

8.5 l/min

56

Measurement Settings

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP20 - MP90 X2

C M Profile Adult Profile

Pedi

Profile

Neo

CCO Low Limit

Alarms

CCI settings

x x 4.0 l/min x x On

CCI High Limit

CCI Low Limit x x 4.3 l/min/m

2 x x 2.0 l/min/m

2

Alarms x x On

2.6 l/min 0.3 l/min

3.7 l/min/m

2

2.6 l/min/m

2

5.2 l/min/m

2

1.2 l/min/m

2

Profile

Adult

Profile

Pedi

Profile

Neo

Profile

Outdoor

4.0 l/min

4.3 l/min/m

2.0 l/min/m

2

2

CCO Configuration Implications

Alarms From

To set CCO alarms to be triggered by the indexed CCO value, set Alarms From to

CCI

.

The CCO From setting defines the arterial pressure source for CCO. The following pressure labels can be used as pressure source for the CCO: ABP, Ao, ART, UAP (plus FAP and BAP if Full is selected as

the Label Set, see “Global Settings” on page 147).

PPV From CCO

This setting lets you switch the PPV calculated from the CCO measurement On or

Off

. Pulse Pressure Variation can be calculated in two different ways on this monitor - in conjunction with the continuous cardiac output measurement, or directly from the invasive pressure measurement.

Note that this setting does not apply to the PPV calculated from the pressure measurement.

CCO

The On/Off state of the CCO measurement cannot be preconfigured. CCO is automatically switched On when an appropriate C.O. transducer is connected to the monitor.

Configuring SVR

(Systemic Vascular Resistance)

MP20-90 only

Measurement Settings: Main Setup -> Measurements -> SVR

SVR is a derived measurement.

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP20 - MP90

Label

Arterial Source

Set CVP

SVR

Measurement

Color

C M Profile Adult

x x SVR x x ABPm x x 0 mmHg x x Off x Enabled x green

Profile Pedi Profile Neo

57

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Measurement Settings

SVR Configuration Implications

Label

This setting is only available when Measurement is Enabled. It lets you select whether the

SVR or the SVRI (indexed SVR) is displayed. It is not possible to display both values at one time.

Arterial Source

This setting is only available when Measurement is Enabled. Possible sources are: ABPm, ARTm, AoM, UAPm, FAPm, BAPm. The formula used to calculate SVR is:

(

Arterial Source –

SVR = 79,96

CVP

mean

)

CCO

Set CVP

This setting is only available when Measurement is Enabled. It defines a value to be used in place of CVP to calculate the SVR if no measured CVP is available. It can be set between 0 and 16 mmHg.

SVR / Measurement

If Measurement is set to Enabled, the monitor automatically switches the SVR measurement On when the set arterial source is available. The user can still switch Off SVR in monitoring mode.

Set Measurement to Disabled, if you want the SVR measurement to be permanently disabled, which means that in monitoring mode it will not be possible to switch SVR On.

Note that the settings made here do not affect the SVR calculated in the Hemo Calcs window.

Configuring SO

2

(Intravascular Oxygen Saturation)

The configuration settings for SO

2

can be set individually for each label - SO

2

, SvO

2, and ScvO

2

.

SO

2

, SvO

2

, and ScvO

2

Settings

MP40-90 only

Measurement Settings: Main Setup -> Measurements -> <SO

2

Label>

Factory Defaults

Item Name

High Limit

Low Limit

Alarms

SO

2

Light Intensity

Catheter Factor

1

Hb/Hct Entry

1

Hct [%]l

1

Calibration Value

Color

Oper.

Mode

M1011A: MP40 - MP90

M1021A: MP60 - MP90

C M Profile Adult Profile Pedi Profile Neo

x x 80% x x SvO

SO

2

2

: 60%

/ScvO

2

: 70% x x On x x not applicable, the SO

2

Implications".

On/Off state is not a setting, see "SO2 Configuration

x On x

x not applicable, this is not a setting, see "SO2 Configuration Implications".

x x Hct[%] x

x not applicable, this is not a setting, see "SO2 Configuration Implications".

x

x not applicable, this is not a setting, see "SO2 Configuration Implications".

x Yellow

1. Setting available for the M1011A SO

2

module only.

58

Measurement Settings

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

SO

2

Configuration Implications

<SO

2

Label>

The On/Off state of the SO

2 automatically switched On when an SO

2

measurement cannot be preconfigured. SO

transducer is connected to the monitor.

2

is

Light Intensity

Set this to Off if you do not want the Light Intensity Indicator to be displayed next to the SO

2

numeric.

Catheter Factor

Depending on the probe/catheter in use, you may need to enter a catheter correction factor. The appropriate correction factor is indicated in the ’Accessories’ chapter of the

IntelliVue Instructions for Use or in the catheter documentation. The Catheter Factor can only be entered during an in-vivo calibration and is stored in the Optical Module. Note that this is not a measurement setting that can be permanently stored in the monitor configuration.

Hb/Hct Entry

This setting determines the lab value that should be used for the in-vivo calibration.

Available choices are Hct[%], Hb[g/dl], or Hb[mmol/l].

Hct

(or Hb) Depending on the configuration of the setting Hb/HCT Entry, this lets you enter either the Hct or the Hb value obtained from the laboratory analysis. Hct(or Hb) can only be entered during an in-vivo calibration and is stored in the Optical Module. Note that this is not a measurement setting that can be permanently stored in the monitor configuration.

Calibration Value

This shows the calibration value resulting from the last in-vivo calibration. It is stored in the Optical Module and is not a measurement setting that can be permanently stored in the monitor configuration.

Configuring Sp-vO

2

(Oxygen Extraction )

MP40-90 only

Measurement Settings: Main Setup -> Measurements -> Sp-vO

2

Sp-vO

2

is a derived measurement. Oxygen extraction is the difference between the measured SpO

2

SvO

2

values. To calculate the Sp-vO

2

, the monitor needs an SO

2

source (must be labeled SvO

2

and

) and an

SpO

2

source which can be set to any of the available SpO

2

labels except %SpO

2

T.

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP60 - MP90

SpO

2

Source

Sp - vO

2

Measurement

Color

C M Profile Adult

x x SpO

2 x x Off x Enabled x Green

Profile Pedi Profile Neo

Sp-vO

2

Configuration Implications

SpO

2

Source

This setting is only available when Measurement is Enabled. The formula used to calculate Oxygen Extraction is: Sp-vO

2

= SpO

2

Source - SvO

2 source used for the calculation. Possible sources are: SpO

2

. SpO

2

, SpO

2

Source

determines the SpO

2 pr, SpO

2 po, SpO

2 r, SpO

2 l.

59

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Measurement Settings

Sp-vO

2 /

Measurement

If Measurement is set to Enabled, the monitor automatically switches the Sp-vO

2

measurement On when the set SpO

2 source and the SvO

2

value are available. The user can still switch Off Sp-vO

2

in monitoring mode.

Set Measurement to Disabled, if you want the Sp-vO

2

measurement to be permanently disabled, which means that in monitoring mode it will not be possible to switch Sp-vO

2

On.

Configuring tcGas

(transcutaneous Gas)

MP40-90 only

Measurement Settings: Main Setup -> Measurements -> tcGas

Factory Defaults

Item Name

TcpO

2

High Limit

TcpO

2

Low Limit

TcpO

2

Alarms

TcpCO

2

HighLimit

TcpCO

2

Low Limit

TcpCO

2

Alarms

TcpO

2

TcpCO

2

Site Time

Site Timer

Ambient Pressure

HeatPowerDisplay

Disable Timer

Heat Switch Off

Transducer Temp.

CO

2

Correction

MetabolismFactor

TcGas Unit

Temperature Unit

TcpO

2

Color

TcpCO

2

Color

Oper.

Mode

MP40 - MP90

C M Profile Adult Profile Pedi Profile Neo

x x 80 mmHg x x 50 mmHg x x On x x 50 mmHg x x 30 mmHg x x On x x not applicable, the TcpO

2

Implications" on page 60.

On/Off state is not a setting, see "TcGas Configuration

x x not applicable, the TcpCO

2

Implications" on page 60.

On/Off state is not a setting, see "TcGas Configuration

x x 4.0 hrs x Enabled x x x x x x

x not applicable, Ambient Pressure is not a setting, see "TcGas Configuration

Implications" on page 60.

x

x not applicable, HeatPowerDisplay is not a setting, see "TcGas Configuration

Implications" on page 60.

x x

Not Allowed

No x x 43.0 °C x On

8 mmHg mmHg

0

C

Blue

Green

TcGas Configuration Implications

Prolonged continuous monitoring may increase the risk of undesirable changes in skin characteristics, such as irritation, reddening, blistering or burns. If the site timer is disabled, the transducer will heat indefinitely while on a patient.

60

Measurement Settings

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

TcpO

2

/TcpCO

2

The On/Off state of the TcpO

2

/TcpCO

2

measurement cannot be preconfigured.

TcGas measurements are automatically switched On when a tcGas transducer is connected to the monitor.

Site Time

This setting defines the period after which the clinician is reminded by the monitor to change the sensor site. When the time expires, the monitor sounds a tone and displays a change site INOP.

Depending on how Heat Switch Off is configured, the monitor either switches off the transducer heating or continues monitoring. Choose the time you want the transducer to remain on the measurement site. The optimum time depends on the transducer temperature and your patient’s skin sensitivity.

Site Timer

This setting is only available if Disable Timer is configured to Allowed. To disable the site timer, set Site Timer to Disabled.

Ambient Pressure

is not a setting that can be stored in the configuration. It uses the Global Setting

Altitude

(see "Global Settings" on page 147) to determine the default Ambient Pressure.

Ambient Pressure

can be adjusted in both Monitoring and Configuration mode. The monitor remembers this pressure setting until a new one is entered.

HeatPowerDisplay

is not a setting that can be stored in the configuration, it automatically defaults to Absolute. When a tcGas transducer is connected, HeatPowerDisplay lets you change the way the heating power of the tcGas sensor is displayed. Choices are Absolute and Relative. For more detail, see the IntelliVue Instructions for Use.

Disable Timer

If Disable Timer is set to Allowed, the user can disable the site timer in monitoring mode so that the Change Site reminder message is not shown.

Heat Switch Off

If Heat Switch Off is set to Yes, the transducer heater is automatically switched off when the site time period has elapsed. If Heat Switch Off is set to No, the transducer will remain at operating temperature while it is attached to the patient, and tcGas monitoring will not be interrupted when the site time period is over.

Transducer Temp.

Lets you select the temperature to heat the patient’s skin under the tcGas transducer. This temperature should be selected according to the patient’s age, weight and physical condition, and in accordance with the hospital policy. Usually, a higher transducer temperature gives a better correlation and a quicker response time. However, higher temperatures also increase the risk of skin burns. Most physicians prefer a temperature between 42°C (107° F) and 44°C (111° F), and a site time of four hours or less. Usually, the higher the transducer temperature, the less the site time should be.

Whenever you change the temperature setting, the monitor forces you to make a new calibration.

CO

2

Correction / MetabolismFactor

Transcutaneous pCO

2

values tend to be higher than arterial values due to the metabolic processes of the skin and the effect of heating on the blood under the transducer.

The transducer temperature causes an increase in partial CO

2

pressure. If CO

2

Correction

is set to

On

, the monitor automatically corrects the measured tcpCO

2

for this increase.

CO

2

production in the epidermis increases the CO

2

value. If CO

2

Correction

is set to On, this metabolic effect is corrected according to the value configured for MetabolismFactor. The monitor automatically deducts the set value from the measured tcpCO

2

value.

61

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Measurement Settings

Configuring CO

2

(Capnometry)

CO

2

can be measured by an anesthetic gas analyzer (AGM, G1, or G5), measurement extension modules

(Microstream, Sidestream, or Mainstream), or the integrated CO

2

measurement in the MP5. The settings listed in this section do not apply to CO

2 measured by an anesthetic gas analyzer.

Most settings apply to all supported CO

2

extensions. Where a setting only applies to a particular device, this is indicated.

The algorithm with which the CO

2

measurement is calculated, changes according to the configured altitude setting. Make sure that the correct altitude setting is entered before the CO

2

measurement is used.

Altitude

can be configured as a Global Setting, see "Configuring General Global Settings" on page

147.

Measurement Settings: Main Setup -> Measurements -> CO

2

Factory Defaults

Item Name

etCO

2 etCO

2 imCO

CO

CO

2

2

2

High

Low

High

Alarms

Oper.

Mode

MP5 - MP90 (H10/20/40),

MP2/X2

MP5 - MP90 (H30)

imCO

2

N

2

O Corr.

1

Oxygen Corr.

2

Gas Corr.

2

Agent Corr.

2

Scale

Unit

Color

Max Hold

HumidtyCorr

1.Setting available for M3015A, M3016A and MP5 with Microstream CO

2

only.

2.Setting available for M3014A only.

MP2/X2

C M Profile

Adult

Profile

Pedi

Profile Neo Profile

Adult

Profile

Pedi

Profile

Neo

Profile

Outdoor

x x 50 x x 30 x x 4 x x On

60

25

50

30

x x not applicable, the CO

2

On/Off state is not a setting, see "CO2 Configuration

Implications" on page 62

x On x x Off

Off

On

x x x x x x 16% x x Off x x 0% x x 40 mmHg mmHg

Yellow

Off

BTPS

50 mmHg

White

40 mmHg

White

CO

2

Configuration Implications

CO

2

The On/Off state of the CO

2 measurement cannot be preconfigured. CO

2 switched On when a CO

2 transducer is connected to the monitor.

is automatically

imCO

2

imCO

2

This setting lets you switch the inspired minimum CO

value is the smallest CO

2

concentration measured during inspiration. This helps you to detect unphysiological CO

2

concentrations in the inspired gas.

2

(imCO

2

) numeric On or Off. The

62

Measurement Settings

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

The imCO

2

High

limit defines the alarm limit for the imCO

2

numeric.

N2O Corr.

This settings lets you correct the CO

2

reading for proportions of N

2

O. If N

2

O is present in the ventilation gas mixture, you must turn this on. If this setting is not available in the

Setup CO

2

menu, the CO

2 measurement in your Measurement Extension Module does not require N or it is setup with Gas Corr. (see below).

2

O correction

Gas Corr.

This settings allows correction of CO

2

Helium or N

2

reading for proportions of Helium or N

2

O. If

O is present in the ventilation gas mixture, you must make the appropriate selection. If this setting is not available in the

Setup CO

Extension Module does not require N

Corr.

(see above).

2

2

menu, the CO

2 measurement in your Measurement

O or Helium correction, or the N

2

O correction is setup with N2O

Agent Corr.

This setting lets you correct the CO

2

reading for proportions of the following anesthetic agents: Halothane, Enflurane. Isoflurane, Sevoflurane, Desflurane. Corrections can be applied between

0.0% and 20.0%. If any of the specified anesthetic agents is present in the ventilation gas mixture, you must select the appropriate concentration.

Oxygen Corr.

This settings lets you correct the CO

2

reading for proportions of O

2 in the gas mixture. If this setting is not available in the

Setup CO

2

menu, the CO

2

Measurement Extension Module does not require O

2

correction.

measurement in your

Max Hold

If Max Hold is configured to

10 sec

or

20 sec

, the etCO

2

CO

2 breath-to-breath value.

numeric shows the highest

value measured within the previous 10 or 20 seconds. If set to Off the etCO

2

numeric shows

HumidtyCorr

This setting determines the method used to correct the influence of water vapor in the patient’s breath on the CO

2

reading. The options are Body Temperature Pressure Saturated (BTPS) or

Standard Temperature Pressure Dry (STPD). Setting HumidtyCorr to BTPS takes the partial pressure contributed by the water vapor into consideration and therefore results in lower CO

2

readings when compared to STPD. For an exact definition and the formula used, see the section on “Measurement

Specifications” in the “Installation and Specifications” chapter of the monitor’s Instructions for Use.

Configuring awRR from CO

2

(Airway Respiration Rate)

Measurement Settings: Main Setup -> Measurements -> awRR

AwRR can be derived from the CO

2 of the CO

2

measured by an anesthetic gas analyzer (AGM, G1, or G5), or by any measurement extension modules (Microstream, Sidestream, or Mainstream), or by the integrated CO

2

measurement in the MP5. The settings listed in this section do not apply for the awRR derived from an anesthetic gas analyzer.

Factory Defaults

Item Name

High Limit

Oper.

Mode

MP2 - MP90

X2

C M Profile Adult

x x 30

Profile Pedi Profile Neo

100

63

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Measurement Settings

Factory Defaults

Item Name

Low Limit

Apnea Time

Alarms awRR

Oper.

Mode

MP2 - MP90

X2

C M Profile Adult

x x 8 x x 20 sec x x On x x On

Profile Pedi Profile Neo

30

awRR Configuration Implications

Apnea Time

The apnea alarm is a high priority red alarm used to detect apneas. The Apnea Time defines the time period between the point where the monitor cannot detect any respiration activity and the indication of the apnea alarm.

awRR

This setting lets you switch the awRR measurement from CO

2

On or Off.

Configuring Resp

(Impedance Respiration)

Measurement Settings: Main Setup -> Measurements -> Resp

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP5 - MP90 (H10/20/40)

MP2/X2

MP5 - MP90 (H30)

High Limit

Low Limit

Apnea Time

Alarms

Resp

Detection

Color

C M Profile

Adult

x x 30 x x 8 x x 20 sec x x On x x On x x Auto x Yellow

Profile

Pedi

Profile

Neo

100

30

Profile

Adult

Off

White

Profile

Pedi

Profile

Neo

MP2/X2

Profile

Outdoor

30

8

On

White

Resp Configuration Implications

Apnea Time

The apnea alarm is a high priority red alarm used to detect apneas. The Apnea Time defines the time period between the point where the monitor cannot detect any respiration activity and the indication of the apnea alarm.

Resp

This setting lets you switch the Resp measurement On or Off. If Resp is switched Off, the small current applied to the Resp electrodes to enable the impedance measurement is switched off.

Detection

The respiration detection level can be configured to be set either automatically or manually. For further information, see the section on “Changing Resp Detection Modes” in the monitor’s

Instructions for Use.

64

Measurement Settings

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Configuring Spirometry

MP40-90 only

Measurement Settings: Main Setup -> Measurements -> Spirometry

Factory Defaults

Item Name

No Al. til Breath

Color

Oper.

Mode

MP40 - MP90

C M Profile Adult

x x

On

White

Profile Pedi Profile Neo

Spirometry Configuration Implications

No Al. til Breath

If set to set On, the monitor suppresses alarms from the Spirometry module until it detects that a patient has been connected to the module (when breathing is detected).

Spirometry AWF (Airway Flow) Settings

Measurement Settings: Main Setup -> Measurements ->

Spirometry -> AWF

Factory Defaults

Item Name

Scale

Color

Oper.

Mode

MP40 - MP90

C M Profile Adult

x x 150 l/min x White

Profile Pedi

100 l/min

Spirometry AWP (Airway Pressure) Settings

Measurement Settings: Main Setup -> Measurements ->

Spirometry -> AWP

Profile Neo

20 l/min

Factory Defaults

Item Name

PIP High

PIP Alarms

PEEP High

PEEP Low

PEEP Alarms

Scale

Color

Oper.

Mode

MP40 - MP90

C M Profile Adult

x x 40 cmH2O x x On x x 25 cmH2O x x 0 cmH2O x x On x x 40 cmH2O x White

Profile Pedi

25 cmH2O

40 cmH2O

Profile Neo

20 cmH2O

20 cmH2O

65

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Spirometry AWV (Airway Volume) Settings

Measurement Settings: Main Setup -> Measurements ->

Spirometry -> AWV

Measurement Settings

Factory Defaults

Item Name

MVexp High

MVexp Low

MVexp Alarms

MV

TV

Scale

Color

Oper.

Mode

MP40 - MP90

C M Profile Adult

x x 8.0 l/min x x 4.0 l/min x x On x x exp + in x x exp + in x x 800 ml x White

Profile Pedi

4.0 l/min

2.5 l/min

200 ml

Profile Neo

0.8 l/min

0.4 l/min

50 ml

Spirometry Configuration Implications

MV

This setting lets you choose the measured components for minute volume (inspiratory, expiratory, inspiratory + expiratory or off). If set to Off, there will be no alarming for minute volume.

TV

This setting lets you choose the measured components for tidal volume (inspiratory, expiratory, inspiratory + expiratory or off). If set to Off, there will be no alarming for tidal volume.

Spirometry Gas Compensation Settings

Measurement Settings: Main Setup -> Measurements ->

Spirometry -> Gas Compensation

Factory Defaults

Item Name

Mode

Balance Gas

Inspired O

Unit

2

Inspired Agent

Inspired Temp

Oper.

Mode

MP40 - MP90

C M Profile Adult

x x Manual x x N

2 x x 30% x x 0.0% x x 25

0

C x

0

C

Profile Pedi Profile Neo

Spirometry Configuration Implications

Mode

Use this setting to choose the gas compensation mode. Select Manual to manually enter gas concentrations or Gas Analyzer to derive gas concentrations from the Philips gas analyzer.

66

Measurement Settings

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Note: Gas concentrations from the gas analyzer are only available for Philips gas analyzers, not for devices connected via a Vuelink or IntelliBridge plug-in module. If gas concentrations from the gas analyzer are selected but not all data is available, the missing data is taken from manually entered values. In case of invalid data or no data at all, the INOP message SPIRO GAS COMPENS? is displayed.

Balance Gas

This setting lets you select the type of balance gas used. Choices are N

2

, and N

2

0

.

Inspired O

2

/ Inspired Agent / Inspired Temp

These settings can be adjusted to match the concentration of inspired O

2

and anesthetic agent, as well as the temperature of the inspired gas.

Configuring RRspir

(Respiration from Spirometry)

MP40-90 only

Measurement Settings: Main Setup -> Measurements ->

Spirometry -> RRspir

Factory Defaults

Item Name

High Limit

Low Limit

Apnea Time

RRspir Alarms

RRspir

Oper.

Mode

MP40 - MP90

C M Profile Adult

x x 30 rpm x x 8 rpm x x 20 sec x x On x x On

Profile Pedi Profile Neo

60 rpm

30 rpm

RRspir Configuration Implications

Apnea Time

The apnea alarm is a high priority red alarm used to detect apneas. The Apnea Time defines the time period between the point where the monitor cannot detect any respiration activity and the indication of the apnea alarm.

RRspir

This setting lets you switch the RRspir measurement On or Off.

Configuring EEG

MP40-90 only

Measurement Settings: Main Setup -> Measurements -> EEG

Factory Defaults

Item Name

TP

SEF

MDF

PPF

Delta

Oper.

Mode

MP40 - MP90

C M Profile Adult

x x On x x On x x Off x x Off x x Off

Profile Pedi Profile Neo

67

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Measurement Settings

Factory Defaults

Item Name

Theta

Alpha

Beta

SEF Threshold

Numeric Average

Wave Scale

Show Gridlines

Low Filter

High Filter

Buffer A

Buffer B

Buffer C

Smoothing CSA

Impedance Limit

Color

EEG

Oper.

Mode

MP40 - MP90

C M Profile Adult Profile Pedi Profile Neo

x x Off x x Off x x Off x x

90%

8 sec x x 100uV x No x x 0.5 Hz x x 30 Hz x x

not applicable, this setting is stored in the Monitor Settings Block: see "Configuring CSA

Buffers" on page 145.

x x On x x 5 kOhm x Yellow x

x not applicable, the EEG On/Off state is not a setting, see "EEG Configuration

Implications".

EEG Configuration Implications

TP

This setting lets you switch the TP numeric On or Off. The TP (Total Power) numeric indicates the power in the measured frequency band.

SEF

lets you switch the SEF numeric On or Off. The SEF (Spectral Edge Frequency) is the frequency below which a configurable percentage (set by the SEF Threshold) of the Total Power is measured.

MDF

lets you switch the MDF numeric On or Off. The MDF (Mean Dominant Frequency) is the mean value of the frequency which dominates the measured EEG.

PPF

lets you switch the PPF numeric On or Off. The PPF (Peak Power Frequency) is the frequency with the highest measured amplitude.

Delta

lets you switch the Delta numeric On or Off. The Delta numeric is the percentage of total power in the Delta wave frequency band (0.5 to 4 Hz).

Theta

lets you switch the Theta numeric On or Off. The Theta numeric is the percentage of total power in the Theta wave frequency band (4 to 8 Hz).

Alpha

lets you switch the Alpha numeric On or Off. The Alpha numeric is the percentage of total power in the Alpha wave frequency band (8 to 13 Hz)

Beta

lets you switch the Beta numeric On or Off. The Beta numeric is the percentage of total power in the Beta wave frequency band (13 to 30 Hz).

68

Measurement Settings

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

SEF Threshold

defines the percentage of the TP for which the SEF is calculated.

Numeric Average

lets you define the averaging time used for all EEG numerics.

Wave Scale / Show Gridlines

• When Show Gridlines is set to No, you can choose from the available Wave Scale values.

Scaling information is displayed as a size bar beside the EEG wave.

• When Show Gridlines is set to Yes, scales are defined as a range, such as

±

50

μ

V or

±

250

μ

V.

Gridlines and the current wave scale values are shown with the EEG wave.

Note that this only changes the visual appearance of the wave. It does not affect the signal analyzed by the monitor or printed in reports or recordings.

Low Filter / High Filter

Set the low and high pass filters to screen out undesirable interference from the raw EEG wave display.

Smoothing CSA

This setting defines whether smoothing of the CSA lines is On or Off.

Impedance Limit

Allows you to set the Impedance Limit for all electrodes simultaneously. If the limit is exceeded during monitoring, an INOP will appear and the graphic impedance indicator will change.

EEG

The On/Off state of the EEG measurement cannot be preconfigured. EEG measurements are automatically switched On when an EEG transducer is connected to the monitor.

Configuring EEG Montages

MP40-90 only

3

4

Measurement Settings: Main Setup -> Measurements -> EEG ->

Show Montage

1

2

In the Setup EEG menu, select Show Montage to enter the EEG Impedance/Montage window.

From the drop-down list, select the name of the montage you want to configure.

5

Select Change Electrds and follow the instructions given in the window.

Confirm when finished.

For each other montage, repeat steps 2 to 4.

Renaming EEG Montages

1

In the Setup EEG menu, select Show Montage to enter the EEG Impedance/Montage window.

2

Select the pop-up key Change Name and use the on-screen keyboard to enter the new name.

3

Select Enter to save your changes.

69

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Measurement Settings

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP40 - MP90

C M Profile Adult

x x Montage A

Montage D

Electrode 1+

Electrode 1-

Electrode 2+

Electrode 2-

Montage E

Electrode 1+

Electrode 1-

Electrode 2+

Electrode 2-

Select Montage

Montage A

Electrode 1+

Electrode 1-

Electrode 2+

Electrode 2-

Montage B

Electrode 1+

Electrode 1-

Electrode 2+

Electrode 2-

Montage C

Electrode 1+

Electrode 1-

Electrode 2+

Electrode 2x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

FP1

T3

Fp2

T4

O1

T3

O2

T4

F3

C3

F4

C4

C3

P3

C4

P4

Fp1

T5

Fp2

T6

Profile Pedi Profile Neo

EEG Montages Configuration Implications

Select Montage

Lets you select the default montage the monitor uses when the EEG measurement is started.

70

Measurement Settings

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Configuring BIS

(Bispectral Index)

MP20-90 only

Measurement Settings: Main Setup -> Measurements -> BIS

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP20 - MP90 (H10/20/40) MP20 - MP90 (H30)

C M Profile Adult Profile Pedi Profile Neo Profile Adult Profile Pedi Profile Neo

SQI

EMG

SR

Bursts

1

SEF

TP

Scale

Show Gridlines

Filters

Low Filter

High Filter

Notch Filter

High Limit

Low Limit

Alarms x

Cont. Imp. Check x x x x x x x

Smoothing Rate

Color

BIS x x x x x x x x

On

On

On

On

Off

Off

100uV

No

On

2 Hz

70 Hz

On

70

20

On

Off

not applicable, this is not a setting, see "BIS Configuration Implications"

x x

30 sec

Yellow

15 sec

Magenta x

x not applicable, the BIS On/Off state is not a setting, see "BIS Configuration Implications".

1.Numeric available with BISx module only.

BIS Configuration Implications

EMG

This setting lets you switch the EMG numeric On or Off. The EMG (Electromyographic Activity) numeric reflects the electrical power of muscle activity and high frequency artifacts.

SR

lets you switch the SR numeric On or Off. The SR (Suppression Ratio) is the percentage of time over the last 63-second period during which the EEG is considered to be in a suppressed state.

Bursts

lets you switch the Bursts numeric On or Off. To configure this setting, you must disconnect the BIS/BISx Engine from the BIS module. The Bursts numeric helps you quantify suppression by measuring the number of EEG bursts per minute, where an EEG burst is defined as a period of activity followed and preceded by inactivity (at least 0.5 second).

SEF

lets you switch the SEF numeric On or Off. The SEF (Spectral Edge Frequency) is the frequency below which 95% of the Total Power is measured.

71

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Measurement Settings

TP

lets you switch the TP numeric On or Off. The TP (Total Power) numeric indicates the power in the frequency band 0.5 to 30 Hz. The useful range is 30 - 100 dB.

Scales / Gridlines

When Gridlines are switched Off, you can choose from the available scale values: 50

μ

V, 100

μ

V, 200

μ

V, and 500

μ

V. Scaling information is displayed as a vertical bar on the EEG wave together with its height equivalent in

μ

V.

When Gridlines are switched On, scales are defined as a range, either

±

25

μ

V,

±

50

μ

V,

±

100

μ

V, or

±

250

μ

V. Scaling information is shown in the form of gridlines.

Low Filter / High Filter / Notch Filter

These settings let you apply filters to the raw EEG wave. The Low Filter and the High Filter screen out undesirable interference from the raw EEG wave display. The Notch Filter removes line frequency interference. Filter settings affect the EEG wave and the SEF and TP values, but they do not affect the BIS, EMG, SR, and SQI values.

Cont. Imp. Check

This setting can be temporarily changed in monitoring mode, but the changes cannot be permanently stored in config mode. The default is On. The current setting is kept in the monitor’s buffered memory and retained for a max of 60 sec after the monitor is switched off. If the monitor is switched off for more than 60 sec, Cont. Imp. Check will be reset to On.

Smoothing Rate

This setting lets you define how the monitor averages the BIS value. Set this to 15

Sec

to increase responsiveness to changes in the patient’s state. If set to 30 Sec, the BIS trend will be smoother with decreased variability and sensitivity to artifacts.

BIS

The On/Off state of the BIS measurement cannot be preconfigured. BIS measurements are automatically switched On when an BIS transducer is connected to the monitor.

Configuring Temperature

When an MMS is connected to the monitor for the first time, it uses the default Temperature label Temp.

When a Measurement Extension Module is connected for the first time, the Temp label used for the combined Pressure/Temp connector is Trect, the label used for the single Temp connector is Tskin; plug-in Temperature modules use the label Temp. If you then change the Temp label, the information will be automatically stored and each device will remember the new label the next time they are reconnected.

The configuration settings for Temperature can be set individually for each Temp label. The selection of

labels depends on the configured Label Set, see "Configuring General Global Settings" on page 147.

72

Measurement Settings

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Temp, Trect, Tcore, Tskin, Tesoph, Tnaso, Tart, Tven, Tvesic, Ttymp,

Tcereb, Tamb, T1, T2, T3, T4 Settings

Measurement Settings: Main Setup -> Measurements -> <Temp Label>

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP5 - MP90 (H10/20/40)

MP2/X2

MP5 - MP90 (H30) MP2/X2

C M Profile

Adult

Profile

Pedi

Profile

Neo

Profile

Adult

Profile

Pedi

Profile

Neo

Profile

Outdoor

High Limit

Low Limit

Range

Color x x x x 39 x x 36

35...43

Green

35

Alarms x x On

Temp (or other label)) x

x not applicable, the Temp On/Off state is not a setting, see "Temp Configuration

Implications" on page 73.

Unit x

0

C

Light Green

36

White

See "Configuring C.O. (Cardiac Output)" on page 55 for Tblood settings. Tinj has no settings. Taway is

sourced from a VueLink or IntelliBridge plug-in module, therefore no settings can be changed.

Temp Configuration Implications

<Temp Label>

The On/Off state of the Temp measurement cannot be preconfigured. The Temp measurement is automatically switched On when a Temp probe is connected to a Temp socket on the monitor.

Unit

Lets you select the temperature unit for the temperature label.

Range

This setting defines the measurement range for the temperature label. Available choices are

1...45

, 11...45, and 35...43.

The configured Range is used for the horizon screen trend application. When a temperature is viewed as horizon trend,

• the high end of the Range defines the maximum temperature that can be selected in the related Screen

Trend menu under Set High Horizon,

• the low end of the Range defines the minimum temperature that can be selected in the related Screen

Trend menu under Set Low Horizon.

73

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Measurement Settings

Configuring Predictive Temp

MP5/

MP5T only

pToral, pTaxil, pTrect Settings

Measurement Settings: Main Setup -> Measurements -> <pTemp Label>

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP5 / MP5T

C M Profile Adult Profile Pedi Profile Neo

Label

Value Lifetime

Mode

Prompt Tones

Unit

Color x

x not applicable, the ’Label’ is not a setting, see "Predictive Temp Configuration

Implications".

x x 1 h x

x not applicable, ’the Mode’ is not a setting, see "Predictive Temp Configuration

Implications".

x On x x

°C

Yellow

Preferred Label x pToral pToral (or other label) x

x not applicable, the Predictive Temp On/Off state is not a setting, see "Predictive Temp

Configuration Implications".

Predictive Temp Configuration Implications

Label

Lets you select the label you want to configure. This is not a setting and cannot be preconfigured.

Value Lifetime

Lets you configure the life time of a predicted temp value. After the configured life time, a predictively measured Temp value disappears from the monitor screen, as well as from the screen of a connected Information Center. This setting applies to all predictive temp labels.

Mode

Lets you switch between Continuous and Predictive measurement mode. This switch only applies when monitoring, it is not a setting and cannot be preconfigured. See the IntelliVue

Instructions for Use for more detail.

Prompt Tones

Set this to On if you want the monitor to indicate when it is ready for a new measurement and when a measurement is finished by a prompt message and a prompt tone.

Unit

Lets you select the temperature unit.

Preferred Label

Lets you configure which predictive temp label the monitor will use when one of the following circumstances occurs:

• an oral or axillary probe is connected after a rectal probe has been used before,

• the patient is discharged,

• a coldstart is performed.

<PTemp Label>

The On/Off state of the predictive temp measurement cannot be preconfigured. It is automatically switched On when a predictive temp sensor is connected to the monitor.

74

Measurement Settings

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Configuring

ΔTemp

(Temperature Difference)

Measurement Settings: Main Setup -> Measurements ->

ΔTemp

ΔTemp is a derived measurement.

Item Name

First Temp

Second Temp

Δ

Temp

Measurement

Color

Oper.

Mode

MP2 - MP90

X2

C M Profile

Adult

x x x x Trect x x Tblood x x Off

Enabled

Green

Profile

Pedi

Profile

Neo

MP5T

MP5 (B10/B11/B14)

Profile

Adult

Profile

Pedi

Profile

Neo

MP2/X2

Profile

Outdoor

Disabled

Enabled

White

ΔTemp Configuration Implications

First Temp/Second Temp

This setting is only available when Measurement is Enabled. It lets you select two temperature labels to calculate the temperature difference. Note that none of Predictive

Temp labels can be selected for the

ΔTemp calculation.

The formula used to calculate

Δ

Temp is:

Δ

Temp = First Temp - Second Temp.

Δ

Temp / Measurement If

Measurement is set to Enabled, the monitor automatically switches the

Δ

Temp measurement On when both configured Temp sources are available. The user can still switch Off

Δ

Temp in monitoring mode.

Set Measurement to Disabled, if you want the

Δ

Temp measurement to be permanently disabled, which means that in monitoring mode it will not be possible to switch

Δ

Temp On.

Configuring VueLink

MP40-90 only

Measurement Setting: Main Setup -> Measurements -> VueLink X (or

Device Name)

Factory Defaults

Item Name

Device Alarms

Default Color

Oper.

Mode

MP40 - MP90 (H10/20/40) MP40 - MP90 (H30)

C M Profile Adult Profile Pedi Profile Neo Profile Adult Profile Pedi Profile Neo

x x

Accepted

Green

Ignored

75

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Measurement Settings

VueLink Configuration Implications

Device Alarms

The VueLink module itself generates INOPs, but does not generate alarms. If the external device’s alarms are on, the module transmits these to the monitor. Device Alarms lets you select whether these alarms are indicated on the monitor (Accepted) or Ignored.

Note that the setting Device Alarms is not cloned between monitors. If you clone configurations between IntelliVue monitors with VueLink plug-in modules, you must check that these settings are correct and adjust them according to customer specifications, if needed.

Default Color

The default color is the color used for any numerics that are not linked to a particular wave, and for any waves for which no color is specifically configured. Note that this setting is not cloned between monitors. If you clone configurations between IntelliVue monitors with VueLink plug-in modules, you must check that these settings are correct and adjust them according to customer specifications, if needed.

<Other Settings>

All other VueLink settings are specific to the individual driver. They are stored in the VueLink module and cannot be stored in the monitor configuration. See the documentation supplied with the VueLink module for configuration information.

Configuring IntelliBridge

MP40-90 only

The default settings for the IntelliBridge (EC10) plug-in module and their configuration implications are specific to individual IntelliBridge drivers. They are stored in the IntelliBridge EC10 module and cannot be stored in the monitor configuration. See the documentation supplied with the IntelliBridge EC10 module and the related IntelliBridge Device Driver Instructions for Use.

Configuring the Gas Analyzer

MP5-90 option

H30 only

General Gas Analyzer Settings

Measurement Settings: Main Setup -> GM (AGM)

All gas analyzer settings are available on monitors with option H30 only. The MP5 does not support the

AGM (M1026A/B).

Factory Defaults

Item Name

Agent

1

CO

2 awRR

O

2

N

2

O

ISO

1

AGT

2

AGT1

3

AGT2

3

Oper.

Mode

MP5 - MP90 (H30)

C M Profile Adult Profile Pedi Profile Neo

x x ISO x

x not a setting, see "Configuring CO2 from Gas Analyzer" on page 81

x

x not a setting, see "Configuring awRR from Gas Analyzer (Airway Respiration Rate)" on page 82

x

x not a setting, see "O2 Settings" on page 77

x

x not a setting, see "N2O (Nitrous Oxide) Settings" on page 78

x

x not a setting, see "ISO (Isofluran) Settings" on page 79

x

x not a setting, see "AGT / AGT1 / AGT2 Settings" on page 78

x

x not a setting, see "AGT / AGT1 / AGT2 Settings" on page 78

x

x not a setting, see "AGT / AGT1 / AGT2 Settings" on page 78

76

Measurement Settings

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP5 - MP90 (H30)

C M Profile Adult Profile Pedi Profile Neo

MAC

No Al. til Breath x

AutoStandbyAfter x

Setup Agent

1/3

x x

x not a setting, see "Configuring MAC (Minimum Alveolar Concentration)" on page 83

On

120

not a setting, see "General Gas Analyzer Configuration Implications" on page 77

1.Setting only available when using a G1 (M1013A).

2.Setting only available when using an AGM (M1026A/B).

3.Setting only available when using a G5 (M1019A).

General Gas Analyzer Configuration Implications

Agent

This setting is available when using the M1013A IntelliVue G1 only. It lets you select the agent that will be analyzed by the M1013A.

Setup Agent

This operation is available when using the M1013A IntelliVue G1 and the M1019A

IntelliVue G5 only. To configure the individual settings for each anesthetic gas for the IntelliVue G1 and

G5, select Setup Agent, and then in the Setup Agent menu, select the agent and adjust the settings as needed.

No Al. til Breath

If set to set On, the monitor suppresses alarms from the Gas Analyzer until it detects that a patient has been connected to the gas analyzer (when breathing is detected).

AutoStandbyAfter

This setting defines the time after which the gas analyzer automatically goes into

Standby when no breath is detected. During Standby, the gas analyzer’s gas sample intake pump and other internal components are automatically switched off to increase the lifetime of the device. The message GM

(or AGM) STANDBY is shown on the monitor.

O

2

Settings

Measurement Settings: Main Setup -> GM (or AGM) -> O

2

Factory Defaults

Item Name

inO

2

High inO

2

Low inO

2

Alarms

O

2

Scale

Unit

Color

Oper.

Mode

MP5 - MP90 (H30)

C M Profile Adult

x x 100% x x 18% x x On x x x x et + in x x 100

%

Green

Profile Pedi Profile Neo

77

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Measurement Settings

N

2

O (Nitrous Oxide) Settings

Measurement Settings: Main Setup -> GM (or AGM)-> N

2

O

Factory Defaults

Item Name

inN

2

O High inN

2

O Alarm

N

2

O

Scale

Unit

Color

Oper.

Mode

MP5 - MP90 (H30)

C M Profile Adult

x x 80% x x On x x et + in x x 60 x % x Blue

Profile Pedi Profile Neo

AGT / AGT1 / AGT2 Settings

Measurement Settings: Main Setup -> GM (or AGM) -> AGT (AGT1, AGT2)

Factory Defaults

Item Name

Agent Channel

Agent Id

1

Oper.

Mode

MP5 - MP90 (H30)

C M Profile Adult

x x x et + in x Automatic

1. Setting only available when using an AGM (M1026A/B).

Profile Pedi Profile Neo

AGT / AGT1 / AGT2 Configuration Implications

Agent Channel

This setting lets you define which numerics are displayed with any anesthetic agent waveform on the screen.

et displays the endtidal numerics,

in displays the inspiratory numerics,

et+in displays both endtidal and inspiratory numerics.

Off switches off the anesthetic gas measurement. No waveforms or numerics will be shown for anesthetic gases, and no alarms will be generated.

Agent Id

This setting is available for the M1026A/B AGM only. Setting Agent Id to Manual requires that the user manually chooses the correct anesthetic agent during monitoring. If set to

Automatic

, the gas analyzer automatically identifies the predominant anesthetic agent in the breathing circuit. To configure the individual settings for each anesthetic gas for the M1026A/B AGM, you must first set Agent ID to Manual. This allows you to select the individual gases. If you use Manual agent identification, the agent that was selected last will become the default agent. If you want to use

Automatic

agent identification, make sure to switch Agent ID back to Automatic when you are done.

78

Measurement Settings

HAL (Halothan) Settings

Main Setup -> GM -> Setup Agent -> HAL

Main Setup -> AGM -> HAL

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Factory Defaults

Item Name

inHAL High inHAL Low inHAL Alarms etHAL High etHAL Low etHAL Alarms

Scale

Unit

Color

Oper.

Mode

MP5 - MP90 (H30)

C M Profile Adult

x x x x 2.0% x x 0.0% x x On x x 1.6% x x 0.0% x x On x x 2.0

%

Red

Profile Pedi

ISO (Isofluran) Settings

Measurement Settings:

Main Setup -> GM -> Setup Agent -> ISO

Main Setup -> AGM -> ISO

Profile Neo

Factory Defaults

Item Name

inISO High inISO Low inISO Alarms etISO High etISO Low etISO Alarms

Scale

Unit

Color

Oper.

Mode

MP5 - MP90 (H30)

C M Profile Adult

x x 3.0% x x 0.0% x x On x x 2.5% x x 0.0% x x On x x 3.0

x % x Magenta

Profile Pedi Profile Neo

79

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

ENF (Enfluran) Settings

Measurement Settings:

Main Setup -> GM -> Setup Agent -> ENF

Main Setup -> AGM -> ENF

Factory Defaults

Item Name

inENF High inENF Low inENF Alarms etENF High etENF Low etENF Alarms

Scale

Unit

Color

Oper.

Mode

MP5 - MP90 (H30)

C M Profile Adult

x x x x 4.0% x x 0.0% x x On x x 3.3% x x 0.0% x x On x x 4.0

%

Orange

Profile Pedi

SEV (Sevofluran) Settings

Measurement Settings:

Main Setup -> GM -> Setup Agent -> SEV

Main Setup -> AGM -> SEV

Factory Defaults

Item Name

inSEV High inSEV Low inSEV Alarms etSEV High etSEV Low etSEV Alarms

Scale

Unit

Color

Oper.

Mode

MP5 - MP90 (H30)

C M Profile Adult

x x x x 6.0% x x 0.0% x x On x x 5.0% x x 0.0% x x On x x 6.0

%

Yellow

Profile Pedi

Measurement Settings

Profile Neo

Profile Neo

80

Measurement Settings

DES (Desfluran) Settings

Measurement Settings:

Main Setup -> GM -> Setup Agent -> DES

Main Setup -> AGM -> DES

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Factory Defaults

Item Name

inDES High inDES Low inDES Alarms etDES High etDES Low etDES Alarms

Scale

Unit

Color

Oper.

Mode

MP5 - MP90 (H30)

C M Profile Adult

x x x x 15.0% x x 0.0% x x On x x 10.0% x x 0.0% x x On x x 15.0

%

Cyan

Profile Pedi Profile Neo

Configuring CO

2

from Gas Analyzer

MP5-90 only

Measurement Settings: Main Setup -> GM (or AGM) -> CO

2

CO

2

can be measured by an anesthetic gas analyzer (AGM, G1, or G5), measurement extension modules

(Microstream, Sidestream, or Mainstream), or the integrated CO

2 listed in this section only apply to CO

2

measurement in the MP5. The settings

measured by an anesthetic gas analyzer.

Factory Defaults

Item Name

etCO

2

High etCO

2

Low etCO

2

Alarms imCO

2

High imCO

2

Alarm

CO

2

Scale

Unit

Color

Humidity Corr.

Oper.

Mode

MP5 - MP90 (H30)

C M Profile Adult

x x x x 60 mmHg x x 25 mmHg x x On x x 4 mmHg x x Off x x et + im x x 50 mmHg x mmHg

White

Wet

Profile Pedi Profile Neo

81

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Measurement Settings

Gas Analyzer CO

2

Configuration Implications

Humidity Corr.

This setting determines the method used to correct the influence of water vapor in the patient’s breath on the CO

2

reading. The options are Wet or Dry. Setting HumidtyCorr to Wet takes the partial pressure contributed by the water vapor into consideration and therefore results in lower

CO

2

readings when compared to DRY. For an exact definition and the formula used, see the section on

“Measurement Specifications” in the “Installation and Specifications” chapter of the Gas Analyzer

Instructions for Use.

Configuring awRR from Gas Analyzer

(Airway Respiration Rate)

MP5-90 only

Measurement Settings: Main Setup -> GM (or AGM) -> awRR

AwRR can be derived from the CO

2 of the CO

2

measured by an anesthetic gas analyzer (AGM, G1, or G5), or by any

measurement extension modules (Microstream, Sidestream, or Mainstream), or by the integrated CO

2

measurement in the MP5. The settings listed in this section only apply for the awRR derived from an anesthetic gas analyzer.

Factory Defaults

Item Name

High Limit

Low Limit

Apnea Time

Alarms awRR

Oper.

Mode

MP5 - MP90 (H30)

C M Profile Adult

x x 40 rpm x x 8 rpm x x 40 sec x x On x x On

Profile Pedi Profile Neo

60 rpm

30 rpm

awRR Configuration Implications

Apnea Time

The apnea alarm is a high priority red alarm used to detect apneas. The Apnea Time defines the time period between the point where the monitor cannot detect any respiration activity and the indication of the apnea alarm.

awRR

This setting lets you switch the awRR measurement from the Gas Analyzer On or Off.

82

Measurement Settings

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Configuring MAC

(Minimum Alveolar Concentration)

MP5-90 only

Measurement Settings: Main Setup -> GM (or AGM) -> MAC

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP5 - MP90 (H30)

C M Profile Adult

MAC x x Off

MACawk

1 x x Off

Correction

1 x Off

Color x White

Profile Pedi Profile Neo

1.Setting not available in the U.S.A. or in clinical environments under FDA control. MAC correction is switched off and

MACawk value is not available.

MAC Configuration Implications

The MAC (Minimum Alveolar Concentration) value of an anesthetic gas or agent denotes the concentration at which 50% of a population of anesthetized patients do not respond with movement to a painful stimulus. The MACawk (MAC awake) represents the concentration at which 50% of a population of anesthetized patients responds to verbal command.

MAC

Determines whether the MAC numeric is displayed or not.

Correction

The IntelliVue monitor offers three methods of MAC calculation:

• Uncorrected MAC (Off )

• Ambient Pressure corrected MAC

(not available in the U.S.A or in clinical environments under FDA control.)

• Enhanced MAC Correction

(not available in the U.S.A. or in clinical environments under FDA control)

If Correction is set to Off, the uncorrected MAC is calculated, i.e the MAC value is not corrected for ambient pressure, age, temperature or any other individual factors influencing the effect of volatile anesthetic agents.

If Correction is set to Amb. Pressure, the MAC is corrected for the ambient pressure measured during the last zero calibration.

If Correction is set to Enhanced, the MAC value is corrected for the patient’s age and temperature, and the ambient pressure measured during the last zero calibration.

The age is derived from the Date Of Birth entry in the Patient Demographics window.

The temperature is taken from the currently measured value for one of the following temperature labels:

Tcore

, or Tblood.

MACawk

Determines whether the MAC awake numeric is displayed or not. The MACawk numeric can only be calculated if Correction is configured to Enhanced.

83

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Monitor Settings

Monitor Settings

This section lists all the settings grouped in the Monitor Settings Block. Read any information on configuration implications at the end of the relevant tables before you make any configuration changes.

Understanding Monitor Settings

What sets monitor settings apart from measurement settings is that they are not specific to one measurement. Monitor settings affect the general behavior of the monitor.

Alarm settings are a good example to help you understand the difference between monitor and measurement settings: general alarm settings, such as Alarm Volume or the Alarms Off time are monitor settings. They determine the monitor’s general alarming behavior. Individual alarm limits that can be set individually for each measurement are measurement settings. They only affect the selected measurement.

The IntelliVue patient monitor uses two categories of monitor settings: normal and unique monitor settings. Normal monitor settings can be configured differently for different monitor settings blocks (e.g.

Monitor A, Monitor B). Unique monitor settings cannot be configured differently. They are the same in each monitor settings block and are automatically included in all monitor settings blocks when you store them to one block.

The following table provides an overview of normal vs. unique monitor settings:

Monitor Settings

Normal

Alarms

Alarm Recordings

Auto Alarm Limits

INOP Severity

Screen Trend Settings

Horizon Trend Settings

Global Trend Style

Trend Windows

Trend Recordings

ST Map

C.O. Window

Wedge Window

Loops Window

CSA Window

ECG Application

Calculations (except Drug Calc.)

Reports

Other Report Settings

Auto Reports

ECG Reports

CSA Reports

Trend Reports

User Interface (except Keys)

Network 115

97

98

99

100

95

95

96

97

91

92

93

93

85

88

89

90

101

105

106

108

108

109

110

Page Unique

Trend Groups

Trend Priorities

Trend Scales / Trend Units

Event Surveillance

Event Annotations

ProtocolWatch

Recordings (except Vital Signs & Alarm Rec.)

Timers

Global SmartKeys, Function Keys

CSA Buffers

Drug Calculator

Page

133

134

135

139

119

122

123

126

143

145

146

84

Monitor Settings

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Configuring Alarms

Monitor Setting: Main Setup -> Alarms -> Alarm Settings

Factory Defaults

Item Name MP5 - MP90 (H30) MP2/X2

Alarm Volume

Alarms Off

Pause Al. 5Min

Pause Al. 10Min

Auto Alarms Off

AlarmOffReminder

Visual Latching

Audible Latching

Alarm Reminder

Reminder Time

Alarm Sounds

RedAlarmInterval

Yel. Al. Interval

Alarm Low

Red Alarm Volume

Yell. Alarm Volume

Inop Volume

AutoIncrease Vol.

IncreaseVolDelay

Keep Blinking

Relay1 Sensitiv.

Relay2 Sensitiv.

Relay3 Sensitiv.

CyanRelayLatency

Yel. RelayLatency

Alarm Text

NoCentrMonMinVol

LED Brightness

Oper.

Mode

MP5 - MP90 (H10/20/40)

MP2/X2

C M Profile Adult

Profile Pedi

Profile Neo

x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x 5 x 2 min

Enabled

Enabled

Disabled

Off

Red&Yell

Red&Yell

On

3 min

Traditional

10 sec

20 sec

4

AlarmVol+2

AlarmVol+0

AlarmVol+0

2 Steps

20 sec

No

R & Y & I

Red &Yell

Red

5 sec

2 sec

Standard

4

High

Profile Adult

Profile Pedi

Profile Neo

Red Only

Off

2

Profile Outdoor

7

Red&Yell

Red&Yell

4

85

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Monitor Settings

Alarm Settings Configuration Implications

Alarm Volume

Use this setting to define the base volume of the red and yellow audible alarm indicators and the INOP tones.

Alarms Off

Use this setting to determine how long the monitor’s alarm capabilities will be switched off when the user selects the Alarms Off or Pause Alarms key. Possible choices are: 1min, 2min,

3min

, Infinite. Be aware that if you configure Alarms Off to Infinite, all of the monitor’s alarming capabilities will be permanently switched off when the user selects the Alarms Off key.

It is not recommeded to configure Alarms Off to Infinite in monitors that can be used as companion devices to a host monitor, such as the X2 or MP5.

Pause Al. 5 Min / Pause Al. 10 Min

If these settings are enabled, the user can extend the alarm pause to 5/10 minutes. If Alarms Off is set to Infinite, these settings are automatically disabled.

Alarm Low

Use this setting to define a minimum value for the alarm volume. The alarm volume cannot be set lower than this value.

Red Alarm Volume

/ Yell. AlarmVolume/Inop Volume Use these settings to set the alarm volume level for each alarm type relative to the (base) volume selected under Alarm Volume.

Available choices are: AlarmVol+1, AlarmVol+2, AlarmVol+3.

Auto Alarms Off

This setting can be used to switch off the monitor’s alarming capabilities if no vital parameters are left with alarms switched On. The recommended value for this settings is Disabled.

WARNING

If you configure the setting Auto Alarms Off to Enabled, the monitor will automatically switch off its alarming capabilities if the user turns Off the individual alarms for all vital parameters (see below) that are currently activated and switched On.

The following measurements are considered vital parameters:

• ECG/Pulse

• RR/awRR

• All invasive blood pressure (for example ABP, ART, CVP, PAP)

• SpO

2

• etCO

2

AlarmOffReminder

If this setting is enabled, the monitor issues a short reminder tone every three minutes when all alarms have been switched off (by selecting the Alarms Off/Pause Alarms

SmartKey), or if the alarms for the following measurements have been switched off individually: ECG/

Pulse, RR/awRR, all invasive blood pressures, SpO

2

, etCO

2

.

Visual Latching / Audible Latching

The visual and audible latching settings can affect the arrhythmia alarm sounds. Both Visual Latching and Audible Latching should be set to

Red

or Red and Yellow if arrhythmia is on.

If the monitor is connected to an Information Center, both Visual Latching and

Audible Latching

should be set to Red&Yell to enable alarms to be silenced at the Information

Center.

86

Monitor Settings

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Alarm Reminder

Use this setting to define how alarm indications behave if alarm conditions remain active after they have been acknowledged:

On: After the configured Reminder Time, the alarm tone is repeated for a limited time (6 seconds).

ReAlarm: After the Reminder Time the alarm tone is repeated continuously (this is the same as a new alarm).

Off: No Alarm Reminder is issued.

Reminder Time

Use this setting to define the interval between acknowledging an alarm and issuing an alarm reminder. The choices available are 1, 2, or 3 minutes.

Alarm Sounds

Use this setting to change the alarm sound of the monitor to suit the alarm standards valid in your hospital.

Traditional: The traditional (“Carenet”) sounds used in previous HP/Agilent/Philips patient monitor generations.

ISO: A new set of alarm sounds that complies with the ISO/IEC Standard 9703-2.

RedAlarmInterval / Yel. Al. Interval

Use this setting to define the interval between alarm sounds (ISO alarm sounds only). The choices available are 5, 10, or 15 seconds for red alarms, and

10, 20,or 30 seconds for yellow alarms.

Auto Increase Vol

Use this setting to define how the alarm volume of unacknowledged alarms behaves.

1 Step: After the time defined by Increase Volume Delay, the alarm volume is increased by one volume step.

2 Step: After the time defined by Increase Volume Delay, the alarm volume is increased by two volume steps.

Off: The Alarm Volume of unacknowledged alarms does not change.

Increase Volume Delay

Use this setting to define the interval after which the alarm volume increases in steps.

Keep Blinking

Use this setting to specify whether the numerics that are in an active alarm condition keep flashing even if all alarms are off or paused, or if individual alarms are switched off.

(Nurse Call) RelayX Sensitivity

The RelayX Sensitivity setting defines the alarm or INOP conditions that will trigger an alarm on nurse call relay. Only serious INOPs (that are indicated with an INOP tone at the monitor) are indicated on the nurse call relay. The nurse call relay follows the status of the monitor alarms, e.g. when the alarms are switched off at the monitor, no alarms will be indicated on the nurse call relay.

When you use a nurse call relay that is connected to the traditional nurse call connector (phone jack), only

Relay 1 Sensitivity

must be specified.

INOPRelayLatency / Yel.RelayLatency

Use this setting to define how long a yellow alarm or INOP condition must be active before an alarm is issued on any device connected to the alarm relay.

These settings are valid for all serious INOP conditions/all yellow alarms respectively.

Alarm Text

Use this setting to define how alarm messages are presented on the monitor screen:

Standard: Alarm texts are displayed in text form, for example ** Spo2 LOW

87

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Monitor Settings

Extended: Alarm texts are displayed as numeric values, for example, ** Spo2 94 < 96, where the second number shows the current alarm limit, and the first number shows the maximum amount by which this limit was exceeded.

NoCentrMonMinVol

If your monitor is connected to an IntelliVue Information Center, and the connection is interrupted, the INOP message No Central Monit. will appear, accompanied by an

INOP tone. To help ensure that this INOP, and any other active alarm, is not overlooked, the INOP and alarm tones may be configured to have a minimum volume. In this case, INOP and alarm tones will sound even if the monitor alarm volume is set to zero.

LED Brightness

lets you configure the brightness of the alarm lamps. Three choices are available:

High

, Medium, and Low.

Alarm Behavior (For Assistance Publique in France only)

To achieve the behavior required by the Assistance Publique in France, you must configure the settings listed below to the values given in the table:

Item Name French Alarm Behavior Comment

Alarm Source ECG

See "Configuring ECG/Pulse Alarms" on page 33.

Alarm Source Selection Disabled

Alarms Off

Disabled, by setting to 1 or 2 or 3 min (not infinite) See "Configuring Alarms" on page 85.

Pause Al. 5Min

Pause Al. 10Min

Disabled

Disabled

Auto Alarms Off

Alarm OffRemind.

Visual Latching

Audible Latching

Enabled

On

Red&Yell

Red&Yell

Alarm Reminder

Alarm Rem. Time

Alarm Low

Keep Blinking

ReAlarm or On

1 or 2 or 3 min

>= 1

Yes

Configuring Alarm Recordings

Monitor Setting: Main Setup -> Alarms -> Alarm Recording

Factory Defaults

Item Name MP5 - MP90 (H30)

HR

PVC

ST

QT

SpO

2

Oper.

Mode

MP5 - MP90 (H10/20/40)

MP5T

C M

MP2/X2

x x Off x x Off x x Off x x Off x x Off

Red Only

Red Only

88

Monitor Settings

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Factory Defaults

Item Name

Pulse

Press

NBP

CCO

CO

2 awRR

O

2

Resp tcGas

Temp

N

2

0

Agent

VueLnk

Oper.

Mode

MP5 - MP90 (H10/20/40)

MP5T

C M

MP2/X2

x x Off x x Off x x Off x x Off x x Off x x Off x x Off x x Off x x Off x x Off x x Off x x Off x x Off

MP5 - MP90 (H30)

Alarm Recording Settings Configuration Implications

<Measurement>

If you set a <Measurement> to Red Only, an alarm recording will automatically be triggered when the measurement enters a red alarm condition. If you set it to

Red&Yell

, both yellow and red alarms will trigger an alarm recording for that measurement.

Configuring Auto Alarm Limits

Monitor Setting: Main Setup -> Alarms -> Setup AutoLimits

Factory Defaults

Item Name

All

HR

ST

SpO

2

Pulse

Press

NBP

CO

2 awRR

O

2

RR x x x x x x x x x x x

Oper.

Mode

MP2 - MP90

MP5T

C M

X2

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

89

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Monitor Settings

Factory Defaults

Item Name

tcGas

Temp

N

2

N

2

O

Agent x x x x x

Oper.

Mode

MP2 - MP90

MP5T

C M

X2

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

Alarm AutoLimits Settings Configuration Implications

All

Set this to Disabled if you do not want the user to be able to apply AutoLimits to all enabled measurements at once by using the All Lim. Narrow or All Lim. Wide pop-up keys in the

Alarm Limits window.

<Measurement>

If you set a <Measurement> to Disabled, AutoLimits cannot be applied to this measurement.

Configuring INOP Severity

Monitor Setting: Main Setup -> Alarms -> Inop Severity

Factory Defaults

Item Name

ECG Leads Off

Replace TeleBatt

Tele Disconnect.

Cuff Overpress

Cuff NotDeflated

Occlusion

Oper.

Mode

MP20 - MP90

C M

x x x x x x

Cyan

Cyan

Cyan

Cyan

Cyan

Cyan

MP5, MP5T MP2/X2

INOP Severity Settings Configuration Implications

ECG Leads Off

Set ECG Leads Off to Yellow or Red if you want the “ECG Leads Off”

INOP to be signaled as a yellow or red INOP. This INOP alerts the clinician when not all required leads for ECG monitoring are attached to the patient. If, after a discharge, no ECG has been measured yet, the

INOP severity will be Cyan regardless of the configuration. Once a valid ECG has been received, the severity will behave as configured.

90

Monitor Settings

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Replace TeleBatt

Set Replace TeleBatt to Yellow or Red if you want the

“Replace Battery T” INOP to be signaled as a yellow or red INOP. This INOP alerts the clinician when a telemetry device is directly connected (via cable or short-range radio connection) to a monitor and the battery in the telemetry device is almost empty and must be replaced. Note that if a telemetry device is paired with a monitor without a direct connection, the severity of the “Replace Battery T” INOP is controlled by the Information Center.

Tele Disconnect.

Set Tele Disconnect. to Yellow or Red if you want the “Tele

Disconnect.” INOP to be signaled as a yellow or red INOP. This INOP alerts the clinician when the connection between the monitor and the telemetry device is interrupted.

Cuff Overpress

Set Cuff Overpress to Yellow or Red if you want the “Cuff Overpress”

INOP to be signaled as a yellow or red INOP. This INOP alerts the clinician when the NBP cuff pressure exceeds the overpressure safety limits.

Cuff NotDeflated

Set Cuff NotDeflated to Yellow or Red if you want the

“Cuff NotDeflated” INOP to be signaled as a yellow or red INOP. This INOP alerts the clinician when the NBP cuff pressure has exceeded 15mmHg (2kPa) for more than 3 minutes for Adult or pediatric patients, or the cuff pressure has exceeded 5mmHg (0.7kPa) for more than 90 seconds (for neonatal patients).

Occlusion

Set Occlusion to Yellow or Red if you want the INOPs “CO

2

Occclusion” and

“<Gas Analyzer> Occclusion” to be signaled as a yellow or red INOP. These INOPs alert the clinician when the sample line or exhaust line tubing is blocked.

Configuring Screen Trend Settings

Monitor Setting: Main Setup -> Trends

Factory Defaults

Item Name

ScreenTrend Time

HorizonArrowTime

Oper.

Mode

MP2 - MP90

MP5T

C M

X2

x x 30 min x x 10 min

Screen Trend Configuration Implications

ScreenTrend Time

Use this setting to set the Screen Trend Time for all graphical and horizon screen trends. Choices are: 30min, 1h, 2h, 4h, 8h, or 12h.

This is the Global screen trend time. This setting can be overridden by the Change TrendTime

configuration (see “Configuring Screen Trends” on page 22) which lets the user set a different

ScreenTrend Time for a particular screen trend channel or a group of aligned screen trends.

HorizonArrowTime

This setting determines the time period used for calculating the direction of the

Horizon Trend Indicator, which shows how the patient trend has developed in the set time period.

Choices are: 10min, 5min, or 2min.

91

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Monitor Settings

Configuring Horizon Trend Settings

The horizon view presents trend information superimposed over a defined baseline or base range. This helps you visualize changes in your patient’s condition since the baseline/base range was set.

The position of the horizon baseline and the scale used when a certain measurement is first displayed in horizon trend view, is defined by the settings Horizon High, Horizon Low, Scale Delta and

Unit

. The defaults for Horizon High, Horizon Low, and Scale Delta are based on clinical considerations, the default for Unit follows the measurement unit defined for the corresponding measurement label. These default are stored invisibly in the IntelliVue patient monitor software. The user can adapt Horizon High, Horizon Low, and Scale Delta during monitoring.

If you are not satisfied with the default settings, you can modify the defaults for up to 25 measurement labels.

To modify Horizon Trend default settings,

1

2

In configuration mode, select Main Setup -> Trends -> Horizon Settings.

Select the pop-up key Add to bring up the Setup Measurement menu.

3

4

Select Label and choose the measurement label for which you want to define changed default

Horizon Trend Settings. A maximum of 25 labels can be added.

Adjust each setting as required, and close the menu.

Monitor Setting: Main Setup -> Trends -> Horizon Settings

Factory Defaults

Item Name

Label

Horizon High

Horizon Low

Scale Delta

Unit x x x x x

Oper.

Mode

MP2 - MP90

MP5T

C M

X2

<none>

<none>

<none>

<none>

<none>

Horizon Trend Configuration Implications

Unit

Choose the measurement unit that you will use to define the values for Horizon High,

Horizon Low

and Scale Delta.

Horizon High/Low

Set Horizon High to select the upper horizon value. Set Horizon Low to select the lower horizon value. If the high and low horizon values are the same, the horizon is a baseline, if the values are different, the horizon is a range.

Scale Delta

defines the distance between the horizon and the upper and lower scale limits. Note that the upper and lower scale limits may also be restricted by the measurement ranges defined for a label.

Make sure the values for Horizon High/Low and Scale Delta match the Unit you enter.

Be aware that the master unit of a label is defined in its measurement setup menu. For example, for the label Temp this would be the Setup Temp menu (Main Setup -> Measurements -> Temp).

92

Monitor Settings

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

If for a label, the unit defined in the Horizon Settings > Setup Measurement menu differs from the master unit defined in the related measurement setup menu, the values defined for Horizon High/Low and

Scale Delta

will be automatically converted when you close the Horizon Settings -> Setup

Measurement menu to match the unit defined in the measurement setup menu.

Example: In the Horizon Settings window, you add the label “Temp”. You set the Unit to

o

C

, and

Horizon High

and Horizon Low to 35.0 o menu to

o

F

Fahrenheit which would be 95.0 o

F.

C. If you then change the Unit in the Setup Temp

, the Horizon High/Low will be automatically converted to the equivalent of 35 o

C in

Configuring Global Trend Style

Monitor Setting: Main Setup -> Trends

Factory Defaults

Item Name

Global Style

Oper.

Mode

MP2 - MP90

MP5T

C M

X2

x x Band

Global Trend Style Configuration Implications

Global Style

The Global Style setting affects the presentation of measurements with compound (multiple) values (for example ABP or CO

2

) in the Graphical Trends window and on screen trends. If you set this to Band, the area between the trend lines, for example, between the systolic and diastolic pressures, is filled with color. If you set it to Line, the trends are displayed as separate continuous lines.

This setting applies to the graphical trends displayed in the GraphTrends window and the screen trends.

This setting can be overridden for individual parameters displayed in the GraphTrends window by changing the Style setting for these parameters to Band or Line in the Trend Group Parameters

menu (see “Configuring Trend Groups” on page 119).

Configuring Trend Windows

Vital Signs Window

Monitor Setting: Main Setup -> Trends -> Setup VitalSigns

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP20 - MP90 (H10/20/40)

C M

MP5 - MP90 (H30)

Trend Group

Interval

Show Unit

Color x x Standard x x 30 min x Off x On

5 min

MP20 (#M20 /#M21)

MP5 (H10/20/40)

MP5T

MP2/X2

10 min

93

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Monitor Settings

Graphical Trends Window

Monitor Setting: Main Setup -> Trends -> SetupGraphTrends

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP20 - MP90 (H10/20/40) MP5 - MP90 (H30)

C M

MP20 (#M20 /#M21)

MP5 (H10/20/40)

MP5T

MP2/X2

TrendGroup

Interval x x Standard x x 30 min 5 min 10 min

Trend Window Settings Configuration Implications

Trend Group

Use this setting to define the default trend group that is displayed each time a trend window is opened.

Interval

Use this setting to define the default time interval (resolution of the trend data) that is displayed each time a trend window is opened.

Show Units

(Vital Signs window only) If Show Units is configured to On, the measurements in the Vital Signs window are shown together with their units.

Color

(Vital Signs window only) If Color is configured to On, the measurements in the Vital Signs window are displayed in their individual parameter colors. If set to Off, all measurements are displayed in white.

Histogram Window

Not

MP2/X2

Monitor Setting: Main Setup -> Trends -> Setup Histogram

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP5 - MP90

Data Source

Period

C M

x x Realtime SpO

2

1 x x 12 h

Histogram Window Settings Configuration Implications

Data Source

Use this setting to configure which data source is displayed each time the histogram window is opened.

• If you are monitoring two SpO

2

sources and select Realtime SpO

2

1

, the realtime numerics from the SpO

2

label with the higher priority will be used as the source for the histogram.

• If you are monitoring two SpO

2

sources and select Realtime SpO

2

2

, the realtime numerics from the SpO

2

label with the lower priority will be used as the source for the histogram.

94

Monitor Settings

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

• Select Trended Data to select a data source from the trend database.

Period

Use this setting to define the default time period that is displayed each time a histogram window is opened. Choices are 30 min, 1h, 2h, 4 h, 8 h, 12h, and 24 h.

Configuring Vital Signs Recording

MP5-90 only

Monitor Setting: Main Setup -> Recordings -> Vital Signs

Factory Defaults

Item Name

End Case Record.

Trend Group

Period

Interval

Show Unit

Oper.

Mode

MP20 - MP90

MP5 (H30)

C M

x x Off x x All x x 6 hours x x 30 min x Off

MP20 (M20/M21)

MP5 (H10/20/40)

MP5T

On

3 hours

10 min

Vital Signs Recording Configuration Implications

End Case Record.

Set this to On if you want the Vital Sign recording be triggered when a patient is discharged using the End Case function.

Trend Group.

Use this setting to define the default trend group that is recorded each time a Vital

Signs recording is triggered.

Period.

Use this setting to define the period of time for which trend data should be printed on the recording. Available choices are: 1, 2, 3, 6, 12, 24, 48, and 72 hours.

Interval.

Use this setting to determine the default time interval (resolution of the trend data) that is recorded each time a Vital Signs recording is triggered. Available choices are: 12 sec, 1 min, 5 min,

10 min

, 15 min, 30 min, 1 hours, 2 hours, 3 hours.

Show Units.

If Show Units is configured to On, the measurements in the Vital Signs recording are printed together with their units.

Configuring ST Map

Main Setup -> ST Map

Factory Defaults

Item Name

Interval

Scale

Oper.

Mode

MP2 - MP90

MP5T

C M

X2

x x 5 min x x 2 mm

95

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Monitor Settings

ST Map Settings Configuration Implications

Interval

From the ST Map window, use the pop-up key Select Interval to configure the time interval between the trended ST map samples when using ST Map in Trend View. The interval ranges from 12 seconds to 30 minutes.

Scale

In the ST Map window, switch to Trend View and use the Size Up / Size Down keys to define the scale that the monitor uses in the ST Map application. Available choices are 1mm, 2mm, 3mm,

5mm

, 10mm, and 15mm.

Configuring the C.O. Window

MP20-90 only

2

3

This lets you configure the measurement parameters shown in the results table of the C.O. procedure window.

Monitor Setting: Main Setup -> Cardiac Output -> Table Contents

1

4

5

To configure the C.O. window settings, you must either have a C.O. transducer connected or manually switch the C.O. measurement On. You can do this by turning C.O. On in the C.O. Setup menu. Make sure that while you are configuring without a connected C.O. transducer, you do not pause, switch off or silence alarms.

Select Main Setup > Cardiac Output to open the Cardiac Output window.

Select the pop-up key Table Contents to enter the Table Contents menu. The left column displays the parameters that are already switched on. The right column contains other available parameters.

Select a parameter in the right column and select the left arrow key to move the selected parameter to the left column. The maximum number of entries that can be moved to the left varies depending on the monitor model and display resolution.

Close the menu when you are finished.

C.O.

C.I.

ITBV

ITBVI

EVLW

EVLWI

GEDV

GEDVI

ETVI

CFI

Tblood

Tinj

InjVol

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP20 - MP90

C M

x x On x x On x x Off x x On x x Off x x On x x Off x x Off x x On x x On x x Off x x On x x On

96

Monitor Settings

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP20 - MP90

CathCt

CompCt

PVPI

1

GEF

1

RLShnt

1

C M

x x On x x On x x Off x x Off x x Off

1.Setting not available in the U.S.A or in clinical environments under FDA control.

Configuring the Wedge Window

MP20-90 only

Monitor Setting: Main Setup -> Wedge

Factory Defaults

Item Name

Reference Wave 1

Reference Wave 2

Wave Speed

PAWP Color

Oper.

Mode

MP20 - MP90 (H10/20/40)

C M

x x Primary Lead x x Resp x x 25 mm/sec x Green

MP20 - MP90 (H30)

CO

2

Yellow

Configuring the Loops Window

MP40-90 only

Monitor Setting: Main Setup -> Loops

Factory Defaults

Item Name

Loop Type

Oper.

Mode

MP40 - MP90

C M

x x Press/Volume

97

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Monitor Settings

Configuring the CSA Window

MP40-90 only

CSA Window Configuration

Monitor Setting: Main Setup -> Measurements -> EEG ->

Setup CSA Window

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP40 - MP90

C M

Buffer

Trend SEF

Trend MDF

Trend PPF

Clipping x

Frequency Scale x x x A (2 Sec) x x On x x Off x x Off

On

0...30 Hz

CSA Window Configuration Implications

Buffer

defines which of the three preconfigured buffers (see "Configuring CSA Buffers" on page 145)

is used in the CSA window. This setting can also be changed in monitoring mode. Note that the default buffer interval for CSAs viewed in the CSA window is optimized for a quick update of CSA information.

Trend SEF / Trend MDF / Trend PPF

defines which of the trend lines (SEF, MDF, PPF) are displayed in the CSA window. These settings can also be changed in monitoring mode.

Clipping

Set Clipping to On to improve the 3-D presentation of the CSA and make it more

“readable”. When set to On, peaks in the spectral lines are artificially clipped at a certain height (see graphic). If Clipping is Off, peaks can be displayed over the full window height which may result in a more cluttered presentation.

Clipping

Hidden lines

Frequency Scale

defines the bandwidth displayed in the CSA. Note that the calculation is always done on the full bandwidth.

98

Monitor Settings

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Configuring ECG Application

ECG Application Configuration

Monitor Setting: Main Setup -> Measurement -> ECG

Factory Defaults

Item Name

AutoFilter

Fix Pacer Amplit

Default ECG Size x x x

Oper.

Mode

MP5 - MP90 (H10/20/40)

MP2/X2

C M

MP5T

Off

Off

Size x1

MP5 - MP90 (H30)

On

Size x2

ECG Application Configuration Implications

Auto Filter

If the AutoFilter setting is configured to On the monitor will automatically switch to the setting Filter if electromagnetic interference is detected.

Default ECG Size

This setting lets you preconfigure the default size with which all ECG waves are drawn on the Screen. The Choices are x0.5, x1, x2, x4, AutoSize. If you select AutoSize, the monitor chooses the optimal adjustment factor for all the ECG waves so that they use the space available to them as efficiently as possible. Use the 1 mV calibration bar as an indicator of the actual signal strength.

Fix Pacer Amplit

Set this to On to configure the pacer spikes to have a fixed size, for ease of identification on the monitor Screen. The spikes are then shown in the background as a dotted line. The length of the dotted line is fixed to the height of the wave channel and is independent of the actual pacer amplitude. Set it to Off to display the pacer spikes as a solid line in their original height and the pace pulse markers next to the pacer spikes.

ON OFF

99

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Monitor Settings

Configuring Calculations

MP20-90 only

Monitor Setting: Main Setup -> Calculations

Factory Defaults

Item Name

Calc. Time Ref.

Height Unit

Weight Unit

BSA Form. Adult

BSA Form. Pedi

BSA Form. Neo

Hemo Press Unit

Gas Press Unit

Hb Unit

Hemo Calcs

Oxy Calcs

Vent Calcs

Oper.

Mode

MP20 - MP90

C M

x x x x x x x x x x x x

C.O. Time

not applicable, these settings are stored as Global Settings, see "Global Settings" on page 147.

Dubois

Dubois

Boyd mmHg mmHg g/dl

On

On

Off

Calculations Configuration Implications

Calc. Time Ref.

(relevant for Hemo Calcs only) The calculation time reference determines the timestamp of all measurement values that are used for a hemodynamic calculation except the C.O. value.

Select C.O. Time if you want to use the values measured at exactly the time of the most recently saved

C.O. measurement.

Select Current Time if you want to use the currently measured values (i.e. the values measured at the time you entered the Calculations window). The most recent available C.O. value is used for the calculation. Be aware that if Calc. Time Ref. is set to Current Time, and the calculation is performed significantly later then the C.O. value has been saved, the difference in timestamps may reduce the clinical validity of the calculation results.

BSA Form. Adult/Pedi/Neo

Defines the formula used to calculate the body surface area. The choices are Dubois and Boyd.

Hemo Press Unit

Defines the unit used for hemodynamic pressures in the calculation window. The choices are mmHg and kPa.

Gas Press Unit

Defines the unit used for gas pressures in the calculation window. The choices are

mmHg

and kPa.

Hb Unit

Defines the unit used for hemoglobin in the calculation window. The choices are g/dl and

mmol/l

.

Hemo Calcs

Set Hemo Calcs to On to make the Hemo Calcs menu entry available in the

Calculations menu in monitoring mode.

100

Monitor Settings

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Oxy Calcs

Set Oxy Calcs to On to make the Oxy Calcs menu entry available in the

Calculations menu in monitoring mode.

Vent Calcs

Set Vent Calcs to On to make the Vent Calcs menu entry available in the

Calculations menu in monitoring mode.

Configuring Reports

Not

MP5T

Monitor Setting: Main Setup -> Reports -> Setup Reports -> Report

For some report types, some of the settings are not shown. This means that they cannot be changed.

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP2 - MP90

X2

C M

Realtime Rep

Report Type

Report Size

Orientation

Target Device

VitalsReport

Report Type

Report Size

Orientation

Target Device

Graph Report

Report Type

Report Size

Orientation

Target Device

EventEpisode

Report Type

Report Size

Orientation

Target Device

Event Review

Report Type

Report Size

Orientation

Target Device x x VisibleWaves x x Unspecified x x Unspecified x x x x x x x Unspecified x Vital Signs x Unspecified x Unspecified x Unspecified x Graph Trend x x Unspecified x x Unspecified x x x x x x x Unspecified x Episode x Unspecified x Unspecified x Unspecified x Review x x Unspecified x x Unspecified x x Unspecified

101

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP2 - MP90

X2

C M

ECG Report A

Report Type

Report Size

Orientation

Target Device

ECG Report B

Report Type

Report Size

Orientation

Target Device

ST Map Rep.

Report Type

Report Size

Orientation

Target Device

ECG QT Rep.

Report Type

Report Size

Orientation

Target Device

EEG Report

Report Type

Report Size

Orientation

Target Device

C.O. Report

Target Device

Wedge Report

Target Device

ProtWatchRep

Report Type

Report Size

Orientation

Target Device

Alarm Limits

Report Type x x x Unspecified x x Unspecified x x x x x x x x Unspecified x x Unspecified x x x x x x x x Unspecified x x Unspecified x x x x x x x x x ECG3X4 x Unspecified x ECG12x1 x Ledger x Unspecified x Unspecified x ST Map x Unspecified x ECG QT Rep.

x Unspecified x Unspecified x Unspecified x EEG Report x Unspecified x Unspecified x Unspecified x Protocol 1 x Unspecified x Unspecified x Unspecified x Alarm Limits

102

Monitor Settings

Monitor Settings

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Factory Defaults

Item Name

Report Size

Orientation

Target Device

Calc. Report

Target Device

Calc. Review

Target Device

Loops Report

Target Device

Drug Calc

Target Device

Histogram

Report Type

Report Size

Orientation

Target Device

System Report

Report Type

Report Size

Orientation

Target Device

User Report A

Report Type

Report Size

Orientation

Target Device

User Report B

Report Type

Report Size

Orientation

Target Device

Oper.

Mode

MP2 - MP90

X2

C M

x x Unspecified x x Unspecified x x Unspecified x x Unspecified x x Unspecified x x Unspecified x x Unspecified x x Histogram x x Unspecified x x Unspecified x x Unspecified x x Test Report x x Unspecified x x Unspecified x x Unspecified x x None x x Unspecified x x Unspecified x x Unspecified x x None x x Unspecified x x Unspecified x x Unspecified

For information on configuring ECG reports, see "Configuring ECG Reports" on page 108.

For information on configuring CSA reports, see "CSA Reports Configuration" on page 108.

For information on configuring Trend reports, see "Configuring Trend Reports" on page 109.

103

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Monitor Settings

Reports Configuration Implications

Each time a report is triggered, the monitor looks through the list of printers in the order they appear in the Setup Printers menu and prints the report on the first enabled printer that meets the requirements of the triggered report.

Report Type

Lets you select a template for the report. The selection of templates listed depends on the report selected. The following templates are available:

VisibleWaves: all waves currently visible, in the order they appear on the screen.

All Waves: all measured waves.

RT Waves: all currently measured realtime waves, according to the monitor’s priority list.

HiRes Waves: all measured HiRes waves.

OxyCRG Waves: the OxyCRG/Neonatal Event Review waves.

Vital Signs: trend information in tabular form.

Graph Trend: trend information in graphic form.

Histogram: trend information in form of a histogram.

Episode: a single patient event episode.

Review: an overview of patient events.

Event Rev All:

ECG3X4, ECG6X2, ECG12X1, ECG4X2, ECG8X1, ECG12X1(2P): Different formats of ECG reports.

ST Map: ST Map report.

ECG QT: QT report.

– EEG Report

: EEG report.

Protocol 1 / 2 / 3: ProtocolWatch reports.

Alarm Limits: a list of all currently set alarm limits.

Battery Stat: Battery Status report.

Report Size

Lets you choose the paper size to be used for the report. The selection of sizes listed depends on the report type selected: Unspecified, Universal, A4, Letter, LrgUniversal,

A3

, or Ledger.

• If set to Unspecified, the report prints on the first available printer in the list of printers which is enabled and which has a paper size appropriate for the chosen template.

• If set to Universal, the report prints on the first available printer in the list of printers which is enabled and which offers the paper size A4 or US letter.

• If set to LrgUniversal, the report prints on the first available printer in the list of printers which is enabled and which offers the paper size A3 or ledger.

Orientation

lets you set the orientation of the report printout. The selection of orientations listed depends on the report type and report size selected:

Unspecified: the report uses the default orientation for the chosen report type.

Landscape: the report uses landscape orientation.

Portrait: the report uses portrait orientation.

Target Device

Lets you choose which printer the print job will be sent to:

104

Monitor Settings

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

• If set to Unspecified, the report prints on the first printer in the list of printers which is enabled and which has a paper size appropriate for the chosen template. If no printer is available when the report is triggered, the report is sent to the print database from where it will be automatically printed, when an appropriate printer becomes available.

• If set to Local 1 / 2, the report will be sent to the corresponding local printer. If the printer is not available when the report is triggered, the report is not printed, and the information is lost.

• If set to Remote 1 / 2 /3, the report will be sent to the corresponding remote printer. If the printer is not available when the report is triggered, the report is not printed, and the information is lost.

• If set to Database, the report will be sent to the print database (provided this is enabled, see "Print

Database" on page 186). The print database is a special section of the monitor database which acts as a

buffer for print jobs. Reports stored in the print database will not be cleared by a discharge or by a power cycle. Reports stored in the print database will be handled depending on how the setting

Auto Prnt Dbs

is set, see "Configuring Other Report Settings".

Configuring Other Report Settings

Not

MP5T

Monitor Setting: Main Setup -> Reports

Factory Defaults

Item Name

Auto Print Dbs

Addressograph x x

Oper.

Mode

MP2 - MP90

X2

C M

Always

None

Other Report Settings Configuration Implications

Auto Prnt Dbs

This setting determines how the monitor handles reports stored in the print database.

• If Auto Prnt Dbs is set to Always, print jobs stored in the print database are automatically printed when a printer with a paper size matching the template of the report becomes available.

• Set Auto Prnt Dbs to Never if you do not want the monitor to automatically send reports stored in the print database to a matching printer. This enables the clinician to print only selected reports stored in the print database.

• Set Auto Prnt Dbs to Host Only if you connect an X2 or MP5 to a host monitor (companion mode) and want to prevent reports stored in the print database of the companion monitor being sent to a matching printer. This ensures that reports triggered on the companion while disconnected from the host and the network (for example during transport) are not automatically printed when the companion is connected to a host monitor. If Auto Prnt Dbs is set to Host Only reports triggered on the host monitor are still sent to a matching printer.

105

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Monitor Settings

Addressograph

This lets you configure an addressograph field at the top of the report. Choices are

Left

side, Right side, or None. An addressograph field is an empty field which has a width of 60mm, its height depends on the report. This enables the clinician to label the report with their own patient data.

If you configure Addressograph to Left or Right, only the first character of the patient’s middle name (middle initial) may be shown on the report.

Configuring Auto Reports

Not

MP5T

Monitor Setting: Main Setup -> Reports -> Auto Reports

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP5 - MP90 (H10/20/40)

MP2/X2

C M

Auto Report A

Report x x None

End Case Report x x On

Scheduled Rep.

Start Hour x x x On x 7

Start Minute

Rep. Freq.(Hr)

Rep. Freq.(Min) x x x x 0 x 24 x 0

Auto Report B

Report x x None

End Case Report x x On

Scheduled Rep.

Start Hour x x x On x 7

Start Minute

Rep. Freq.(Hr)

Rep. Freq.(Min) x x x x 0 x 24 x 0

Auto Report C

Report x x None

End Case Report x x On

Scheduled Rep.

Start Hour x x x On x 7

Start Minute

Rep. Freq.(Hr)

Rep. Freq.(Min) x x x x 0 x 24 x 0

Auto Report D

Report x x None

End Case Report x x On

Scheduled Rep.

x x On

MP5 - MP90 (H30)

Off

Off

Off

Off

106

Monitor Settings

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Factory Defaults

Item Name

Start Hour

Start Minute

Rep. Freq.(Hr)

Rep. Freq.(Min)

Oper.

Mode

MP5 - MP90 (H10/20/40)

MP2/X2

C M

x x 7 x x 0 x x 24 x x 0

MP5 - MP90 (H30)

Auto Reports Configuration Implications

Auto Reports print automatically when a specified trigger occurs. There are two types of Auto Reports:

Scheduled reports can be set up to print at predefined intervals, starting at a predefined time of day. The start time you set applies for every following day. For example, if you set a start time of 07:00 and a repeat time of six hours, the first report will print at 07:00 every day, the next at 13:00 and so on.

End Case Reports print when a patient is discharged using the monitor’s End Case function.

An Auto Report can include both a Scheduled Report and an End Case report.

Setting up an End Case Report

1

Select Main Setup -> Reports -> Auto Reports

2

Select one of the four available Auto Report “slots” (A, B, C, or D)

3

4

5

6

7

Select Report, then select the type of report you want to be printed when a patient is discharged using the End Case function, for example “VitalsReport”.

Set End Case Report to On.

Set Scheduled Rep. to Off, if do not want the monitor to trigger a Vital Signs Report at predefined intervals.

If needed, set up the VitalsReport or whatever type of report you used for the EndCase Report.

If you want more than one report to be printed when using End Case on a patient, repeat steps 2 through 6, selecting a different Auto Report (A, B, C, or D) and allocating it a different report type.

107

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Monitor Settings

Configuring ECG Reports

Not

MP5T

ECG Reports Configuration

Monitor Setting: Main Setup -> Reports -> ECG Reports

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP2 - MP90

X2

C M

ReportLead Layout x

ECG Gain x

Internat x 10 mm/mV

Speed

Annotation x x x 25 mm/sec x Off

ECG Reports Configuration Implications

Report Lead Layout

The layout of the report can be configured to either International or

Cabrera

.

ECG Gain

This lets you set a defined ECG Gain to determine how ECG waves will appear on the ECG report printouts.

Speed

Allows you to set the ECG wave speed used on the printout.

Annotation

Set Annotation to On if the printed ECG wave should be annotated with beat labels.

Pace pulse marks are automatically printed beside the wave for paced patients.

Configuring CSA Reports

MP40-90 only

CSA Reports Configuration

Monitor Setting: Main Setup -> Reports -> CSA on EEG Rep.

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP40 - MP90

C M

Buffer

Trend SEF

Trend MDF

Trend PPF

Clipping x

Frequency Scale x x x C (120 Sec) x x On x x Off x x Off

On

0...30 Hz

108

Monitor Settings

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

CSA Reports Configuration Implications

Buffer

defines which of the three preconfigured buffers (see "Configuring CSA Buffers" on page 145)

is used on a CSA report. This setting can also be changed in monitoring mode. Note that the default buffer interval for CSA reports is intended to provide an overview of longer term CSA trends.

Trend SEF / MDF / PPF

defines which of the available trend lines (SEF, MDF, PPF) are printed on the CSA report. This setting can also be changed in monitoring mode.

Clipping

Set Clipping to On to improve the 3-D presentation of the CSA and make it more

“readable”. When set to On, peaks in a spectral line are artificially clipped at a certain height (see graphic

under "Configuring CSA Buffers" on page 145). If Clipping is Off, peaks can reach as high as the

window allows which may result in a more cluttered presentation.

Frequency Scale

defines the bandwidth used for the CSA report.

Configuring Trend Reports

Not

MP5T

Vital Signs Report

Monitor Setting: Main Setup -> Reports -> Vital Signs Rep.

Factory Defaults

Item Name

TrendGroup

Period

Interval

Show Units

Oper.

Mode

MP20 - MP90

MP5 (H30)

C M

x x All x x 6 hours x x 30 min x Off

MP20 (M20/M21)

MP5 (H10/20/40)

MP2/X2

3 hours

10 min

Graphical Trend Report

Not

MP5T

Monitor Setting: Main Setup -> Reports -> Graph Trend Rep.

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP20 - MP90

MP5 (H30)

C M

MP20 (M20/M21)

MP5 (H10/20/40)

MP2/X2

TrendGroup

Period

Automatic Period x x All x x 6 hours x x Off

3 hours

Trend Report Settings Configuration Implications

Trend Group

Use this setting to define the default trend group that is printed each time a trend report is triggered.

109

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Monitor Settings

Interval

(Vital Signs Report only) Use this setting to determine the default time interval (resolution of the trend data) that is printed each time a trend report is triggered.

Show Units

(Vital Signs Report only) If Show Units is configured to On, the measurements in the

Vital Signs report are printed together with their units.

Period

Use this setting to define the period of time for which trend data should be printed on the report. If Automatic Period is configured to On, all trend data for the current patient will be printed, irrespective which trend period is selected.

Automatic Period

(Graphical Trend Report only) When Automatic Period is set to Off, the Period setting defines the period of trend information printed on Graphic Trend Reports. When

Automatic Period

is On, the Period setting is ignored and the Graphic Trend Report shows trend information for the entire period stored in the trend database. The time is shown on the report’s horizontal axis, which always extends across one page, and the measurement trends are printed below each other on the vertical axis.

Configuring User Interface Settings

Monitor Setting: Main Setup -> User Interface

Factory Defaults

Item Name

General

Oper.

Mode

MP20-MP90

(H10/20/40)

MP5-MP90

(H30)

MP20 (M20/M21)

MP5 (H10/20/40)

MP2/X2

MP5T

MP2/X2

C M Profile Adult

Profile Pedi

Profile Neo

Profile Adult

Profile Pedi

Profile Neo

Profile Adult

Profile Pedi

Profile Neo

Profile Adult

Profile Pedi

Profile Neo

Profile

Outdoor

QRS Volume

QRS Low

QRS Type x x 1 x x x

3

1 1

3

0

not applicable, this setting is stored as a global setting, see "Global Settings" on page 147.

8 4

8

10 Prompt Volume

Tone Modulation

Tone Mod. Type

Global Speed

RespiratorySpeed x x Yes x Enhanced x x x 25mm/s x 6.25mm/s

EEG Speed

Touch ToneVolume x

Touch Enable

1

MMS Keys

2 x x x 25 mm/s

1

Yes

Enabled not applicable

3

ArrhyOff Message x

Meas. Selection x

Meas. Deactivate

Timer Volume

OtherBed Colors x x x

Yes

Window

No

Yes

Manual

4 6

not applicable, this setting is stored as a network setting: see "Configuring

Network Settings" on page 115.

110

Monitor Settings

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP20-MP90

(H10/20/40)

MP5-MP90

(H30)

MP20 (M20/M21) MP2/X2

MP5 (H10/20/40)

MP5T

MP2/X2

C M Profile Adult

Profile Pedi

Profile Neo

Profile Adult

Profile Pedi

Profile Neo

Profile Adult

Profile Pedi

Profile Neo

Profile Adult

Profile Pedi

Profile Neo

Profile

Outdoor

Global SmartKeys

Oper. 1 Fn Keys

Oper. 2 Fn Keys

Companion Operating

3

Display

3

Display 1 Brightness

4

Standby Brightn.

4

TransportBrightn

5

Menu LineSpacing

2

Display 2

6

Display Units

Alarm Limits

Auto Fill Waves

Show ST In Wave

NBP Time

Wave Style

Wave Line Style

Menu LineSpacing

2

Display Units

Alarm Limits

Auto Fill Waves

Show ST In Wave

Hide Alarm Info

7

Hide Keys

7

Display 3

8 x x x not applicable, these settings are stored as unique monitor settings: see

"Configuring User Interface Settings - Keys" on page 143.

x x

Enabled

Curr. Screen x x Optimum x Optimum not applicable not applicable

10

10 x x x x

Optimum

Wide

No

Yes x x x x Yes x No

Meas Time

Line

No

No

Yes

Filled

Medium

Yes

Yes

No

not applicable x x x x x x x x Yes x No

No

No

Thin

Wide

No

Yes No

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

No not applicable

NBP Time

Wave Style

Wave Line Style x

Menu LineSpacing x x x

Display Units

Alarm Limits

Auto Fill Waves

Show ST In Wave

Hide Alarm Info

7

Hide Keys

7

NBP Time

Wave Style

Wave Line Style x x x x x x

No

Yes x x Yes x No x

Meas Time

Line

Thin

Wide

No

No

Meas Time

Line

Thin

Filled

Medium

No

No

Yes

Filled

Medium

Line

Thin not applicable, only up to two displays supported

111

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Monitor Settings

1.Setting can be changed in service mode only.

2.Setting not available in MP2/X2 monitors.

3.Setting not available in MP2/X2 and MP5 monitors.

4.Setting only affects monitors that have a built-in display.

5.Setting only available in monitors that can be operated on battery power.

6.Setting only applicable for monitors with two main displays.

7.Setting not applicable if display is the XDS Remote Display.

8.Setting only applicable for monitors with three main displays.

User Interface Configuration Implications

QRS Volume

Sets the default volume of the QRS tone. The QRS tone is derived from either the ECG or Pulse, depending on which is currently selected as the alarm source.

QRS Low

Defines the minimum QRS tone volume that can be selected by the user while in monitoring mode.

Prompt Volume

Defines the volume of the tone the monitor emits to draw the user’s attention to a prompt message shown in the monitor’s prompt/status line.

Tone Modulation

if you set Tone Modulation to Yes, the pitch of the SpO

2 with the measured signal strength. If you are using two SpO

2

tone will change

sensors simultaneously, you can determine which sensor will serve as the source for the tone modulation pitch, by selecting the corresponding SpO

2 label as the System Pulse source. For example, if you measure SpO

2 l and SpO

2 r and want SpO source for the tone modulation, in the Setup Pulse menu, set System Pulse to SpO

2 r

.

2 r to be the

Tone Modulation Type

This setting lets you choose between Standard and Enhanced.

Standard

is the regular Nellcor behavior. The difference in frequency per % saturation change is small which might make it difficult to hear smaller changes. Enhanced results in a larger (and therefore more obvious) frequency decrease for each drop in SpO

2

level. Due to the larger steps, when the saturation drops below 70%, the absolute frequency may become so low that the perceived volume will be low and it will be hard to hear a frequency change per % saturation.

Global Speed

The Global Speed setting defines the speed of all non-respiratory and non-EEG waves on the Screen. The Global Speed setting can be overridden by fixed wave channel speeds. See

“Configuring the Wave Channel Speed” on page 22.

RespiratorySpeed

The Respiratory Speed setting defines the speed of all respiratory waves

(CO

2

, Resp. anesthetic agents and O

2

) on the Screen. The RespiratorySpeed setting can be

overridden by fixed wave channel speeds. See “Configuring the Wave Channel Speed” on page 22.

EEG Speed

The EEG Speed setting defines the speed of all EEG waves (including BIS) on the

Screen. The EEG Speed setting can be overridden by fixed wave channel speeds. See “Configuring the

Wave Channel Speed” on page 22.

Touch Tone Volume

The Touch Tone Volume setting defines the volume of the tone you hear every time you select a field on the monitor screen. You may want to set this to 0 if you want to operate the monitor in a quiet environment.

MMS Keys

To prevent users from using the hardkeys on the Multi-Measurement Module, set

MMS Keys

to Disabled. This setting is not available in the MP2 and X2.

112

Monitor Settings

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

ArrhyOff Message

If arrhythmia analysis is switched off, the message “Arrhythmia Off” is permanently displayed beside the first ECG wave on both the bedside monitor and on the Information

Center. If you do not want this message to appear, you must set ArrhyOff Message to Off.

Meas. Selection.

The Meas. Selection setting defines the behavior of the monitor if a measurement label conflict occurs.

• Set this to Indicator to make the measurement selection icon with question marks your only indicator of the label conflict.

• Set it to Window to pop up the Measurement Selection window indicating the label conflict.

• Set it to Auto Select. to let the monitor resolve the conflict automatically by assigning a new, generic label to the newly connected measurement device. Be aware that this behavior only applies to the following plug-in module measurements:

– SpO

2

– Invasive Pressure

– Temperature

Auto Select.

does not work on any MMS or X2 measurements.

Meas. Deactivate

This setting defines the monitor’s behavior when you connect a measurement device (MMS, X2, or plug-in module) to the monitor, and

• a measurement label of the newly connected device duplicates the label of an already connected measurement device, and

• the already connected device is switched off.

If Meas. Deactivate is set to Manual, the monitor deactivates the newly connected measurement, due to the label conflict.

If Meas. Deactivate is set to Auto, the monitor deactivates the previously connected measurement device and activates the newly connected device.

Timer Volume

determines the volume of the notification tone for all timers.

Companion - Operating

This setting is only available on host monitors that can support the X2 or MP5 as a multi-measurement module (companion mode). It determines whether the companion monitor (X2 or MP5) can still be operated, when it is connected to a host monitor. If Enabled, functions you can operate on an X2 or MP5 are restricted to measurements originating in that device. If

Disabled

, no operation is possible.

Companion - Display

This setting is only available on host monitors that can support the X2 or

MP5 as a multi-measurement module (companion mode). It determines which Screen is shown on the companion monitor (X2 or MP5), when it is connected to a host monitor. Choices are:

Curr. Screen: shows the Screen that was active before connecting to the host.

Blank Screen: shows a special companion mode standby Screen.

Brightness

Defines the default brightness for monitoring. This setting is not applicable for an MP80/

90 monitor (external display). For Brightness, the choice Optimum is equivalent to 8.

Standby Brightness

Lets you choose a brightness setting for when the monitor is in Standby.

This setting is not applicable for an MP80/90 monitor (external display). For Standby Brightness, the choice Optimum is equivalent to 1.

113

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Monitor Settings

Transport Brightness

This setting is only available on the MP2 - MP50. It defines the display brightness when the monitor is running on battery power. For Transport Brightness, the choice

Optimum

is equivalent to 4.

User Interface - Display Settings Configuration Implications

Menu LineSpacing

Use this to change the line spacing for all menus. Wide provides more room between menu entries and is the recommended setting for touchscreen use. Narrow lets you see more menu entries on one menu page and is recommended when using mouse or SpeedPoint/Navigation Point as the primary input device.

Display Units

If Display Units is set to Yes, the measurement units are displayed next to the measurement numerics, provided that there is enough space.

Alarm Limits

If Alarm Limits is set to Yes, the alarm limits are displayed next to the measurement numerics, provided that there is enough space.

Auto Fill Waves

If Auto Fill Waves is set to Yes, the monitor automatically assigns available waves that would otherwise not be displayed, to wave channels for which the preconfigured waves are currently not available. Set Auto Fill Waves to No, if you do not want waves other than the ones preconfigured to automatically appear on the Screen.

An example: assume you are viewing a 4 wave Screen with the following wave channel configuration (top to bottom): ECG, Any SpO

2

, Any Press, CO

2

. With Auto Fill Waves set to Yes, if you were currently not measuring CO

2

but a 2nd Invasive Pressure, the monitor would automatically assign the 2nd

Invasive Pressure to the 4th wave channel. With Auto Fill Waves set to No, the 4th wave channel would be empty.

Show ST In Wave

If Show ST in Wave is set to Yes, the current ST value will be shown next to each ECG wave.

Hide Alarm Info

This setting only applies to monitors with two or three main displays (excluding the XDS Remote Display). It is only available for Display 2 and Display 3. If you set it to Yes, for example for Display 3, this display will no longer show any alarm related information, such as alarm messages, alarm limits next to the numerics, and Alarm off symbols. Flashing numerics will also be deactivated on this display.

Note that this setting has no effect on the XDS Remote Display. The monitor will behave as if the setting was set to No.

Hide Keys

This setting only applies to monitors with two or three main displays (excluding the XDS

Remote Display). It is only available for Display 2 and Display 3. If you set it to Yes, for example for Display 3, the Operating Area, including permanent keys, SmartKeys, and the Measurement

Selection key will be deactivated and invisible on this display.

Note that this setting has no effect on the XDS Remote Display. The monitor will behave as if the setting was set to No.

NBP Time

If NBP Time is set to Meas Time, the time shown beside the NBP numeric will show the timestamp of the most recent NBP measurement. If set to Next Meas, and NBP mode is set to Auto, the time until the next automatic measurement is shown, along with a graphic representation of the remaining time.

Wave Style

This setting lets you change the presentation of certain respiratory waveforms (CO

2

,

AWF, AWP, and AWV). If you set this to Filled, the area underneath the waves is filled with color. If you set it to Line, the waves are displayed in the standard way, as continuous lines.

114

Monitor Settings

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Wave Line Style

This setting lets you configure the thickness of all waves and HiRes Trends on display 1 (2,3). For better visibility over a distance you might want to use Medium or Thick. The choices are: Thin, Medium, Thick, Extra Thick.

Display-Related Configuration Implications for Monitors which are connected to an XDS Remote Display

• In an MP2/X2, MP5, MP60/70, MP80, or MP90 (with single CPU), the XDS Remote Display will be the second main display. The XDS Remote Display will use the settings made for Display 2. Note that the User Interface settings Hide Alarm Info and Hide Keys made for Display 2 will have no effect on the XDS Remote Display. The monitor will behave as if the settings are set to No.

• In an MP90 with dual CPU, the XDS Remote Display will be the third main display. The XDS Remote

Display will use the settings made for Display 3. Note that the User Interface settings

Hide Alarm Info

and Hide Keys made for Display 3 will have no effect on the XDS

Remote Display. The monitor will behave as if the settings are set to No.

N O T E

If you clone a configuration that was made for a Dual CPU MP90 with an XDS Remote Display as the third main display to a smaller monitor with an XDS Remote Display as the second main display, the configuration settings made on the MP90 for Display 2 will on the smaller monitor be used for the

XDS Remote Display.

Configuring Network Settings

Monitor Setting: Main Setup -> Network

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP5 - MP90 (H10/20/40)

MP2/X2

C M

Auto Window

Auto Window Type

Auto Window Disp

1

CareGroup Status

Caregroup

CentralMonitorng

Tele Screen

Return To

Other BedColors

2

Remote Controls

CaregroupToneVol

Caregroup Tone

RF Access Code

3

1.Setting available for MP90 with more than one main display only.

2.Setting not available for MP2/X2.

3.Setting available for MP2, MP5, MP20/30 and MP40/50 only. Setting is a global setting.

MP5 - MP90 (H30)

x x x x x x x x x x x x

x not applicable, see "Network Configuration Implications"

x PatWindow Off

Display 1

On

Standard

Mandatory on ECG

Previous

Optional

Enabled

not applicable, this settings is stored as a global setting, see "Global Settings" on page 147

8

Standard

1

4

115

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Monitor Settings

Network Configuration Implications

Auto Window

This is not a configurable setting. It can be used during monitoring to temporarily disable automatic notification of alarm conditions at the other beds in the Care Group. To configure the automatic notification to disabled, set Auto Window Type to Off.

Auto Window Type

If you want to prevent automatic notification of alarm conditions at the other beds in the Care Group, configure Auto Window Type to Off. If you want notification at the monitor of alarm conditions at other beds in the Care Group, configure either:

Care Group, to make the My Care Group window pop up.

Alarming Beds, to make the Alarming Beds window pop up, that shows all beds in the associated care group that currently have unsilenced alarms.

Pat.Window, to make the Other Patient Window for the alarming bedside pop up.

Note that if the Information Center is configured to unit-based care groups and Auto Window Type is configured to Pat.Window, the monitor may automatically fall back to Alarming Beds.

Auto Window can be temporarily disabled in monitoring mode. To do this, select the network symbol on the monitor’s information line, then select Auto Window and toggle to Disabled. Remember to reenable the Auto Window as soon as possible.

Auto Window Disp

This setting applies only to monitors with multiple main displays. It defines on which of the connected displays the automatic pop-up window configured under Auto Window Type is shown. If the configured display is not available, the monitor automatically uses Display 1.

CareGroup Status

If you are asked to hide the Care Group Overview Bar on all Screens, set the

CareGroup Status

to Off.

Caregroup

This setting lets you change the way care groups are defined.

• Set this to Standard if you want the beds in your care group to be defined by the care group setup at the IntelliVue Information Center. Depending on your revision of the Information Center, the following care group models are supported:

– Bed-Based CareGroups: lets you assign a maximum number of 12 patients from a clinical unit to a care group.

– Unit-Based CareGroup (IIC Rev. G and higher): assigns all beds on all Information Centers assigned to a clinical unit to one large care group (up to 64 patients monitored by up to 4 Information

Centers).

For more detail, please refer to the IntelliVue Information Center Instructions for Use.

• Set it to My Central if you need to assign more than 12 beds, but not more than 16 beds to a care group. This care group model is typically used in facilities with only one IntelliVue Information Center

(IIC). “My Central” care groups include all beds (up to 16) from a directly connected IIC, but cannot combine beds from different IICs. The selection of beds in a “My Central” care group is static and cannot be configured.

Be aware that in order to be included in the My Central care group, beds need to be assigned to a care group at the Information Center. Also, at the IIC, configure “Overview Auto-Alarm” and “Overview

Prompt-Tone” for all Care Groups to the same settings. This ensures that all beds in the “My Central”

Care Group exhibit the same alarm behavior.

116

Monitor Settings

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Central Monitorng

If CentralMonitorng is set to Mandatory, and the monitor was not connected to an Information Center when switched on, or loses its connection to the Central during monitoring, it will generate the INOP message “No Central Monit.”, accompanied by an INOP tone.

If CentralMonitorng is set to Optional, the monitor generates the same INOP, but only when the monitor loses the connection during monitoring. The INOP will not be generated if the monitor is not connected to an Information Center when it is switched on. This setting is intended for standalone monitors.

Tele Screen

Set Tele Screen to On Pair if you want the monitor to automatically switch to a Screen with a Telemetry Data Overview screen element embedded when the user “pairs” the monitor with a telemetry device. If there is more than one of these special Screens available, the monitor uses the first Screen in the Screen list. If Tele Screen is set to On ECG, the change to the Tele Screen happens if the monitor is paired with the tele transmitter and a valid ECG signal from the Tele transmitter is available. Set Tele Screen to Off, to switch off the automatism completely.

The availability of this function depends on the Information Center revision the monitor is connected to.

See your Information Center Instructions for Use for further details.

Return To

This setting determines which Screen the monitor loads when it is unpaired from the telemetry device or when, while paired, the ECG is sourced from the bedside.

Previous loads the Screen that was active before the Telemetry Screen was loaded.

Default loads the Screen defined for the default profile.

Off does not automatically switch the Screen.

OtherBed Colors

This determines whether the measurement information from another bed is shown in the colors assigned at the Information Center or in monochrome (green on black).

The availability of this function depends on the Information Center revision the monitor is connected to.

See your Information Center Instructions for Use for further details.

Caregroup Tone

A new alarm that occurs in any of the beds assigned to the monitor’s care group can be announced with a tone. The Caregroup Tone setting lets you toggle between a Standard and

Enhanced

tone. The Enhanced tone is a more prominent tone to draw attention to the screen.

The Caregroup Tone will only be generated if an alarm exceeds the Auto Alarm Severity level configured at the Information Center. The volume of the Caregroup Tone is determined by the

CaregroupToneVol

setting (see below). Note that the Caregroup Tone can be completely disabled at the Information Center.

CaregroupToneVol

This setting defines the volume of the caregroup tone. It can be set in a range between 0 and 10. If you set CaregroupToneVol to 0, this is indicated by a crossed speaker symbol in any embedded Other Bed window. For more information on care groups and Other Bed windows, see the

Monitor and Information Center Instructions for Use.

RF Access Code

This setting is not a monitor setting, it is a global setting. It is available with

IntelliVue MP2, MP5, MP20/30 and MP40/50 monitors only. It is needed to establish communication of the IntelliVue Instrument Telemetry transceiver with the access points of the wireless network. The

IntelliVue Instrument Telemetry transceiver only communicates with an access point that is configured to the same RF Access Code.

117

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Unique Monitor Settings

Unique Monitor Settings

Some Monitor settings are unique settings. This means that they are the same in every Profile and they are

automatically included in each monitor settings block when you store them. See "Understanding Monitor

Settings" on page 84 for more detail.

The following table provides an overview of normal vs. unique monitor settings:

Monitor Settings

Normal

Alarms

Alarm Recordings

Auto Alarm Limits

INOP Severity

Screen Trend Settings

Horizon Trend Settings

Global Trend Style

Trend Windows

Trend Recordings

ST Map

C.O. Window

Wedge Window

Loops Window

CSA Window

ECG Application

Calculations (except Drug Calc.)

Reports

Other Report Settings

Auto Reports

ECG Reports

CSA Reports

Trend Reports

User Interface (except Keys)

85

88

89

Network 115

100

101

105

106

97

97

98

99

108

108

109

110

93

95

95

96

90

91

92

93

Page Unique

Trend Groups

Trend Priorities

Trend Scales / Trend Units

Event Surveillance

Event Annotations

ProtocolWatch

Recordings (except Vital Signs & Alarm Rec.)

Timers

Global SmartKeys, Function Keys

CSA Buffers

Drug Calculator

Page

119

122

123

139

143

145

146

126

133

134

135

118

Unique Monitor Settings

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Configuring Trend Groups

Unique Monitor Setting: Main Setup -> Trends -> Trend Groups

Factory Defaults

# Oper.

Mode

MP2 - MP90

MP5T

X2

C M Name

1 x x All

2 x x Standard

2 x x Cardiac

4 x x Hemo

5 x x Resp

Parameters

All parameters

HR, SpO

2

, SpO

2 pr, SpO

2 po, SpO

2

r, SpO

2

l

NBP

CO

2

, RR, awRR

Any Press

Any Temp

HR, PVC

STindx, ST, Any QT

HR

ABP, Pulse(ABP)

ART, Pulse(ART)

Ao, Pulse(Ao)

PAP, Pulse(PAP)

CVP

RAP

LAP

ICP

UAP, Pulse(UAP)

UVP

P, Pulse(P)

PAWP, CPP

C.O., C.I., CCO, CCI

ITBV, ITBVI, EVLW, EVLWI

Tblood

CO

2 awRR

O

2

RR

Scale

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Style

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

119

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Factory Defaults

# Oper.

Mode

MP2 - MP90

MP5T

X2

C M Name Parameters

6 x x Spirometry PIP,

TVexp

TVin

MVexp

MVin

RRspir

COMP

7 x x Neuro

Raw

BIS, TP, SEF, SQI (BIS), EMG, SR

TP1, TP2

SEF1, SEF2

MDF1, MDF2

PPF1, PPF2

Delta1, Delta2

Theta1, Theta2

8

9 x x x Temp x Gases

SEV

ENF

HAL

DES

MAC

Alpha1, Alpha2

Beta1, Beta2

AnyTemp, Any DiffTemp

CO

2 awRR

O

2

N

2

O

ISO

Unique Monitor Settings

Style

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Scale

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

120

Unique Monitor Settings

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Factory Defaults

# Oper.

Mode

MP2 - MP90

MP5T

X2

C M Name

10 x x External Device

Parameters

CO

2 awRR

O

2

, FIO

2

, PIP

TV

MINVOL

SpMV

PEEP pH

PCO

2

, PcO

2

PO

2

MnAwP

RRaw

Scale

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Trend Groups Configuration Implications

The measurements grouped in trend groups define the trends displayed together in the Vital Signs or

Graphics Trends windows and printed in trends reports and recordings. The trend group All contains all available measurements, you can change its name, but not the order or selection of parameters as they appear when this group is selected.

Sort Up / Sort Down

Lets you change both the sequence of trend groups, and the sequence of the trended measurement parameters within a group.

Add Separatr

Lets you add line separators. Trended parameters listed between line separators are displayed overlapping in one trend segment.

Scale

Lets you change the scales for the trended parameters. If set to Global, the Graphical Trends window and the Graph Trends Report use the scales as defined in the general Trend Scales configuration,

see "Configuring Trend Scales / Trend Units" on page 123.

Style

Lets you change how trended parameters are presented in the Graphical Trends window and on the Graph Trends Report. Select Line to display the trends as a continuous line. For measurements with compound values (for example, the systolic and diastolic pressures), select Band to fill the area between trend lines with color. If set to Global, the trend windows and reports use the style as defined in the

Global Style configuration, see "Configuring Global Trend Style" on page 93.

Style

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

Global

121

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Unique Monitor Settings

Configuring Trend Priorities

Unique Monitor Setting: Main Setup -> Trends -> Trend Priority

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP2 - MP90 (H10/20/40)

MP5T

C M

X2

Priority x x HR

PVC

SpO

2

SpO

2 l

SpO

2 r

Any Press

CPP

CCO

CCI

CO

2 awRR

RR

MP5 - MP90 (H30)

CPP

CCO

CCI

CO

2 awRR

RR

HR

PVC

SpO

2

SpO

2 l

SpO

2 r

Any Press

Any Agent

BIS

EMG

SQI

Trend Priority Configuration Implications

The monitor stores trend information for up to 32 monitored measurements, depending on the installed

database option and the configuration of the trend database (see "Trend Database" on page 185). If you

are monitoring more measurements than can be trended, the monitor determines which measurements are trended acording to an internal priority list.

The Trend Priority configuration overrides this internal measurement priority. It allows you to set your own priority for trended measurements. The Trend Priority shows the trended measurements in order of their priority - the measurement with the highest priority is at the top of the list. Any additional measurement that is monitored, but not listed in the Trend Priority menu, is assigned a priority according to the internal priority list.

Note that the monitor provides a second trend database exclusively reserved for aperiodic parameters.

Aperiodic parameters are parameters that are measured intermittently, such as NBP, C.O., C.I., PAWP

(Wedge), manually entered measurements, or lab results from external devices obtained from the VueLink or IntelliBridge plug-in module. Aperiodic parameters do not count towards the max. number of trended parameters allowed by the trend database configuration and therefore do not have to be considered when configuring the Trend Priority.

To add measurements to the priority list,

♦ select the pop-up key Add and choose from the pop-up list of available measurements.

122

Unique Monitor Settings

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

To delete measurements,

♦ select the measurement that should be deleted, and select the pop-up key Delete.

To change the priority order,

♦ use the Sort Up and Sort Down pop-up keys.

Configuring Trend Scales / Trend Units

Unique Monitor Setting: Main Setup -> Trends -> Parameter Scales

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

Unit

C M

HR

PVC

Any ST

STindx

QTc

Δ

QTc

QT

QT-HR

Any Pulse x x bpm x x /min x x mm x x mm x x msec x x msec x x msec x x bpm x x bpm

SpO

2

Δ

SpO

2 x x % x x %

Perf x x

NBP x x mmHg x x kPa

ABP, ART, Ao, UAP,

BAP, FAP, P, P1, P2,

P3, P4, x x x mmHg x kPa

PAP x x mmHg x x kPa

CVP, RAP, LAP, UVP x x mmHg

ICP, IC1, IC2 x x kPa x x mmHg x x kPa

PAWP x x mmHg

CPP x x kPa x x mmHg

PPV x x kPa x x %

30...200

4.0...28.0

0...200

0.0...28.0

0...60

0.0...8.0

0...30

0.0...4.0

0...60

0.0...8.0

0...30

0.0...4.0

0...100

0.0...14.0

0...20

MP2 - MP90

MP5T

X2

Profile Adult

30...180

0...20

-2.5...+2.5

0.0...5.0

350..450

-40..40

300..500

50..130

30...180

80...100

0...50

0.0...10.0

Profile Pedi

60..140

20...150

2.0...20.0

0...150

0.0...20.0

0...40

0.0...6.0

Profile Neo

30...210

375..425

-20..20

30...210

80..160

0.0...5.0

10...100

1.0...14.0

0...100

0.0...14.0

0...30

0.0...4.0

123

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

FiO

2

RR

PIP

MnAwp

TV

MINVOL

SpMV

PEEP

Factory Defaults

Item Name

CO,CCO

CI, CCI

SV

SI

SVV dPmax

ITBV

ITBVI

EVLW

EVLWI

GEDV

GEDVI

CFI

PVPI

GEF

SvO

2,

ScvO

2

, SO

2

LI

Sp-vO

2 tcpO

2 tcpCO

2

CO

2 awRR

O

2

Oper.

Mode

Unit MP2 - MP90

MP5T

X2

C M Profile Adult

x x % x x x x % x x kPa x x mmHg x x kPa x x mmHg x x kPa x x mmhg x x rpm x x % x x mmHg x x kPa x x x x % x x rpm x x l/min 0.0...12.0

x x l/min/m2 0.0...6.0

x x ml x x ml/m2

1...200

1...100

x x % x x x x ml

0...20

200...2000

500...3000

x x ml/m2 x x ml x x ml/kg x x ml x x ml/m2 x x x x x x %

500...1300

0...2500

0.0...20.0

400...2400

400...1000

1.0...15.0

0.0...5.0

10...40

x x mmHg x x mmHg x x ml x x liter x x liter x x mmHg

0...60

0...30

0...1000

0.0...10.0

0.0...10.0

0...15

40...80

0...59

-40...40

4.0...20.0

30...150

1.0...11.0

10...80

0.0...8.0

0...60

0...60

0...100

0...800

0...100

0.00...1.00

0...100

0...60

124

Profile Pedi

0.0...6.0

0...500

0.0...6.0

0.0...6.0

Unique Monitor Settings

Profile Neo

0.0...3.0

0.0...11.0

0...80

0...110

0...110

0...100

0.0...3.0

0.0...3.0

Unique Monitor Settings

BIS

SQI (BIS)

EMG

TP

TP1, TP2

SR

Bursts

SEF

SEF1,SEF2

MDF1, MDF2

PPF1, PPF2

Alpha1, Alpha2

Beta1, Beta2

Delta1, Delta2

Theta1,Theta2

Any Temp

Tblood

Any DiffTemp

N

2

O

Factory Defaults

Item Name

ISO

SEV

ENF

HAL

Oper.

Mode

Unit MP2 - MP90

MP5T

X2

Profile Adult

0...800

0.0...4.0

0.0...4.0

0...30

0.0...6.0

0.0...6.0

0...50

0.0...6.0

95.0...110.0

35.0...43.0

80.0...110.0

28.0...43.0

-12.0...12.0

-6.0...6.0

0...100

0...100

0.0...6.0

0...50

0.0...3.0

0.0...3.0

0...25

0...100

0...100

0...60

40...80

0.00...1.00

0...100

0...30.0

15.0...30.0

0.0...30.0

0.0...30.0

0.0...30.0

0.0...100.0

0.0...100.0

0.0...100.0

0.0...100.0

C M

x x °F x x °C x x °F x x °C x x °F x x °C x x % x x kPa x x mmHg x x % x x kPa x x mmHg x x % x x kPa x x mmHg x x % x x kPa x x mmHg x x % x x kPa x x mmHg x x x x % x x dB x x dB x x nW x x % x x /min x x Hz x x Hz x x Hz x x Hz x x % x x % x x % x x %

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Profile Pedi Profile Neo

125

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Unique Monitor Settings

Factory Defaults

Item Name

DES

SVR

SVRI pH

PCO

2

PO

2

RRaw

PcO

2

Oper.

Mode

Unit MP2 - MP90

MP5T

X2

C M

x x % x x kPa x x mmHg x x DS/cm

5 x x DSm

2

/cm

5 x x x x mmHg x x mmHg x x rpm x x mmHg

Profile Adult

0...20

0...20

0...160

400...2400

800...4800

7.0...7.8

25...50

40...160

0...60

25...50

Profile Pedi

25...60

25...60

Profile Neo

25...80

0...110

25...80

Trend Scales/Units Configuration Implications

These settings apply to the graphical trends displayed in the GraphTrends window and the screen trends.

They can be overridden for individual parameters displayed in the GraphTrends window by changing the

Scale

setting for these parameters from Global to a specific value in the Trend Group Parameter

menu (see “Configuring Trend Groups” on page 119).

Configuring Event Surveillance

MP5-90 only

Unique Monitor Setting: Main Setup -> Event Surveill. -> Setup Events

Levels of Event Surveillance

The appearance of the events windows and menus and the settings you can configure for events depends on the event surveillance option purchased for the monitor: basic event surveillance (BES), advanced event surveillance (AES), or neonatal event review (NER). This table lists the differences between the options:

Event Functionality

Available for monitor models

Event groups

Measurements per group

Basic Event

Surveillance (BES)

Option C06

MP5 - MP90

1

3

Triggers per measurement

Trigger types

Annotation

Advanced Event Surveillance

(AES)

Option C07

MP60 - MP90

6

4

1 2

Simple (“at least one”) Combined (“at least two”) no yes

Neonatal Event Review

(NER)

Option C04

MP5 - MP90

NER

3 (plus 1 for episode recording)

1

Simple (“at least one”) yes

126

Unique Monitor Settings

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Event Functionality

Available for monitor models

Types of event episode

Event views

Database capability

Event Notification

Basic Event

Surveillance (BES)

Option C06

MP5 - MP90

Advanced Event Surveillance

(AES)

Option C07

MP60 - MP90

Average Trend

Realtime Wave

Graphic Event Review window,

Graphic Event Episode window

High Resolution Trend

Average Trend

Realtime Wave

Summary view, graphic and tabular

Event Review window, graphic and tabular

Event Episode window

25 events for 24 hours 25 events for 24 hours

25 events for 8 hours

50 events for 8 hours

50 events for 24 hours no yes

Neonatal Event Review

(NER)

Option C04

MP5 - MP90

High Resolution Trend

Graphic and tabular

Event Review window,

Graphic and tabular

Event Episode window

25 events for 24 hours

25 events for 8 hours

50 events for 8 hours

50 events for 24 hours no

Select one of the listed Event Groups to start configuring it. Then either select each item and select the correct setting, or select Guided Setup to move automatically from each setting to the next.

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP5 - MP90

C M

Group 1

Group Name

Group Type

Activated

1

Notification Type

Episode Type

Pre/Post Time

Trigger Condition

Parameters

Param. 1: Trigger Type x x

Standard

Standard x x Yes x None x x Average Trend (20min) x x -10/+10 min x At Least One Param.

x HR(Pulse), SpO

2

, Resp x x HR(Pulse) All ***/** Alarms

Param. 2: Trigger Type

Param. 3: Trigger Type x x SpO

2 x x Resp

Param. 4: Trigger Type x x Blank

All ***/** Alarms

All ***/** Alarms

1.As a factory default, group 1 is activated in monitors with options H10, H30, or H40. In monitors with option H20, group 1 is deactivated.

127

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP60 - MP90

C M

Group 2

Group Name

Group Type

Activated

Notification Type

Episode Type

Pre/Post Time

Trigger Condition

Parameters

Param. 1: Trigger Type x Neuro x Standard x x No x None x x Average Trend (20min) x x -10/+10 min x At Least One Param.

x HR(Pulse), ABP, CPP, BIS x x HR(Pulse) All ***/** Alarms

Param. 2: Trigger Type

Param. 3: Trigger Type x x x ABP x CPP

All **HIGH Alarms

All **LOW Alarms

** Mean LOW

Param. 4: Trigger Type x x BIS

Unique Monitor Settings

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP60 - MP90

C M

Group 3

Group Name

Group Type

Activated

Notification Type

Episode Type

Pre/Post Time

Trigger Condition

Parameters

Param. 1: Trigger Type x Hemo x Standard x x No x None x x Average Trend (20min) x x -10/+10 min x At Least One Param.

x HR(Pulse), SpO

2

, ABP, CVP x x HR(Pulse) All ***/** Alarms

Param. 2: Trigger Type x x SpO

2

All ***/** Alarms

128

Unique Monitor Settings

Param. 3: Trigger Type x x ABP

Param. 4: Trigger Type x x CVP

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

All **HIGH Alarms

All ** LOW Alarm

***/** All Mean

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP60 - MP90

C M

Group 4

Group Name

Group Type

Activated

Notification Type

Episode Type

Pre/Post Time

Trigger Condition

Parameters

Param. 1: Trigger Type

Param. 2: Trigger Type

Param. 3: Trigger Type x Ventil.

x Standard x x No x None x x HighResTrend (4min) x x -2/+2 min x At Least One Param.

x HR(Pulse), SpO

2

, Resp, etCO

2 x x HR(Pulse) *** EXTR TACHY x x SpO

2

*** EXTR BRADY

All ***/** Alarms x x Resp All ***/** Alarms

Param. 4: Trigger Type x x etCO

2

All ***/** Alarms

Factory Defaults

Item Name

Group 5

Group Name

Group Type

Activated

Notification Type

Episode Type

Pre/Post Time

Trigger Condition

Parameters

Oper.

Mode

MP60 - MP90

C M

x Arrhy/ST x Standard x x No x None x x RealtimeWaves (15sec) x x -5/+10 sec x At Least One Param.

x HR(Pulse), PVC, All ST Leads

129

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Param. 1: Trigger Type x x HR(Pulse)

Param. 2: Trigger Type x x PVC

Param. 3: Trigger Type x x All STLeads

Param. 4: Trigger Type x x

*** EXTR TACHY

*** EXTR BRADY

All ***/** Alarms

** HIGH

** LOW

Unique Monitor Settings

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP5 - MP90

C M

Group 6

Group Name

Group Type

Activated

1

Notification Type

Episode Type

Pre/PostTime

Trigger Condition

Parameters

Param. 1: Trigger Type

NER x NER x x Yes

None x x High Res.Trend (4 min) x x -2/+2 min

At Least One Param.

HR, SpO

2

, Resp x x HR *** EXTR BRADY

Param. 2: Trigger Type x x SpO

2

Param. 3: Trigger Type x x Resp

Param. 4: Trigger Type x x

*** DESAT

*** APNEA

1.As a factory default, group 6 is activated in monitors with option H20. In monitors with option H10, H30, or H40, group 6 is deactivated.

Event Settings Configuration Implications

Events are electronic records of episodes in the patients' condition. They can be used to drive alert notification to assist compliance to any protocol that is being used by the clinician.

Group Name

This setting lets you change the name of each event group, except of the Neonatal Event

Review (NER) group, which has fixed settings.

130

Unique Monitor Settings

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Group Type

This setting lets you change the type of event group from Standard to NER and vice versa. Selecting NER as Group Type for an event group, automatically changes all settings for this group to the predefined NER group settings. Only one event group can be assigned as the NER group. If there is already an NER event group, changing the Group Type for another group to NER, changes the Group

Type

of the exisiting NER group to Standard.

Activated

This setting defines whether an event group is currently active, that is it detects events according to its configuration. If the status is Deactivated event surveillance is effectively switched off.

With Advanced Event Surveillance (AES, Option #C07) up to six event groups may be active at any given time. With Basic Event Surveillance (BES, Option #C06) or with Neonatal Event Review (NER, Option

#C04) only one event group is available.

Notification Type

This setting is available in Advanced Event Surveillance only. It defines the type of notification that is issued when an event is detected. For each event group, the appropriate notification can be selected depending on the severity of condition.

• Set Notification Type to None to receive no notification at all. Any captured event will still be stored and can be reviewed in the Event Episode or Event Review window.

• Set it to Screen Prompt to get a status message with a prompt tone.

• Set it to * Alarm, ** Alarm, or *** Alarm to receive an alarm notification that will be independent from the alarm settings for each measurement. To prevent dual alarming, these options are only available if Trigger Condition is set to At Least Two Param. or higher. These event alarms are handled exactly like measurement alarms; they can be silenced and are also suspended when all alarms are suspended. You should only use alarm notification for events which are comparable in severity to standard measurement alarms to avoid potential confusion due to too many alarms.

** Alarm (PopUp), *** Alarm (PopUp): if you select ** Alarm (PopUp)or

*** Alarm (PopUp)

, the Event Episode window will automatically open on the Main Screen in addition to the normal alarm notifications when an event is detected.

Episode Type

This setting lets you define the level of detail captured in an event episode for up to four measurements. The higher the data resolution, the shorter the period that the monitor can store in its memory. The choices are:

Realtime Wave (15sec) - available in BES and AES (#C06, #C07)

HighRes Trend (4min) - available in AES (#C07) and NER (#C04)

Average Trend (20min) - available in BES and AES (#C06, #C07)

In addition to the wave or trend data, the following data is always stored with each event:

– Numeric vital signs for all (up to 1030) measurements monitored.

– Any alarm conditions active when the event episode was triggered.

– Annotations connected with the event.

Pre/Post Time

When an event occurs, information for a predefined duration is stored. This is the event episode. It includes information from a defined period before the trigger, called the event

Pre-time.

The episode time after the event is called the event Post-time. If a further event occurs during the event post-time it changes a single event to a combined event (combi-event). Manuallytriggered event episodes document patient information from the time leading up to the event trigger; they do not have a post-time. The following table lists the available choices for each Event Episode Type:

131

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Unique Monitor Settings

Event Episode Type

Average Trend

20 minutes, five samples per minute

HighRes Trend

Four minutes, four samples per second.

Pre-time

2 minutes

4 minutes

6 minutes

8 minutes

10 minutes

12 minutes

14 minutes

16 minutes

18 minutes

1 minute

2 minutes

3 minutes

5 seconds

10 seconds

Post-time

18 minutes

16 minutes

14 minutes

12 minutes

10 minutes

8 minutes

6 minutes

4 minutes

2 minutes

3 minutes

2 minutes

1 minute

10 seconds

5 seconds

Realtime Wave

15 seconds at 12.5 mm/s

Parameters

Up to four measurement parameters (three with BES and NER) can be included in each event group. For each parameter you can define two trigger conditions (one in BES and NER). If at least one of these conditions is met this parameter counts towards the number of events that can start an event capture.

The following categories of trigger conditions are available:

Patient alarms: this means that an event is triggered when either a specific patient alarm, such as

***EXTREME TACHY

, or all patient alarms of a set severity for a certain measurement occur. An example for this last type of condition would be All *** HR Alarms. No events of this kind are triggered if alarms are switched off. Changing alarm limits changes the event trigger definitions.

User-defined limit violations: allow you to define event triggers that are independent of alarm limits.

You must set a threshold value and a threshold time for the trigger. If you set the trigger threshold time to 10 seconds, the monitor triggers an event if the threshold is violated for more than 10 seconds.

Example: “HR higher than 120 bpm for 10sec (and longer)”

User-defined value deviations: If you set user-defined deviation triggers, you can define event triggers that are independent of specific limits and based instead on deviations from the current values. You must set a deviation and a period of time in which the deviation occurs. There are three types of deviation available: ANY deviation, UP deviation where only changes in a positive direction are detected and DOWN deviation where only changes in a negative direction are detected. The deviation can be defined either in relative terms as a percentage, for example 10%, or as an absolute value, such as 10 bpm. Examples:

– etCO

2

: UP Deviation of 300% within 5 minutes.

– RESP: ANY Deviation of 8 rpm within 5 minutes.

On-measurement triggers: this means that an event is triggered when an aperiodic measurement (such as NBP) or a procedure (such as Cardiac Output) is finished.

Trigger Condition

If more than one trigger is available for the measurements in the event group, the trigger condition may be At Least One Param., At Least Two Param., At Least

Three Par.

or All Four Parameter.

132

Unique Monitor Settings

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

• If the trigger is At Least One Param., the monitor starts an event capture if a trigger occurs in any of this event group’s measurements.

• If the trigger is At Least Three Par., the monitor captures events when three or more trigger thresholds from this event group’s measurements are violated.

• With Enhanced Condition you can not only select a minimum number of triggers to trigger an event, but define which specific measurement triggers these must be. For example, At Least Two

Param.

will cause an event to be captured if a trigger occurs in any two of this event group’s measurements - with Enhanced Condition you can select for example that only when triggers are in HR and SpO

2

an event will be captured.

Configuring Event Annotations

MP5-90 only

Unique Monitor Setting: Main Setup -> Event Surveill. -> Setup Events

-> Event Annotation

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP5 - MP90

C M

Annotations (Text / Group) Text

Annotation 1 x No Intervention

Annotation 2

Annotation 3 x x

Mild Stimulation

Moderate Stimulation

Annotation 4

Annotation 5

Annotation 6

Annotation 7 x x x x

Vigorous Stimulation

Awake

Sleeping

Gagging/Emesis

Annotation 8

Annotation 9

Annotation 10

Annotation 11

Annotation 12

Annotation 13

Annotation 14

Annotation 15

Annotation 16

Annotation 17

Annotation 18

Annotation 19

Annotation 20 x x x x x x x x x x x x x

Feeding

Stressful Procedure

Skin Color: Pink

Skin Color: Dusky

Skin Color: Cyanotic

Skin Color: Mottled

Skin Color: Jaundice

Annotation 15

Annotation 16

Annotation 17

Annotation 18

Annotation 19

Annotation 20

Group

All Groups

All Groups

All Groups

All Groups

Standard

Standard

Standard

Standard

Standard

NER

NER

NER

NER

NER

No Group

No Group

No Group

No Group

No Group

No Group

When you configure additional annotations, you can choose whether they appear with one particular

Event Group or with all Event Groups. No Group indicates that the annotation is not yet linked to appear with any Event Group.

133

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Unique Monitor Settings

Configuring ProtocolWatch

MP5-90 only

Unique Monitor Setting: Main Setup -> ProtocolWatch

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP5 - MP90

C M

CVP Threshold

1

CVP Thresh. Unit

1

Protocol

1

StartUp Time

Shift Duration x

AutoScreenChange x

Standby Time

Drotrecogin Alfa

LowDose Steroids x x x x x

100 mmHg mmHg x x Off x 0 min

8 hours

Yes

7 days

Yes

Yes

1.Settings is a normal monitor setting, not a unique monitor setting.

ProtocolWatch Application Configuration Implications

ProtocolWatch (PW) is a clinical decision support tool. It allows you to run a clinical protocol which can monitor developments in the patient’s condition. ProtocolWatch notifies you when certain conditions or combinations of conditions occur and it documents developments in a log which can be printed. For detailed information on how to use this application, see the monitor’s Instructions for Use.

CVP Threshold

This setting is a normal monitor setting. It lets you define the maximum CVP value the monitor will automatically enter into a protocol when CVP is continuously measured. Use this setting to prevent false high CVP values from being entered into a protocol when the CVP is continuously measured.

CVP Thresh. Unit

This setting is a normal monitor setting. It lets you change the unit used for the

CVP Threshold

.

Protocol

This setting is a nomal monitor setting. It lets you preselect the protocol you want to run.

Selecting the Protocol also determines which protocol-specific configuration settings are displayed (see below) and can be configured. At this point, only the SSC Sepsis protocol is available. If you select

Off

, no protocol will be preselected. Note that Protocol can always be changed by the clinician during monitoring.

SSC Sepsis Protocol Configuration Implications

The following settings are only available when Protocol is set to SSC Sepsis.

StartUp Time

If the SSC Sepsis protocol is active, and the patient category is Adult, and the monitor detects a valid HR or Pulse for the duration of the configured StartUp Time, the monitor automatically enters the Severe Sepsis Screening phase. If StartUp Time is set to 0 min, the screening will start between about 3 minutes after the monitor detects a valid Pulse or HR.

134

Unique Monitor Settings

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Shift Duration

This setting lets you adjust the frequency of ProtocolWatch tasks that should be conducted once per shift to the units shift duration. Choices are 8 hrs or 12 hrs.

AutoScreenChange

Set this to Yes, if you want the monitor to prompt you to change the active

Screen to the Sepsis Screen when entering the Sepsis Resuscitation and Sepsis Management phase.

Standby Time

After completion of the Sepsis Management phase, a sepsis standby phase begins which allows time for further patient stabilization and recovery. During this phase Severe Sepsis Screening is suspended. Standby Time lets you adjust the length of the standby phase between 1 and 7 days.

Drotrecogin Alfa

Set this to Yes if you want the recommendation for Drotrecogin Alfa to appear during the SSC Sepsis Management phase.

LowDose Steroids

Set this to Yes if you want the recommendation for Low Dose Steroids to appear during the SSC Sepsis Management phase.

Configuring Recordings

Unique Monitor Setting: Main Setup -> Recordings

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP20 - MP90

MP5 (H30)

C M

General

Central Config

ECG Gain

Delayed Recording

x x No x x 10 mm/mV

Recording Name x

Recorder x

Recordng x Local

Channel 1

Channel 2

Channel 3

Channel 4

1 x x x x x Primary Lead x ABP x Blank x Blank

Overlap

Speed

Delay Time

Run Time x x Off x x 25 mm/s x x

15 sec

20 sec

Alarm Recording

Recorder

Channel 1

Channel 2

Channel 3

Overlap

Speed x x Local x x Primary Lead x x Alarm Par x x Blank x x Off x x 25 mm/s

MP20 (M20/M21)

MP5 (H10/20/40)

MP5T

MP2/X2

Central 2-Ch

Central 2-Ch

135

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP20 - MP90

MP5 (H30)

C M

Delay Time

Run Time x x

15 sec

20 sec

Realtime A

Recording Name x

Recorder x

Recordng x Local

Channel 1

Channel 2 x x x Primary Lead x ABP

Channel 3

Channel 4

Overlap

Speed

Run Time

1 x x Blank x x Blank x x Off x x 25 mm/s x Continuous

Realtime B

Recording Name x

Recorder

Channel 1

Recordng x x Local x x Primary Lead

Channel 2

Channel 3

Channel 4

1

Overlap

Speed

Run Time

Realtime C

2

x x ABP x x Pleth x x Blank x x Channel 2+3 x x 25 mm/s x Continuous

Recording Name x

Recorder

Channel 1

Recordng x x Local x x Primary Lead

Channel 2

Channel 3

Channel 4

1

Overlap

Speed

Run Time x x ABP x x Pleth x x x x Channel 1+2+3 x x 25 mm/s x Continuous

MP20 (M20/M21)

MP5 (H10/20/40)

MP5T

Blank

Unique Monitor Settings

MP2/X2

Central 2-Ch

ABP

Central 2-Ch

Off not applicable, MP20/30, MP5, MP5T, and MP2/X2 do not support Realtime C recordings.

136

Unique Monitor Settings

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP20 - MP90

MP5 (H30)

C M

HiResTrend

3

Recording Name x

Recorder x

Recordng x Local

Channel 1

Channel 2 x x x btbHR x SpO2

Channel 3

Overlap

Speed

Delay Time

Run Time x x x x x x Resp x Off x 2 cm/min

6 min

Continuous

MP20 (M20/M21)

MP5 (H10/20/40)

MP5T

MP2/X2

not applicable, the

MP2/X2 does not support HiRes

Trend recordings.

1.Setting only available if a four-channel recorder is available and selected.

2.Realtime C recordings not available on MP2, MP5, and MP20/30 monitors.

3.HiRes Trend recordings not available on MP2 monitors.

For information on configuring Vital Signs Recordings, see “Configuring Vital Signs Recording” on page 95.

Recordings Configuration Implications

ECG Gain

This defines how every recorded ECG wave, irrespective of template or recording type, will appear on the recorder strip. This does not affect the displayed ECG wave, or printed ECG reports. Set

ECG Gain

to Auto to use the same scale as the ECG wave on the monitor screen.

Central Config

This setting defines for a central recording whether the layout of the recording

(waves, speed, overlap, etc.) is defined by the bedside or the Information Center.

Select No to use the layout defined in the monitor, select Yes to use the layout defined in the Information

Center.

When a telemetry device is paired with a bedside monitor, the ECG waveforms available at the

Information Center are provided by the telemetry device. If the recorder is set to Central, and

Central Config

is set to Yes, the waveforms recorded will be the telemetry ECG waveforms, Pleth from telemetry if available and then any other waveforms from the bedside (except ECG). If the recorder is set to Central, and Central Config is set to No, the bedside monitor will send the request for the recording based on its configuration. If none of the waves are available at the Information Center, it will record the waves based on the layout defined in the Information Center. For example, if the requested recording is configured to be Primary ECG (bedside ECG) and ABP and there is no ABP waveform available, the recording will be the paired telemetry ECG waveforms.

137

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Unique Monitor Settings

Recorder

choose which recorder the recording will print to. Choices are Local, Central 2-Ch.,

Central 4-Ch.

If you configure a Local recorder, and no local recorder is available, the monitor will automatically send the recording to a central recorder, if available.

For alarm recordings the additional choice Printer is available. If you select Printer, all other settings disappear and the alarm recording will be printed as a realtime report, following the settings

configured for Realtime Reports, see "Configuring Reports" on page 101. You can use this choice if you

need to generate Alarm Recordings on monitors that have no local recorder, such as the MP2 or X2, especially in circumstances when the monitor has no connection to a central recorder, for example during transport.

Channel 1 - 4

defines which waveform to record in each channel. Channel 4 will only be available when the Central 4-Ch recorder has been selected. If the wave assigned to a recording channel in a particular template is not available when a recording is triggered, the channel is left blank on the recording strip. The pop-up list of available (currently monitored) waves differs according to the recording type:

– Realtime, delayed and alarm recordings: the list shows all the currently available waves.

– High-resolution recordings: the list shows all the available high-resolution waves

In addition to the currently available waves, you can choose from several other settings which make an automatic allocation when the recording starts:

Alarm Par will always record the measurement in alarm in the chosen recorder channel

Primary Lead will always record the current primary lead in the chosen recorder channel

Secondary Lead will always record the current secondary lead in the chosen recorder channel

Agent will always record the currently selected anesthetic agent.

For high-resolution recordings only the Agent setting is available.

Overlap

defines whether the recorded waveforms will be printed overlapping or beside each other.

Speed

lets you define the recording print speed.

Delay Time

Some recordings start documenting on the recorder strip from a pre-set time before the recording is started. This interval is called the “Delay Time” and can be set to 10 or 15 seconds for

Delayed and Alarm recordings and to 1 - 6 minutes for HiResTrnd recordings.

Runtime

defines how long this type of recording is configured to run. Continuous recordings run indefinitely.

138

Unique Monitor Settings

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Configuring Timers

MP5-90 only

Unique Monitor Setting: Main Setup -> Timers -> Setup <Timer Label>

Factory Defaults

#

Item Name

1 Label

Run Time

Type

Direction

Notification

Auto Window

Color

Timer Volume

2 Label

Run Time

Type

Direction

Notification

Auto Window

Color

Timer Volume

3 Label

Run Time

Type

Direction

Notification

Auto Window

Color

Timer Volume

4 Label

Run Time

Type

Direction

Notification

Auto Window

Color

Timer Volume

Oper.

Mode

MP5 - MP90

C M

x x Timer A x x 1 min x Basic x x Up x x

No Sound

No x White x

x not applicable, this setting is stored as a monitor setting, see "Configuring

User Interface Settings" on page 110.

x x Timer B x x 5 min x Basic x x Down x No Sound x x

No

White x

x not applicable, this setting is stored as a monitor setting, see "Configuring

User Interface Settings" on page 110.

x x Timer C x x 10 min x Basic x x Up x x

No Sound

No x White x

x not applicable, this setting is stored as a monitor setting, see "Configuring

User Interface Settings" on page 110.

x x Timer D x x 15 min x Basic x x Down x No Sound x x

No

White x

x not applicable, this setting is stored as a monitor setting, see "Configuring

User Interface Settings" on page 110.

139

5 Label

Run Time

Type

Direction

Notification

Auto Window

Color

Timer Volume

6 Label

Run Time

Type

Direction

Notification

Auto Window

Color

Timer Volume

7 Label

Type

Color

Timer Volume

8 Label

Type

Color

Timer Volume

9 Label

Run Time

Type

Direction

Notification

Auto Window

Color

Timer Volume

10 Label

Run Time

Type

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Factory Defaults

#

Item Name

Unique Monitor Settings

Oper.

Mode

MP5 - MP90

C M

x x Bypass x x 30 min x Basic x x Down x x

No Sound

No x White x

x not applicable, this setting is stored as a monitor setting, see "Configuring

User Interface Settings" on page 110.

x x Clamp x x 10 min x Basic x x Down x No Sound x x

No

White x

x not applicable, this setting is stored as a monitor setting, see "Configuring

User Interface Settings" on page 110.

x x Code x No Limit x White x

x not applicable, this setting is stored as a monitor setting, see "Configuring

User Interface Settings" on page 110.

x x Case x x

No Limit

White x

x not applicable, this setting is stored as a monitor setting, see "Configuring

User Interface Settings" on page 110.

x x Docu x x 60 min x Cyclic x x Up x x

No Sound

No x White x

x not applicable, this setting is stored as a monitor setting, see "Configuring

User Interface Settings" on page 110.

x x Tournq (Tourniquet) x x 2 hours x Basic

140

Unique Monitor Settings

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Direction

Notification

Auto Window

Color

Timer Volume

11 Label

Run Time

Type

Direction

Notification

Auto Window

Color

Timer Volume

12 Label

Run Time

Type

Direction

Notification

Auto Window

Color

Timer Volume

13 Label

Run Time

Type

Direction

Notification

Auto Window

Color

Timer Volume

Factory Defaults

#

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP5 - MP90

C M

x x x x Down x No Sound

No

White x

x not applicable, this setting is stored as a monitor setting, see "Configuring

User Interface Settings" on page 110.

x x Infus x x 30 min x Basic x x Down x x

No Sound

No x White x

x not applicable, this setting is stored as a monitor setting, see "Configuring

User Interface Settings" on page 110.

x x PreOxy (Preoxygenation) x x 5 min x Basic x x Down x No Sound x x

No

White x

x not applicable, this setting is stored as a monitor setting, see "Configuring

User Interface Settings" on page 110.

x x NST (Non-Stress Test) x x 20 min x Basic x x Up x x

Sound

No x Blue x

x not applicable, this setting is stored as a monitor setting, see "Configuring

User Interface Settings" on page 110.

Timer Configuration Implications

Timer Label

When you assign a label to a timer, the monitor automatically applies the settings preconfigured for this label to the timer. You can then change these settings. The timer label itself cannot be customized.

141

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Unique Monitor Settings

The IntelliVue MP60/70/80/90 can run a maximum of four timers at the same time (MP40/50: three timers, MP20/30: two timers, MP5: one timer). The selection and priority of the timers can be configured

in the Timers window. For details, see "Configuring Timer Selection and Order" on page 160.

Run Time

The run time can be set between 1 minute and 96 hours. No Limit timers have no run time. This setting can also be changed in monitoring mode.

Type

This setting defines the timer type. It can also be changed in monitoring mode. The following timer types are available:

• A Basic timer has a single, defined run time. The progress is shown in the progress bar.

• An Enhanced timer is like a Basic timer, but the progress bar shows progress beyond the end of the run time.

• A Cyclic timer is like a Basic timer but restarts automatically when the run time is expired.

• A No Limit timer has no run time or progress bar and shows the time elapsed since the timer was started.

Direction

Timers can count up or down, showing elapsed time or remaining time. No Limit timers automatically count up. This setting can be also changed in monitoring mode.

Notification

When any timer expires (except a No Limit timer), its color changes to red and a message appears in the monitor status line on the Main Screen. The setting Notification lets you configure an alarm or a single tone as additional means of notification:

• Select Alarm to receive an INOP alarm when the timer expires.

• Select Sound to hear a single tone when the timer expires.

• Select No Sound for no additional notification.

Auto Window

This setting lets you configure whether a window automatically pops up when the timer expires. Choice are Yes or No.

Color

lets you configure the color for a timer. This setting only has an effect on timers that are displayed on the Main Screen (i.e. timers that are embedded on a Screen). The timers displayed in the Timers window are always shown in gray color.

Timer Volume

This setting is stored as a normal Monitor setting, see "Configuring User Interface

Settings" on page 110.

Configuring Timer Selection and Order

The selection and order of timers as they appear in the Timers menu are stored as Global settings, see

"Configuring Timer Selection and Order" on page 160.

142

Unique Monitor Settings

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Configuring User Interface Settings - Keys

Global SmartKeys

Unique Monitor Setting: Main Setup -> User Interface

Factory Defaults

Item Name

Global SmartKeys

Oper.

Mode

MP20 - MP90

C M

x Start/Stop (NBP)

Stop All (NBP)

Repeat Time (NBP)

Zero Press

RT Record

Delayed Record

Standby

Wedge

C.O. / CCO

Calcs

VeniPuncture

Adjust Size

Annot. Arrhy

RelearnArrhy

Vitals Trend

Graph Trend

Event Summary

Remote Applics

External Device

PrintReports

End Case

AlarmLimits

Alarm Volume

QRS Volume

Brightness

MP20 (M20/M21)

MP5

MP5T

<none>

<none>

<none>

<none>

<none>

<none>

<none>

<none>

<none>

<none>

<none>

<none>

<none>

<none>

<none>

<none>

<none>

<none>

Start/Stop (NBP)

Repeat Time (NBP)

Delayed Record

Vitals Trend

Default Profile

End Case

<none>

MP2/X2

Start/Stop (NBP)

Measmt. Select.

Admit/Dischrge

AlarmLimits

Vitals Trend

Profiles

Alarm Volume

QRS Volume

Monitor Standby

Stop All (NBP)

NBP STAT

VeniPuncture (NBP)

Repeat Time (NBP)

Zero Press

Adjust Size

Brightness

Graph Trend

Main Setup

<none>

<none>

<none>

<none>

<none>

<none>

<none>

Global SmartKeys Configuration Implications

Global SmartKeys.

This lets you define the selection and sequence of the global SmartKeys.

Global SmartKeys become effective (visible) when you activate a Screen that has no SmartKeys defined on it.

143

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Unique Monitor Settings

The number of SmartKeys visible at a time depends on the monitor’s display resolution and the resolution of the Screen:

SVGA: 6

XGA: 7

SXGA: 9

WXGA: 9

WXGA+: 10

WSXGA: 11

Changing the Selection and Sequence of Global SmartKeys

To change the selection of the Global SmartKeys,

1

2

Select Main Setup -> User Interface -> Global SmartKeys.

From the pop-up key line, select Add to open the Choices menu that contains all available

SmartKeys.

3

From the Choices menu, select the desired SmartKey. This adds the new key to the bottom of the list of configured SmartKeys (on the left).

To delete a SmartKey from the list of configured SmartKeys,

♦ select it in the list, then select the pop-up key Delete.

To move a SmartKey to a different position,

♦ use the Sort Up and Sort Down pop-up keys.

Function Keys

MP20-90 only

Unique Monitor Setting: Main Setup -> User Interface

Factory Defaults

Item Name

Oper. 1 Fn. Keys

Oper.

Mode

MP20 - MP90

C M

x

F4

F5

F6

F7

F1

F2

F3

F8

F9

F10

F11

F12

<none>

<none>

<none>

<none>

<none>

<none>

<none>

<none>

<none>

<none>

<none>

<none>

144

Unique Monitor Settings

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Factory Defaults

Item Name

Oper. 2 Fn. Keys

1

Oper.

Mode

MP20 - MP90

C M

x

F4

F5

F6

F7

F8

F1

F2

F3

F9

F10

F11

F12

1.Setting only available on MP90s with more than one CPU.

<none>

<none>

<none>

<none>

<none>

<none>

<none>

<none>

<none>

<none>

<none>

<none>

Function Key Configuration Implications

Be aware that after upgrading a monitor from any software revision prior to E.0, no functions will be assigned to the function keys.

Oper. 1 Fn. Keys.

This setting lets you assign specific SmartKey functions to the 5 function keys

(F1 - F5) on a connected Remote SpeedPoint and the 12 function keys (F1 - F12) on an attached PS/2 keyboard.

Oper. 2 Fn Keys.

This setting is only available for MP90 monitors with more than one CPU board. If you have configured the MP90 for two operators, this setting lets you assign specific SmartKey functions to the 5 function keys (F1 - F5) on the Remote SpeedPoint assigned to Operator 2, and the 12 function keys (F1 - F12) on a PS/2 keyboard assigned to Operator 2.

Configuring CSA Buffers

MP40-90 only

Unique Monitor Setting: Main Setup -> Measurements -> EEG

Factory Defaults

Item Name

Buffer A

Buffer B

Buffer C

Oper.

Mode

MP40 - MP90

C M

x x x

2 sec

30 sec

120 sec

145

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Unique Monitor Settings

CSA Buffer Configuration Implications

These CSA buffer settings apply for CSAs viewed on screen and for CSA reports.

Buffer A / Buffer B / Buffer C

A buffer defines the interval between the spectral lines displayed in the CSA. The smaller the interval, the more often the CSA is updated, and the shorter the time span covered by the CSA display. Buffer A, Buffer B, and Buffer C give you three preconfigured choices which are then available for configuration of the CSA window and CSA reports.

Configuring the Drug Calculator

Unique Monitor Setting

Configuration of the drug calculator cannot be done in the monitor’s configuration mode, it can only be done with the Support Tool. When the Drug Calculator is delivered from the factory, the only drug in the

Drug Calculator drug list is the generic drug “Any Drug”.

Philips does not accept responsibility for any drug configuration created using the Support Tool. Before the drug list is used on a patient monitor, a signed copy of it must be approved by a hospital representative.

Up to 75 drugs (including the generic drug ANY DRUG) can be configured for all three patient categories.

Configuration includes

• Amount and Volume

• Dose

• Rate

• Units

• Minimum/maximum ranges and start values

• Titration Table settings, such as Dose and Rate increments

• Whether the Rule of 6 may be used weight-based drugs in the neonatal and pediatric patient category.

WARNING

When you clone a configuration to a monitor, the associated drug list is automatically cloned with the configuration. Therefore, before cloning a configuration to a monitor, you must always check

• whether there is a drug list in the configuration

• whether this configuration is correct for the hospital unit you are working in

• that you have a Drug Calculator Offline Configuration Report on file, signed by a hospital representative, with the same CRC number as the drug list in the configuration.

For detailed information on configuring the drug calculator, see the chapter “Using the Drug Calculator

Configuration Editor” in the Support Tool Instructions for Use.

146

Global Settings

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Global Settings

This section lists all global settings. Just like unique monitor settings (see "Understanding Monitor

Settings" on page 84), global settings are set once per monitor and are independent of the Profiles and

Settings Blocks. The difference is that any changes you may configure are automatically stored, there is no need to save them.

Read any information on Configuration Implications at the end of the sections before you make any configuration changes.

Configuring General Global Settings

Global Setting: Main Setup -> Global Settings

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP20 - MP90

(H10/20/40)

MP20 -

MP90 (H30)

MP5

(H30)

MP5

(H10/20/40)

MP5T MP2 / X2

Default Profile

Altitude (m)

Line Frequency

1

QRS Type

ECG Cable Color

1

Asystole Detect.

Pat. Sel. Default

MMS Sett. Upload x

MMS Trend Upload x x x x x x x

MMS PW Sync

AskUser Reminder

QuickAdmit Field x

QuickAdmitDischg x

Height Unit

1

Weight Unit

1

x x

Automat. Default

Ask For New Pat

Demograph. Fields

Tele Discharge

2 x x x x x

TransportProfile

Remote Controls

Silence Key

Arrhy Text x

ConfirmAlarmsOff x x x

C M

x x

No

No

No

Off

The factory default Profile depends on the monitor model and H option. See the section

Configuration Overview starting on page 194.

0

60Hz

QRS Tone

AAMI

Standard

Cont Monitor Ask User

Yes

Yes

Yes not applicable, settings are not available for MP2/X2 and MP5.

MRN

Ask User in lb kg kg

lb

Yes

See "Configuring Ask for New Patient Settings" on page 157

See "Configuring Demographic Fields Settings" on page 158

not applicable, setting is not available for MP20-90

Off

As Is not applicable, this setting is not available for MP20-90

Enabled not applicable Checkmark (MP60-90 only)

* Alarm

No

OnDisc onnect

Off

147

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Global Settings

Factory Defaults

Item Name

Power Loss Sound

Label Set

LAN Data Export

TeleUnassign

3

TAAP

2.

Oper.

Mode

MP20 - MP90

(H10/20/40)

MP20 -

MP90 (H30)

MP5

(H30)

x x x

C M

x x not applicable, setting is not available for MP2-90

Enabled

Restricted

All not applicable, setting is not available for MP20-90

1 min not applicable, setting is not available for MP20-90

Enabled x

MP5

(H10/20/40)

See "Configuring Remote Display Settings" on page 159

MP5T MP2 / X2

not applicable

MP2: Enabled

X2: Disabled

Remote Display

1.For new monitors shipped from the factory, the defaults for these settings are set for the country to which the monitor is shipped,

see "Configuring Country-Specific Settings" on page 164.

2.Setting only available for monitors that have a telemetry device (TAAP) connector or a short range radio interface installed.

3.Setting only available for monitors that have a short range radio interface installed.

General Global Settings Configuration Implications

Default Profile

To set the default Profile, select Profiles in the Monitor Info Line, select Profile in the Profiles window, then select the Profile you want to set as default Profile from the pop-up list. Select the Set Default softkey. This change takes effect immediately and you do not need to save it. Use the

table in the section "Profile Settings" on page 28 to document the default Profile.

Altitude

Some measurements use the configured altitude setting to derive a typical ambient pressure which is used in the calculation of partial pressure values. To ensure correct measurement values, the altitude setting must be correctly set.

Line Frequency

Use the Line Frequency setting to configure the correct line frequency for the

AC Power, either 50 Hz or 60 Hz. If the Line Frequency is incorrectly set, this may affect the ECG signal quality.

QRS Type

Select QRS Tone or QRS Tick. If Tone Modulation is set to Yes, the QRS Type automatically switches to QRS Tone. For both types, the frequency and rhythm information is derived from either the ECG or Pulse, depending on which is currently selected as the alarm source.

ECG Cable Color

This setting determines the labels the monitor uses when it refers to individual

ECG electrodes, such as in a LEAD Off INOP message that will be issued when an individual ECG electrode has fallen off. If ECG Cable Color is set to AAMI, the monitor uses the labels RA, LA, LL,

RL

, V, and V1 through V6. If set to IEC, it uses RA, LA, LL, RL, and C1 through C6.

Asystole Detect.

Set Asystole Detect. to Enhanced to improve alarming on asystole under certain conditions. In enhanced mode, an asystole alarm will be suppressed for up to nine seconds (=

Asystole Threshold + 5 sec.) if a valid beat-to-beat Pulse is detected from an active pulsatile invasive

Pressure measurement.

148

Global Settings

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Pat.Sel.Default

This setting defines how the monitor behaves when there is a patient identification mismatch between the MMS and the monitor. If you set this to Cont Monitor or

Continue MMS

, the monitor resolves the mismatch automatically. To require user confirmation before the mismatch is resolved, set this to Ask User. For more detail, please refer to the monitor’s Instructions for Use.

AskUser Reminder

This setting lets you specify a time after which the clinician will be reminded of an unresolved patient identification mismatch. If the user ignores a patient identification mismatch by closing the Patient Selection window, the monitor will automatically pop up the Patient Selection window on the Main Screen after the configured time (5min, 10min, 15min, or 30min). To disable this behavior, set AskUser Reminder to Off.

MMS Sett.Upload

If set to Yes, the active settings from the MMS measurements will be uploaded to the monitor when you connect an MMS to a monitor and one of the following conditions applies:

• the patient in the MMS and the patient in the monitor are the same, i.e. no patient identification mismatch occurs.

• the patient in the MMS and the patient in the monitor are different, and Pat.Sel.Default is configured to Continue MMS.

• the patient in the MMS and the patient in the monitor are different, and Pat.Sel.Default is configured to Ask User, and the clinician resolves the patient identification mismatch by selecting

Same Patient

or Cont MMS.

Note: if Pat.Sel.Default is set to Cont Monitor, MMS Sett.Upload is automatically set to No and cannot be changed.

MMS Trend Upload

If set to Yes, the trend data from the MMS measurements will be uploaded to the monitor when you connect an MMS to a monitor and one of the following conditions applies:

• the patient in the MMS and the patient in the monitor are the same, i.e. no patient identification mismatch occurs.

• the patient in the MMS and the patient in the monitor are different, and Pat.Sel.Default is configured to Continue MMS.

• the patient in the MMS and the patient in the monitor are different, and Pat.Sel.Default is configured to Ask User, and the clinician resolves the patient identification mismatch by selecting

Same Patient

or Cont MMS.

Note: iff Pat.Sel.Default is set to Cont Monitor, MMS Trend Upload is automatically set to No and cannot be changed.

MMS PW Sync

If set to Yes, the ProtocolWatch information stored in the MMS (PW data, PW state,

PW logs and active protocol) will be uploaded to the monitor when you connect an MMS to a monitor and one of the following conditions applies:

• the patient in the MMS and the patient in the monitor are the same, i.e. no patient identification mismatch occurs.

• the patient in the MMS and the patient in the monitor are different, and Pat.Sel.Default is configured to Continue MMS.

• the patient in the MMS and the patient in the monitor are different, and Pat.Sel.Default is configured to Ask User, and the clinician resolves the patient identification mismatch by selecting

Same Patient

or Cont MMS.

149

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Global Settings

Note: if Pat.Sel.Default is set to Cont Monitor, MMS PW Sync is automatically set to No and cannot be changed.

N O T E

It is not possible to transfer SSC Sepsis Protocol data from a monitor with release F.0 software to another monitor with release G.0 software (or higher) and vice versa.

QuickAdmit Field

This setting defines which data field is used when performing a Quick Admit procedure. Choices are MRN and Last Name. If you are using a barcode reader to enter the Quick

Admit data, make sure that the setting made here corresponds to the information provided by the barcode.

If Quick Admit Field is set to MRN, and the monitor is connected to an Information Center, the monitor enters “---” into the Last Name field to enable admission at the Information Center.

QuickAdmitDischg

When a Quick Admit is initiated, the monitor compares the information entered into the Quick Admit Field (see above) with the information that is currently stored for that field.

If the information is different, the monitor optionally discharges the previous patient, depending on how the QuickAdmitDischg setting is configured:

– If set to Ask User, the monitor asks the user whether they want to discharge the previous patient.

– If set to Yes, the monitor automatically discharges the previous patient.

– If set to No, the monitor overwrites the data in the Quick Admit Field with the new data, but does not discharge the patient.

Tele Discharge

This setting is only available in monitors with a telemetry device (TAAP) connector or a short range radio interface. It determines the automatic discharge behavior of the monitor only when it is used in a mode where it:

– has no connection to a host monitor (companion mode),

– has no connection to an Information Center, and

– a telemetry transceiver is directly connected via cable or short range radio link to the monitor.

The available configuration choices are:

OnDisconnect The monitor automatically discharges the patient from the monitor when the telemetry transceiver is disconnected or unassigned from the monitor.

Be aware that if you then measure NBP or Pred. Temp with the monitor before you connect a new transceiver, only the measurement readings with the latest timestamp will be uploaded to the

Information Center when you connect the new transceiver.

OnDevChange The monitor automatically discharges the patient from the monitor when a different

transceiver is connected or assigned to the monitor. The transceivers are distinguished by their telemetry labels. If you connect the transceiver to the monitor via a short range radio link, assigning a different transceiver automatically unassigns the previous transceiver.

With Tele Discharge configured to OnDevChange, be aware of the following: if you want to measure NBP or Pred. Temp for a patient and want to upload this data via the transceiver to the

Information Center, always connect the transceiver to the monitor before you make the measurements, otherwise the measurement data will be erased by the discharge when you connect the new transceiver.

Off This setting is not recommended if you want to use the monitor for spot-checking. With Tele

Discharge

set to Off, the monitor does not perform an automatic discharge.

If you disconnect a transceiver and then measure NBP or Pred. Temp with the monitor, the latest measurement readings will be uploaded to the Information Center when you connect a new transceiver.

150

Global Settings

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Height Unit

/ Weight Unit define the unit used when entering the height / weight of the patient.

Choices are in or cm for height and lb or kg for weight. Be aware that these settings can be overwritten by the Region settings applied during an Upgrade or Cloning procedure with the IntelliVue Support Tool.

Automat. Default

– If Automat. Default is set to Yes, and the monitor is switched off for more than one minute, the default Profile is reloaded in the monitor. Any unstored changes made to the Settings Blocks and

Profiles are lost.

– If Automat. Default is set to No, and the monitor is switched off for more than one minute, the active settings from the most recent session are retained. Automatic Default does not affect the monitor behavior when you discharge a patient. After discharge, the default Profile is always restored.

If the monitor is switched off and then on again in less than one minute, all active settings are retained, irrespective of the Automat. Default setting.

TransportProfile

(MP5, X2 only) This setting is only available on monitors that can be connected to a host monitor and work in companion mode. It defines which settings become active in the monitor when the monitor is disconnected from the host monitor, for example to be used in a transport situation.

– If set to As Is, the active settings from the host monitor are used, no user interaction is required.

– If set to Def. Profile, settings are reset to the default profile defined in the monitor. The user needs to confirm this action.

– If set to Ask User, the monitor will prompt the user to select a profile from the list of configured profiles.

Remote Controls

Some functions of the IntelliVue bedside monitor, such as silencing alarms,

Starting/Stopping NBP measurements, arrhythmia settings, and HR alarm limits can be remotely controlled from an Information Center. For a complete list of functions that can be remotely controlled, please refer to your Information Center Instructions for Use. Set Remote Controls to Disabled if you do not want to allow users to control these functions from the Information Center.

For remote controls to work, they must be Enabled at the monitor and at the Information Center. If you disable them at the bedside monitor, the user at the Information Center may not be notified of this change. The controls at the Information Center may appear to work, but they will not change anything at the monitor.

Silence Key

This setting is applicable for the MP60/MP70 and MP90 only. It lets you change the symbol shown on the Silence SmartKey. The Silence hardkey on early versions of the IntelliVue patient monitor and on the Remote SpeedPoint is labelled with a loudspeaker. If your equipment is labelled with the loudspeaker, you might want to set this to “Loudspeaker”.

Arrhy Text

This setting defines whether short arrhythmia alarm messages are displayed as one star (*) or two star (**) alarms. If you are using an IntelliVue Information Center you might want to set this to one star (*) for consistency.

ConfirmAlarmsOff

This setting determines whether pausing alarms or switching alarms off has to be confirmed by the user before it becomes effective. If ConfirmAlarmsOff is configured to Yes, a pop-up key line will appear asking to confirm that alarms should be paused (or switched off).

151

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Global Settings

Power Loss Sound

(MP5 only) Lets you defines whether the power loss sound in the MP5 is

Enabled

or Disabled. If Enabled, a sound will be generated whenever the main power is lost or the power cord is disconnected while the monitor is running.

Label Set

The Full label set provides extra labels for Pressure and Temp.

• The Restricted label set offers the following labels:

– Pressure: P, ABP, ART, Ao, PAP, CVP, RAP, LAP, ICP, UAP, UVP

– Temp: Temp, Trect, Tcore, Tskin, Tesoph, Tnaso, Tart, Tven

• The Full label set offers the following additional labels:

– Pressure: FAP, BAP, IC1, IC2, P1, P2, P3, P4

– Temp: Tvesic, Ttymp, Tcereb, Tamb, T1, T2, T3, T4

Note: If you connect an MMS or FMS from a monitor using the Full label set to an IntelliVue monitor using a Restricted label set or an M3/M4 monitor, any additional labels switch to labels available in the target monitor. This may cause a label conflict with other monitored measurements. If you connect a monitor using the Full label set to an Information Center with certain software revisions, this may affect the availability of measurement information from the additional labels on the Information Center. See the

Information Center documentation for information on label set compatibility.

LAN Data Export

If the network (LAN) interface is not used for a connection to an Information

Center, it can be used for MIB data export. If the monitor is connected to an Information Center, the

MIB data export is automatically disabled for the LAN interface (the serial interface can still be used).

The setting LAN Data Export lets you configure how much of the MIB data export information is sent via the LAN interface:

All: full functionality, all available MIB data export information is sent.

Anonymous: restricted functionality, no patient demographics information is included.

Off: MIB data export is disabled for the LAN interface.

TAAP

This setting is only available in monitors that have either a telemetry device (TAAP) connector or a short range radio interface installed. It determines whether the monitor supports connecting a telemetry device directly with a cable (TAAP connection), or assigning a telemetry device to the monitor via a direct short range radio link (wireless TAAP connection).

Set TAAP to Enabled if you want the monitor to support a TAAP or WTAAP connection.

Set TAAP to Disabled, if you want to disable the monitors’s capability to support a TAAP/WTAAP connection. TAAP must be configured to Disabled, if you want to use the monitor as a companion to a host monitor (MP20-90).

For more detailed information on configuring the IntelliVue monitor for use in a telemetry environment,

refer to the section "Configuring for Different Telemetry Use Models" on page 153.

TeleUnassign

This setting is only available in monitors that have a short range radio interface installed. It determines whether the monitor will automatically break the assignment to a telemetry device connected via a short range radio connection under certain circumstances.

• If configured to 1 min, the monitor will automatically unassign a telemetry device from the monitor when the monitor

– is switched off for longer than 1 minute, or

– is placed in Standby mode for longer than 1 minute while having no connection to the IntelliVue

Information Center and the telemetry device.

152

Global Settings

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

• If configured to Never, the monitor will not automatically break the assignment.

Configuring for Different Telemetry Use Models

Five different variations requiring different configurations are possible:

1. Tele Transceiver Paired with a Networked Monitor - No Direct Connection

This use model involves pairing a telemetry transceiver to an IntelliVue bedside monitor which is connected to an IntelliVue Information Center. In this use model, no direct connection between the telemetry transceiver and the monitor occurs.

Results:

• Data from the telemetry transceiver is displayed at the Information Center in the same patient sector as the monitor data.

• Data from the telemetry transceiver is displayed (with a delay) on the bedside monitor in the Telemetry

Data window.

Restrictions:

• When paired to a telemetry transceiver, the monitor cannot be connected to the IntelliVue Information

Center via 1.4/2.4 Smart Hopping Wireless Solution (IntelliVue Telemetry System, ITS).

Configuration:

Required Configuration on Monitor

Set ’TAAP’ to

1

not important, can be set to

Enabled or Disabled

Yes

Assign Equipment Label

Required Hardware on Monitor

SRR Interface or TAAP Connector

IIT

2

Interface

1

1

not important not important

Required Configuration at Information Center

Declare monitor as

Monitor

1.

Applicable for MP2/X2/MP5 only.

2.IntelliVue Instrument Telemetry

2. Tele Transceiver Paired with a Networked MP2/X2 or MP5 - Direct

Connection

This use model involves directly connecting a telemetry transceiver to an MP2/X2 or MP5 which is connected to an IntelliVue Information Center. The direct connection can be established either via a

TAAP cable (MP5 only), or by assigning the telemetry transceiver to the MP2/X2 or MP5 via a short range radio link.

Results:

• If configured, the monitor and the telemetry device are automatically paired at the Information Center when the direct connection is established.

153

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Global Settings

• Data from the telemetry transceiver is displayed at the Information Center in the same patient sector as the X2/MP2/MP5 data.

• Data from the telemetry transceiver is displayed on the monitor. The ECG waves and numerics appear in place of the monitor’s own ECG, and SpO2T is displayed as an additional measurement (if available).

Restrictions:

• The X2/MP5 cannot be connected to a host monitor (Companion Mode)

Configuration:

Required Configuration on X2/MP5

Set ’TAAP’ to

Assign Equipment Label

Enabled

Yes

Required Hardware on X2/MP5

SRR Interface or TAAP Connector

Yes

IIT Interface

Required Configuration at Information Center

No

Declare X2/MP5 as

Monitor

3. Tele Transceiver Directly Connected to an MP5T, or Non-Networked MP5, or MP2/X2

This use model involves directly connecting a telemetry transceiver to an MP5T (or X2 or MP5) which is

not connected to an IntelliVue Information Center. The direct connection can be established either via a

TAAP cable (MP5/MP5T only), or by assigning the telemetry transceiver to the X2 or MP5/MP5T via a short range radio link.

Results:

• Data from the telemetry transceiver is displayed on the monitor. The ECG waves and numerics appear in place of the monitor’s own ECG, and SpO

2

T is displayed as an additional measurement (if available).

• Selected data from the monitor is sent via the telemetry network (ITS) to the IntelliVue Information

Center. Refer to the IntelliVue Instructions for Use for more detail.

Restrictions:

• The X2/MP5 cannot be connected to a host monitor (Companion Mode).

154

Global Settings

Configuration:

Required Configuration on MP5T (MP2/X2/MP5)

Set ’TAAP’ to

Enabled

Assign Equipment Label

Required Hardware on MP5T (MP2/X2/MP5)

not important

SRR Interface or TAAP Connector

IIT Interface

Yes

No

Required Configuration at Information Center

Declare MP2/X2/MP5 as

not important

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

4. X2 or MP5 Declared as Tele Device and Paired with a Larger Monitor -

Direct Connection

This use model involves directly connecting an X2 or MP5 that is declared as a Telemetry Device at the

Information Center to a larger monitor which is connected to an IntelliVue Information Center. The direct connection can be established either via a TAAP cable (MSL connection), or by directly attaching the X2 to the MMS mount of a larger monitor.

Results:

• If configured, the monitor and the telemetry device (X2/MP5) are automatically paired at the

Information Center when the direct connection is established.

• Data from the telemetry device (X2/MP5) is displayed at the Information Center in the same patient sector as the larger monitor data.

• When connected, the X2/MP5 is acting as companion to the larger host monitor.

• When disconnected, the devices remain paired and the X2/MP5 data appears in the telemetry data window.

Restrictions:

• A telemetry transceiver cannot be used with the X2/MP5

Configuration: .

Required Configuration on X2/MP5

Set ’TAAP’ to

Assign Equipment Label

Disabled

Yes

Required Hardware on X2/MP5

SRR Interface or TAAP Connector

No

IIT Interface

Yes

Required Configuration at Information Center

Declare X2/MP5 as

Telemetry Device

155

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Global Settings

5. Tele Transceiver Directly Connected to an X2 or MP5 which is Connected as a Companion to a Larger Host Monitor

It is possible to combine three devices in order get data from a telemetry transceiver directly onto one of the larger monitors (MP20 - MP90). For this use model, the telemetry transceiver must be directly connected to an X2 or MP5 (either via SRR link or via TAAP connector). The X2/MP5 can then be connected as a companion to a larger host monitor (Companion Mode).

Results:

• When connected (via TAAP) or assigned (via SRR) to the X2 or MP5, the telemetry transceiver is automatically paired with the host monitor.

• If the monitor and telemetry transceiver are paired before the tele transceiver is assigned to the X2 or

MP5, the short range radio connection will be automatically established.

• Data from the telemetry transceiver is displayed on the host monitor. The ECG waves and numerics appear in place of the monitor’s own ECG, and SpO

2

T is displayed as an additional measurement.

Restrictions:

• The X2/MP5 must have no equipment label.

• The X2/MP5 cannot be connected to an IntelliVue Information Center.

Configuration:

Required Configuration on X2/MP5

Set ’TAAP’ to

not important, can be set to

Enabled or Disabled

No

Assign Equipment Label

Required Hardware on X2/MP5

SRR Interface or TAAP Connector

Yes

IIT Interface

No

Required Configuration at Information Center

Declare X2/MP5 as

Declare host monitor as

not applicable, since X2/MP5 has no equipment label

Monitor

156

Global Settings

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Configuring Ask for New Patient Settings

Global Setting: Main Setup -> Global Settings -> Ask For New Pat

Factory Defaults

Item Name

Power Off

Standby

No Basic Vitals

Ask Paced Mode x x x x

Oper.

Mode

MP2 - MP90

MP5T

C M

X2

Never

Never

Never

No

Ask for New Patient Configuration Implications

Power Off

can be configured to a specific time (1min, 10min, 30min, 1h, 3h, or 8h) or to

Never

. If the monitor is switched on, after being switched off for longer than the specified time, it will ask the user whether a new patient is now being monitored. The user can then select Yes to discharge the current patient and to begin monitoring a new patient or No to continue monitoring with the current patient data and settings.

Standby

can be configured to a specific time (1min, 10min, 30min, 1h, 3h, or 8h) or to Never. If monitoring is resumed, after the monitor was in Standby for longer than the specified time, it will ask the user whether a new patient is now being monitored. The user can then select Yes to discharge the current patient and to begin monitoring a new patient or No to continue monitoring with the current patient data and settings.

No Basic Vitals

can be configured to a specific time (1min, 10min, 30min, 1h, 3h, or 8h) or to Never. If no basic vitals (HR, RR, Pulse, SpO

2

, NBP) have been measured for the specified time, the monitor will ask the user whether a new patient is now being monitored. The user can then select Yes to discharge the current patient and to begin monitoring a new patient or No to continue monitoring with the current patient data and settings.

Ask Paced Mode

can be configured to Yes or No. If you set it to Yes and the clinician selects Yes when asked whether this is a new patient, the monitor will prompt the clinician to enter the patients paced mode.

157

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Global Settings

Configuration Recommendations when using an X2 or MP5 with a

Telemetry Label

You can declare an X2 or MP5 as a telemetry device at the Information Center (assigning a telemetry label). This causes the X2 or MP5 to be treated as as a telemetry device, including the ability to be paired with a host monitor (MP20-MP90). If you plan to use an X2/MP5 with a telemetry label and connect it to

/ disconnect it from a host monitor, you should configure the following global settings:

Recommended Configuration

Global Settings On host monitor

(MP20-90)

Pat. Sel. Default

AskUser Reminder

Ask for New Patient Power Off

Ask User

5 min

10 min

Standby 10 min

No Basic Vitals 10 min

On X2 / MP5

not applicable

5 min

10 min

10 min

10 min

Configuring Demographic Fields Settings

Global Setting: Main Setup -> Global Settings -> Demograph. Fields

Factory Defaults

Item Name

Middle Name

Lifetime Id

Encounter Id

Lifetime Id Lbl

Encounter Id Lbl x x x x x

Oper.

Mode

MP2 - MP90

MP5T

C M

X2

Off

On

Off

MRN

Encounter Id

Demographic Fields Configuration Implications

These settings determine which fields appear in the Patient Demographics window.

Middle Name

Configure Middle Name to On, if you want to be able to enter the patient’s middle name in the Patient Demographics window.

Lifetime Id

Configure Lifetime Id to On, if you want to be able to enter a Lifetime Id in the

Patient Demographics window. How the Lifetime Id field is actually labeled, depends on the configuration made under Lifetime Id Lbl.

Encounter Id

Configure Encounter Id to On, if you want to be able to enter a Encounter Id in the Patient Demographics window. How the Encounter Id field is actually labeled, depends on the configuration made under Encounter Id Lbl.

158

Global Settings

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Lifetime Id Lbl

Use this seting to select how the Lifetime Id field should be labeled in the Patient

Demographics window. Possible choices are: MRN, Record Number, Lifetime Id, Patient

Id

, Serial Number, and SSN. Make sure the same lifetime id label is used consistently across the entire enterprise.

Encounter Id Lbl

Use this seting to select how the Encounter Id field should be labeled in the

Patient Demographics window. Possible choices are: Encounter Id, Visit Id, Account

Number

, Charge Number, Case Id, and Subject Number. Make sure the same encounter id label is used consistently across the entire enterprise.

N O T E

It is strongly recommended that the required demographic fields are configured consistently on the

IntelliVue Information Center and the IntelliVue Patient monitor. When connected to an Information

Center, the configuration of the demographic fields in the monitor will be permanently overwritten by the configuration of the Information Center.

Configuring Remote Display Settings

MP2/X2,

MP5,

MP60-90 only

Global Setting: Main Setup -> Global Settings -> Remote Display

Factory Defaults

Item Name

Access Rights

Password

Standby Image x x x

Oper.

Mode

MP60 - MP90

MP2/X2

C M

MP5

Operating

0000

Boot Image

Remote Display Configuration Implications

These settings manage aspects of the connection of an IntelliVue monitor to the XDS Remote Display.

Access Rights

This settig determines how the XDS Remote Display can access the IntelliVue monitor. The following choices are available:

None: a connected XDS Remote Display can neither display information from the IntelliVue monitor, nor remotely operate it.

Viewing: a connected XDS Remote Display can display information from the IntelliVue monitor, but not remotely operate it.

Operating: a connected XDS Remote Display can both display information from the IntelliVue monitor and remotely operate it.

Password

To get access to the IntelliVue monitor from an XDS Remote Display, the same password must be configured in both devices. The maximum length of the password is 16 characters. To reset the password, overwrite it in both the monitor and the XDS software.

Standby Image

This setting lets you change the presentation of the standby screen on the XDS

Remote Display. The following choices are available:

Boot Image: the Standby screen shows the basic (black background) boot image.

159

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Global Settings

Moving Image: the Standby screen shows a black screen with an image moving across the screen, similar to a screensaver.

Blank: the Standby screen shows a black screen.

Configuring Timer Selection and Order

Global Setting: Main Setup -> Timers

The selection and order of timers as they appear in the Timers menu are stored as Global settings.

Factory Defaults

Item Name MP40/50 MP20/30 MP5

MP5T

MP2

X2

<Timer 1>

<Timer 2>

<Timer 3>

<Timer 4> x x x x

Oper.

Mode

MP60/70

MP80

C M

MP90

Timer A

Timer B

Timer C

Timer D not applicable not applicable not applicable not applicable

Timer Selection and Order Configuration Implications

The maximum number of timers that can be simultaneously displayed on the IntelliVue monitor depends on your monitor model. The IntelliVue MP60/70/80/90 can run a maximum of four timers, the MP40/

50 can run three timers, the MP20/30 two timers, the MP5 one timer. The MP2/X2 does not provide a timer function.

The selection and order of timers is important when you change a numeric on the Main Screen into a timer:

• The selection determines which timer labels are actually available to choose from.

1

2

• The order determines which timer label is used when you change a numeric into an Any Timer. The monitor automatically uses the label that is located highest in the Timers window, provided that is not displayed on the Main Screen yet.

To change the selection and order of timers in the Timers menu,

Select Main Setup -> Timers to open the Timers menu.

Select the timer label that you want to change.

3

4

From the pop-up key line, select Setup <Timer X> to open the Setup menu for this timer label.

Select Label and change it to a different label. Notice that the monitor automatically applies the settings preconfigured for this label to the timer.

160

Global Settings

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Configuring Manual Data Entry

MP5-90 only

Global Setting: Main Setup -> Enter MeasValues -> Setup Meas.

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP5 - MP90

C M

Labels for General Use

Msmnt

Label

Unit

Color

Interval

Msmnt

Label

Unit

Color

Interval

Msmnt

Color

Interval

Msmnt

Format

Label

Unit

Color

Interval

Label

Unit

Color

Interval

Msmnt

Label

Unit x x x x x x x x x x x x x

T1

o

C

Green x 4h x x Off

CVP

mmHg

Red

1 h x x Off x x Mean

Glu

mmol/l

Green

4 h x x x x Off x

Hct

%PCV

Green x x x 24 h x x Off

Hb

g/dl

Green

24 h x x Off

Labels reserved for ProtocolWatch

Label

1

Unit

1

T1

3

o

C

Color

Interval

2

Msmnt

Format

1

x x x

Green

4 h x Off not applicable, temperature labels don’t have different formats

161

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Global Settings

Factory Defaults

Item Name

Msmnt

Format

1

Label

1

Unit

1

Color

Interval

2

Msmnt

Format

1

Label

1

Unit

1

Color

Interval

2

Msmnt

Format

1

Label

1

Unit

1

Color

Interval

2

Msmnt

Format

1

Color

Interval

2

Msmnt

Format

1

Label

1

Unit

1

Color

Interval

2

Label

1

Unit

1

Color

Interval

2

Msmnt

Format

1

Label

1

Unit

1

x x x Off x x not applicable, this label does not have different formats x x Off x x not applicable, this label does not have different formats x x

SpRR

rpm

Green x 2 h x x Off not applicable, this label does not have different formats

Lact

mmol/l

Green

2 h

ScvO

2

%

Green

1 h

SvO

2

%

Green

1 h x x Off x x x x x x x x x

Oper.

Mode

MP5 - MP90

C M

not applicable, this label does not have different formats

Glu

3

mmol/l

Green

4 h x Off not applicable, this label does not have different formats

CVP

3

mmHg

Red

1 h x x Off

Sys&Dia&Mean

1.For ProtocolWatch labels, Label, Unit, and Format cannot be modified.

2.For ProtocolWatch labels, the choices for Interval are restricted to the times used in the ProtocolWatch application.

3.This label is not visible in the ProtocolWatch section, if it is also configured as a general label.

162

Global Settings

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Manual Data Entry Configuration Implications

You can manually enter measurement values into the monitor that have been measured with other equipment or manually, for example, manual temperatures, or lab values. The monitor is shipped with a number of measurements preconfigured for manual entry (see table above).

A maximum of 20 measurements can be configured, 13 for general purposes, the remaining seven are reserved for the ProtocolWatch application. These will only be shown in the Enter Measurement Values menu if the ProtocolWatch option is installed on the monitor and the ProtocolWatch application is active.

If you add a measurement to the general section with the same label as a measurement reserved for the

ProtocolWatch application, the label will disappear from the ProtocolWatch section. This has no negative effect on the ProtocolWatch application. For details on configuring the ProtocolWatch application, see the

section "Configuring ProtocolWatch" on page 134.

To add more measurements for manual entry,

1

2

3

In configuration mode, select Main Setup -> Enter MeasValues to open the

Enter Measurement Values window. The measurements that are currently configured for manual data entry are displayed.

Select the pop-up key Setup Meas. to open the Setup Measurement Values window, then select the pop-up key Add.

In the Setup Measurement submenu, select Label and choose the required measurement label from the pop-up list.

4

5

6

7

Select the Unit and Color that should be used for the chosen label.

Select Interval to define the time after which a manually entered value becomes invalid (no value is then displayed). Values can be entered up to two hours after they have been measured or up to the measurement interval, if this is shorter.

Select Msmnt to define whether the selected measurement will be On or Off. The On/Off state can be changed by the user in Monitoring mode.

If available, select Format to define an input format. For pressures, for example, you can configure whether the user should enter all pressure values (Sys&Dia&Mean) or only the Mean pressure. The

Format

can be changed by the user in Monitoring mode.

163

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Global Settings

Configuring Country-Specific Settings

Global Setting: Main Setup -> Global Settings

Some settings are made in the factory to match the typical requirements in a specific country. Line frequency, units for weight and height, and ECG cable colors (AAMI or IEC) have been set to appropriate values. If you suspect that these settings may not match your institution’s requirements, check the settings and change them if necessary.

The settings are listed here for all countries alphabetically.

Factory Defaults - By Country

Country

Afghanistan

Åland Islands

Albania

Algeria

American Samoa

Andorra

Angola

Anguilla

Antarctica

Antigua and Barbuda

Argentina

Armenia

Aruba

Australia

Austria

Azerbaijan

Bahamas, The

Bahrain

Bangladesh

Barbados

Belarus

Belgium

Belize

Benin

Bermuda

Bhutan

Bolivia

Bosnia and Herzegovina

All Monitor Models

Line Frequency Weight

Unit

Height

Unit

ECG Cable Color

50

50

60

60

60

50

60

50

60

60

50

50

60

50

50

50

60

50

50

50

60

60

50

60

50

50

50

50 lb lb kg kg kg kg lb kg kg lb kg kg kg kg kg kg lb kg kg kg lb lb kg lb kg kg kg kg cm cm in in cm cm in cm cm in cm cm cm cm cm cm in cm cm cm in in cm in cm cm cm cm

AAMI

AAMI

AAMI

AAMI

IEC

IEC

AAMI

AAMI

AAMI

AAMI

AAMI

IEC

AAMI

AAMI

AAMI

IEC

AAMI

AAMI

IEC

IEC

AAMI

IEC

IEC

IEC

AAMI

AAMI

IEC

AAMI

164

Global Settings

Botswana

Bouvet Island

Brazil

British Indian Ocean Territory

Brunei Darussalam

Brunei

Bulgaria

Burkina Faso

Burundi

Cambodia

Cameroon

Canada

Cape Verde

Cayman Islands

Central African Republic

Chad

Chile

China

Christmas Islands

Cocos Keeling Islands

Colombia

Comoros

Congo

Congo, Democratic Republic of the

Cook Islands

Costa Rica

Côte d'Ivoire

Croatia

Cuba

Cyprus

Czech Republic

Denmark

Djibouti

Dominica

Dominican Republic

Ecuador

Egypt

El Salvador

Equatorial Guinea

Eritrea

60

60

60

50

50

60

60

50

60

50

60

60

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

60

60

60

60

50

60

50

50

60

50

50

60

60

50

50

60

50

50

50

50

60 lb kg lb kg kg lb kg kg lb kg kg lb kg kg kg kg kg kg kg lb kg lb kg kg kg kg kg lb kg kg kg kg kg kg kg kg kg kg kg lb

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

in cm in cm cm in cm cm in cm cm in cm cm cm cm cm cm cm in cm in cm cm cm cm cm in cm cm cm cm cm cm cm cm cm cm cm in

AAMI

IEC

AAMI

AAMI

AAMI

AAMI

IEC

AAMI

AAMI

AAMI

IEC

AAMI

IEC

AAMI

AAMI

AAMI

AAMI

IEC

IEC

IEC

IEC

IEC

IEC

IEC

IEC

AAMI

IEC

AAMI

AAMI

AAMI

IEC

AAMI

IEC

IEC

IEC

IEC

AAMI

AAMI

IEC

IEC

165

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Estonia

Ethiopia

Falkland Islands, Malvinas

Faroe Islands

Fiji

Finland

France

French Guiana

French Polynesia

French Southern Territories

Gabon

Gambia, The

Georgia

Germany

Ghana

Gibraltar

Greece

Greenland

Grenada

Guadeloupe

Guam

Guatemala

Guernsey

Guinea

Guinea-Bissau

Guyana

Haiti

Heard Island and McDonald Islands

Holy See, Vatican City State

Honduras

Hong Kong

Hungary

Iceland

India

Indonesia

Iran, Islamic Republic of

Iraq

Ireland

Isle of Man

Israel

166

50

60

60

50

60

50

50

50

60

50

50

60

50

60

60

60

50

50

50

50

60

60

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

60

60

50

60

60

60

50

60

60

IEC

AAMI

AAMI

IEC

AAMI

AAMI

IEC

IEC

AAMI

IEC

IEC

AAMI

IEC

IEC

AAMI

AAMI

AAMI

IEC

IEC

IEC

AAMI

AAMI

AAMI

AAMI

IEC

IEC

IEC

IEC

IEC

AAMI

AAMI

IEC

IEC

IEC

IEC

AAMI

AAMI

AAMI

AAMI

AAMI cm in cm cm in cm cm cm in cm cm in cm in in in cm cm cm cm in in cm cm cm cm cm cm cm cm cm in cm cm cm cm in cm in in kg lb kg kg lb kg kg kg lb kg kg lb kg lb lb lb kg kg kg kg lb lb kg kg kg kg kg kg kg kg kg lb kg kg kg kg lb kg lb lb

Global Settings

Global Settings

Italy

Jamaica

Japan

Jersey

Jordan

Kazakhstan

Kenya

Kiribati 60

Korea, Democratic People’s Republic of 60

Korea, Republic of 60

50

50

50

50

50

60

50

Kuweit

Kyrgyzstan

Lao People’s Democratic Republics

Latvia

Lebanon

Lesotho

Liberia

Libyan Arab. Jamahiriya

Liechtenstein

Lithuania

Luxembourg

Macao

50

50

60

50

60

60

50

50

50

50

60

50

Macedonia, The former Yugoslav. Rep. of 50

Madagascar

Malawi

50

50

Malaysia

Maldives

Mali

50

60

50

Malta

Marshall Islands

Martinique

Mauritania

Mauritius

Mayotte

Mexico

Micronesia, Fed. States of

Moldova, Republic of

Monaco

Mongolia

Montenegro

60

60

60

60

50

50

60

60

60

50

60

60 kg kg lb kg lb lb kg kg kg kg lb kg lb lb kg kg kg kg kg kg kg kg lb lb lb lb kg kg lb lb kg kg lb kg kg lb kg kg kg kg

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

cm cm in cm in in cm cm cm cm in cm in in cm cm cm cm cm cm cm cm in in in in cm cm in in cm cm in cm cm in cm cm cm cm

IEC

AAMI

AAMI

IEC

IEC

AAMI

AAMI

AAMI

IEC

IEC

AAMI

IEC

IEC

AAMI

IEC

IEC

AAMI

IEC

IEC

AAMI

AAMI

AAMI

IEC

AAMI

IEC

IEC

AAMI

AAMI

AAMI

AAMI

AAMI

AAMI

AAMI

IEC

IEC

IEC

IEC

IEC

AAMI

IEC

167

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Montserrat

Morocco

Mozambique

Myanmar

Namibia

Nauru

Nepal

Netherlands

Netherlands Antilles

New Caledonia

New Zealand

Nicaragua

Niger

Nigeria

Niue

Norfolk Islands

Northern Mariana Islands

Norway

Oman

Pakistan

Palau

Palestinian Territory

Panama

Papua New Guinea

Paraguay

Peru

Philippines

Pitcairn

Poland

Portugal

Puerto Rico

Qatar

Reunion

Romania

Russian Federation

Rwanda

Saint Helena

Saint Kitts and Nevis

Saint Lucia

Saint Pierre and Miquelon

168

50

60

50

60

50

50

50

60

60

50

60

50

50

50

60

50

60

60

50

50

50

60

50

60

60

50

60

50

60

50

50

50

50

60

60

60

60

60

60

50

AAMI

IEC

AAMI

IEC

AAMI

AAMI

AAMI

AAMI

IEC

IEC

AAMI

AAMI

AAMI

IEC

IEC

AAMI

IEC

AAMI

AAMI

IEC

AAMI

AAMI

IEC

IEC

AAMI

AAMI

AAMI

IEC

IEC

IEC

AAMI

AAMI

AAMI

AAMI

AAMI

AAMI

AAMI

AAMI

AAMI

AAMI cm in cm in cm cm cm in in cm in cm cm cm in cm in in cm cm cm in cm in cm cm in cm in cm cm cm cm in cm cm in in in cm kg lb kg lb kg kg kg lb lb kg kg kg kg kg lb kg lb lb kg kg kg lb kg lb kg kg lb kg lb kg kg kg kg lb kg kg lb lb lb kg

Global Settings

Global Settings

Saint Vincent and the Grenadines

Samoa

San Marino

Sao Tome and Principe

Saudi Arabia

Senegal

Serbia

Serbia & Montenegro

Seychelles

Sierra Leone

Singapore

Slovakia

Slovenia

Solomon Islands

Somalia

South Africa

South Georgia and the South Sandwich

Islands

Spain

Sri Lanka

Sudan

Suriname

Svalbard and Jan Mayen

Swaziland

Sweden

Switzerland

Syrian Arab Rep

Taiwan, Province of China

Tajikistan

Tanzania, United Republic of

Thailand

Timor-Leste

Togo

Tokelau

Tonga

Trinidad and Tobago

Tunisia

Turkey

Turkmenistan

Turks and Caicos Islands

50

60

50

50

50

50

50

60

60

60

60

50

60

50

50

50

60

50

60

60

60

50

50

50

60

50

60

60

50

50

60

60

60

60

60

60

60

50

60

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

kg kg lb lb kg kg kg cm lb in kg kg lb cm cm in cm cm in in cm cm kg kg lb kg lb lb lb lb lb kg lb cm cm in cm in in in in in cm in kg lb kg kg kg kg kg lb lb lb lb kg lb kg kg kg lb cm in cm cm cm cm cm in in in in cm in cm cm cm in

IEC

AAMI

IEC

AAMI

AAMI

AAMI

IEC

IEC

AAMI

AAMI

AAMI

AAMI

AAMI

AAMI

AAMI

AAMI

AAMI

AAMI

IEC

IEC

AAMI

AAMI

AAMI

AAMI

AAMI

AAMI

AAMI

IEC

IEC

IEC

AAMI

IEC

IEC

IEC

IEC

AAMI

IEC

AAMI

AAMI

169

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Tuvalu

Uganda

Ukraine

UK

United Arab Emirates

United Kingdom

United States

United States (Weight kg)

United States (Height cm, Weight kg)

United States Minor Outlying Islands

Uruguay

Uzbekistan

Vanuatu

Venezuela

Viet Nam

Virgin Islands (British)

Virgin Islands (US)

Wallis and Futuna Islands

Western Sahara

Yemen

Zambia

Zimbabwe

50

60

60

60

60

50

60

50

50

50

60

60

60

60

60

50

50

60

60

60

60

50

AAMI

AAMI

IEC

AAMI

AAMI

AAMI

AAMI

AAMI

AAMI

AAMI

IEC

AAMI

AAMI

AAMI

AAMI

IEC

AAMI

IEC

AAMI

AAMI

AAMI

AAMI cm in in in in cm in cm cm cm in in in cm in cm cm in in in in cm kg lb lb lb lb kg lb kg kg kg lb lb kg kg lb kg kg lb lb lb lb kg

Global Settings

170

Printer: Local 1

1

Chg Printer Name

Port

Config Printer

2

Printer Status

Paper Size

Resolution

Color Support

Duplex Option

Printer: Local 2

1

Chg Printer Name

Port

Config Printer

2

Printer Status

Paper Size

Resolution

Color Support

Duplex Option

Printer: Remote 1

Chg Printer Name

Port

Config Printer

2

Printer Status

Paper Size

Resolution

Color Support

Duplex Option

Printer: Remote 2

Chg Printer Name

Port

Config Printer

2

Printer Status

Global Settings

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Configuring Printers

Global Setting: Main Setup -> Reports -> Setup Printers

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP20 - MP90

C S M

MP2/X2

MP5 / MP5T

x x x x

Local 1

not applicable, this is not a setting, see "Printer

Configuration Implications" on page 172

x Manual x x x Disabled x x x x

Letter

300 dpi x x x x

Monochrome

Simplex x x x x

Local 2

not applicable, this is not a setting, see "Printer

Configuration Implications" on page 172

x Manual x x x Disabled x x x x

Letter

300 dpi x x x x

Monochrome

Simplex not applicable, the

MP2/X2 and MP5/

MPT do not support local printing not applicable, the

MP2/X2 and MP5/

MP5T do not support local printing x x x x

Remote 1

not applicable, this is not a setting, see "Printer Configuration Implications" on page 172

x Auto x x x Enabled x x x x

Letter

300 dpi x x x x

Monochrome

Simplex x x x x

Remote 2

not applicable, this is not a setting, see "Printer Configuration Implications" on page 172

x Auto x x x Enabled

171

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Global Settings

Factory Defaults

Item Name Oper.

Mode

MP20 - MP90 MP2/X2

MP5 / MP5T

Paper Size

Resolution

Color Support

Duplex Option

Printer: Remote 3

Chg Printer Name

Port

C S M

x x x x x x x x

Letter

300 dpi

Monochrome

Simplex

Config Printer

2

Printer Status

Paper Size

Resolution

Color Support

Duplex Option

Printer: Database

Chg Printer Name

Port x x x x x x x x x x

Remote 3

not applicable, this is not a setting, see "Printer Configuration Implications" on page 172

Auto x x x x Enabled x x Letter

300 dpi

Monochrome

Simplex

Config Printer

2

Printer Status

Paper Size x x x x x x x x x

Database

not applicable, this is not a setting, see "Printer Configuration Implications" on page 172

Manual x Enabled

Letter

1.Local printers will only be shown in the list of printers if a Parallel Printer Interface is installed.

2.Setting can only be changed in service mode.

Printer Configuration Implications

Printer

This is not a setting, it lets you select the printer you want to configure. The printer

Database

is not a physical printer, it refers to the print database. This is a special section of the monitor database which acts as a buffer for print jobs. Print jobs stored in the print database are automatically printed when a print device with a paper size matching the template of the report is available. Reports stored in the print database will not be cleared by a discharge or by a power cycle. To be able to use the

print database, it must be enabled, see "Print Database" on page 186.

Chg Printer Name

Lets you change the printer name. If the monitor is connected to an

Information Center, the name of the printer is determined by the Information Center and cannot be changed at the monitor.

Port

This is not a setting. Port lets you view the printer port to which the selected printer is assigned.

Available printer ports are Local 1, Local 2, Remote 1, Remote 2, Remote 3, and

Database

. Several printers can be mapped to the same printer port. For example, both Local 1 and

Local 2

could be mapped to the same local printer to allow printing from different paper trays of one printer.

172

Global Settings

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Port Local 1 has the highest priority, port Database has the lowest priority. If you print a report for

which no specific printer has been assigned (Target Device = Unspecified, see "Configuring

Reports" on page 101), the monitor tries to print on port Local 1 first. If this is not possible, because

the printer is not available or there is a mismatch between the configured report size and the actual printer paper size, the monitor tries to send the report to the printer connected to port Local 2, followed by

Remote 1

, and so on. If the monitor has no connection to a printer, the report will be stored in the print database, from which it will be printed as soon as a connection to an appropriate printer is available.

Config Printer

This setting is available in Service mode only. It lets you define whether the printer is automatically or manually configured. Automatic printer configuration is only available for remote printers, i.e. printers that are connected to the Information Center. For local printers and printing to the database, this setting is automatically set to Manual.

When Config Printer is set to Auto, printer settings for paper size, resolution, color support and duplex option sent from an Information Center or other source override the settings configured at the monitor. They will be unavailable (“grayed out”) at the monitor. When Config Printer is set to

Manual

, the printer settings from the monitor override printer settings from an Information Center or other source.

Printer Status

This lets you enable or disable the selected printer.

If Port is one of the remote ports, and Config Printer is set to Auto, and printing on this port is not possible, Printer Status is automatically Disabled and can not be changed.

Paper Size

This lets you configure the printer paper size. Possible choices are: A4, Letter, A3 or

Ledger

(11x17 inches). This setting is not available if Config Printer is configured to Auto.

Resolution

The printer resolution can be set to 300 dpi, 600 dpi or 1200 dpi. The horizontal and vertical resolutions are assumed to be identical. This setting is not available if Config

Printer

is configured to Auto or if Printer Status is Disabled.

Color Support

This lets you configure whether the printer supports color. It can be set to

Monochrome

or 8 Colors. This setting is not available if Config Printer is configured to

Auto

or if Printer Status is Disabled.

Duplex Option

This lets you configure Simplex or Duplex printing. If the printer does not support duplex printing, this setting is ignored. This setting is not available if Config Printer is configured to Auto or if Printer Status is Disabled.

Printer Configuration Examples

Configuring a Locally Connected Printer

These steps show you how to carry out a typical configuration for a monitor connected to a local printer.

1

In the Setup Printers menu, select the first printer in the list (Port is set to Local 1).

2

Set Printer Status to Enabled. Disabled means that no reports will be printed on the printer. If this menu entry is grayed out, it means that no printer of this type is connected to the specified port. Make sure that all other printers in the list are set to Disabled.

3

4

5

Select Chg Printer Name and then use the pop-up keyboard to enter a name for the printer you are currently configuring. Maximum length is 12.

Select Paper Size and set the paper size for reports printed on this printer.

Select Resolution and set the resolution at which reports should be printed.

173

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Global Settings

6

7

Select Color Support to toggle to Monochrome for black and white printers or 8 Colors for color printers. If your printer is not a color printer and you set this to color, reports will not print correctly.

Select Duplex Option to toggle to Duplex if the connected printer can print double-sided reports, or Simplex for single-sided print-outs.

Only one local printer can be connected to each monitor. You can use the second local port to print reports from a second paper tray, if required.

1

Select the second printer in the list, and make sure Port is set to Local 2 and Printer

Status

is set to Enabled.

2

Assign different names to the two paper trays, for example Bed4_USLettr and Bed4_Ledger.

3

Configure the other printer settings as required for the second paper tray.

Configuring a Centrally Connected Printer

These steps show you how to carry out a typical configuration for a monitor connected to a central printer.

1

2

In the Setup Printers menu, select the third printer in the list and make sure that Port is set to Remote 1.

Set Printer Status to Enabled. Disabled means that no reports will be printed on the printer. If this menu entry is grayed out, it means that no printer of this type is connected to the specified port. Make sure that all other printers in the list are set to Disabled.

5

6

3

If the printer name is not sent from the Information Center, select Chg Printer Name and then use the pop-up keyboard to enter a name for the printer you are currently configuring. Maximum length is 12. If the printer name is defined at the Information Center, Chg Printer Name will be unavailable (“grayed out”).

(The settings described in steps 4 to 7 are only available if the service mode setting Config Printer is set to Manual).

4

Select Paper Size and set the paper size for reports printed on this printer.

Select Resolution and set the resolution at which reports should be printed.

Select Color Support to toggle between Monochrome for black and white printers or

8 Colors

for color printers.

The IntelliVue Information Center currently does not support color printers. If a black and white printer is connected to your Information Center and you set Color Support for a remote printer to 8

Colors

, reports will not print correctly.

7

Select Duplex Option to toggle to Duplex if the connected printer can print double-sided reports, or Simplex for single-sided print-outs.

If only one remote printer is connected to the monitor, you can use the second and third remote printer ports to print from different paper trays on the printer. The service mode setting Config Printer must be set to Manual for this.

1

To print reports from the second paper tray, select the fourth printer in the list, make sure Port is set to Remote 2, and Printer Status is set to Enabled.

2

To print reports from the third paper tray, select the fifth printer in the list, make sure Port is set to

Remote 3

, and Printer Status is set to Enabled.

3

Configure the other printer settings as required for each paper tray.

174

Global Settings

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Configuring one Locally and One Centrally Connected Printer

This is a typical configuration for a monitor connected to one local and one central printer.

1

2

To configure the local printer, in the Setup Printers menu, select the first printer in the list and make sure that Port is set to Local 1. Set Printer Status to Enabled. Change the printer name if required and configure the correct settings for the locally connected printer as described above.

To configure the central printer, in the Setup Printers menu, select the third printer in the list and make sure that Port is set to Remote 1. Set Printer Status to Enabled. Change the printer name if required and configure the settings for the centrally connected printer as described above.

3

Make sure that all other printers in the list are set to Disabled.

Configuring a Monitor to Capture Alarm Events in the Print Database during

Transport

You may want to use this feature on transport monitors which have no recorder.

1

2

Under Databases > Database Config, make sure that Print Database is set to Small or Large. Any change must be confirmed to take effect. This will cause the monitor to reboot.

Under Alarms > Alarm Recording, select all alarms that should trigger a capture (eg HR Red

Only, PVC Red Only, etc.).

3

Under Recordings > Setup Recordings, select Alarm, and change the Recorder to

Printer

. This causes any alarm recording to be sent as a Realtime Report to a connected printer. If during transport no printer is connected to the monitor, the Realtime Report will be stored in the print database (if configured appropriately, see next steps)

4

Under Reports > Setup Reports, select Realtime Rep as the Report. a. Configure the Target Device to either Unspecified (factory default) or Database.

5

6

7

b. Configure the Report Size to either Universal or Unspecified. In both cases, the report will be printed on a printer which has either US Letter or A4 format.

Under Reports > Setup Printers, select Database as the Printer, and configure the

Paper Size

to either Letter or A4, depending on your prefered paper format.

Under Reports, select AutoPrint Dbs and set it to the desired behavior. For details, refer to

"Other Report Settings Configuration Implications" on page 105.

Store the changes.

Printing a Test Report

To verify your printer configuration it is strongly recommended that you print a test report.

To print a test report, select Main Setup -> Reports -> Setup Printers -> Print Test Rep.

175

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Hardware Settings

Hardware Settings

This section lists all hardware settings. Just like unique monitor settings and global settings, hardware settings are set once per monitor and are the same in every Profile. Any changes you make to the hardware settings configuration are automatically stored, there is no need to save them in an extra step.

Hardware settings must be entered for each monitor individually, they are stored in the monitor, and cannot be cloned using the IntelliVue Support Tool.

Most hardware settings can be changed in service mode only. For detailed configuration implications on these settings, please refer to the Service Guide provided on the Documentation DVD shipped with your monitor.

Hardware Setting: Main Setup -> Hardware

Factory Defaults

Item Name

Multiple Display

Video

2

Standby Image

Interfaces

Keyboard

Data Export

Data Export

SRR

4

3

3

SRR Channel

4

1

Oper.

Mode

MP90 MP20 -MP80 MP5 MP2/X2

x x x x x x x

C S M

x x x x x

See “Configuring Multiple

Display Settings” on page 177

not applicable

See “Configuring Video Settings” on page 178

not applicable

Boot Image

See “Configuring Interfaces and Input Device Settings” on page 180

US not applicable

Fix 115200

Fix 115200 not applicable not applicable

On

See “Configuring SRR

Channels” on page 181

1.Entry available on MP90 monitors with multiple main displays only.

2.Entry available on MP40/50, MP60/70, and MP80/90 monitors only.

3.Setting available on monitors with a LAN or MIB/RS232 interface only.

4.Setting available on monitors with a short range radio interface only.

Video

Video settings are available in service mode only and allow technical personnel to set the correct resolution for the connected display(s). For detailed configuration implications, refer to the IntelliVue

Service Guide and "Configuring Video Settings" on page 178.

Standby Image

This setting lets you change the presentation of the standby screen. Choices for the first display are Fixed Image or Moving Image. For the 2nd and 3rd independent display, two additional choices are available: Blank and Video Off.

Boot Image: the Standby screen shows the boot image configured under Video settings, see

"Configuring Video Settings" on page 178.

Moving Image: the Standby screen shows a black screen with an image moving across the screen, similar to a screensaver.

Blank: the Standby screen shows a black screen, the display is not shut off.

176

Hardware Settings

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Video Off: the video signal and display are turned off.

Interfaces

Interface settings can be changed in service mode only. Supported interface board configurations are listed in the section “Installation Instructions” of the IntelliVue Service Guide.

Keyboard

This setting is available in service mode only and allows technical personnel to select the language of the keyboard that is connected to the P/S2 interface connector. For detailed configuration implications, refer to the IntelliVue Service Guide.

Data Export

The two Data Export settings let you determine the port speeds (baud rate) for up to two MIB/RS232 data output ports. The first setting determines the speed of the port labeled DtOut1, the second (lower) setting determines the speed of the port labeled DtOut2. The two data output ports can be located on the same or on two separate MIB/RS232 interfaces. For details on assigning data output

ports to the MIB/RS232 ports, refer to "Configuring Interfaces and Input Device Settings" on page 180.

SRR

This setting is available for monitors with a short range radio interface only. Configure SRR to Off, if you want to switch off the short range radio capabilities of the monitor.

Configuring Multiple Display Settings

MP90 only

Multiple Display settings are available for MP90 monitors with multiple main displays only.

Hardware Setting: Main Setup -> Hardware -> Multiple Display

Factory Defaults

Item Name

Display Layout

Display 1

Display 2

Display 3

Oper. 1 Windows

Oper. 2 Windows

FMS 1 Keys

FMS 2 Keys

GM Keys

Meas Sel.Window

ADT Window

Timer Window

ProtWatch Window

Event Surv. Window

Oper.

Mode

MP90

C S M

x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

Horizontal

Operator 1

Operator 1

Operator 1

Same Display

Same Display

Display 1

Display 1

Display 1

Display 1

Display 1

Display 1

Display 1

Display 1

Multiple Display Configuration Implications

Display Layout

This setting can be changed in service mode only. For detailed configuration implications, refer to the MP80/MP90 IntelliVue Service Guide.

177

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Hardware Settings

Display 1 / Display 2 / Display 3

These settings can be changed in service mode only.

For detailed configuration implications, refer to the MP80/MP90 IntelliVue Service Guide.

Oper. 1 Windows / Oper. 2 Windows

These settings can be changed in service mode only.

For detailed configuration implications, refer to the MP80/MP90 IntelliVue Service Guide.

FMS 1 Keys

defines on which display a setup menu or application window appears when any of the hard keys on a plug-in module in FMS 1 is pressed. If the configured display is not available, the monitor automatically uses Display 1.

FMS 2 Keys

defines on which display a setup menu or application window appears when any of the hard keys on a plug-in module in FMS 2 is pressed. If the configured display is not available, the monitor automatically uses Display 1.

GM Keys

defines on which display the gas monitor setup menu appears when the Setup Airway Gases key on the gas monitor front panel is pressed. If the configured display is not available, the monitor automatically uses Display 1.

Meas. Sel.Window

defines on which display the Measurement Selection window pops up if Meas.

Selection

(see “Configuring User Interface Settings” on page 110) is configured to Window, and a

label conflict occurs, and no other menu/window is open at the same time. If the configured display is not available, the monitor automatically uses Display 1.

ADT Window

defines on which display the Patient Demographics window pops up, if a patient identification mismatch occurs and no other menu/window is open at the same time. If the configured display is not available, the monitor automatically uses Display 1.

Timer Window

defines on which display the Timers window pops up when a timer expires and the

Auto Window

setting for that timer is set to Yes (see “Configuring Timers” on page 139), and no

other menu/window is open at the same time. If the configured display is not available, the monitor automatically uses Display 1.

ProtWatch Window

defines on which display the ProtocolWatch window pops up when the protocol currently running requires a user response. If the configured display is not available, the monitor automatically uses Display 1.

Event Surv. Window

defines on which display the Event Episode window pops up when an event occurs and the Notification Type of an event group is configured to ** Alarm (PopUp) or

***Alarm (PopUp)

. If the configured display is not available, the monitor automatically uses

Display 1.

Configuring Video Settings

Video settings can be changed in service mode only and allow technical personnel to set the correct resolution, type, and size for connected display(s). For detailed configuration implications on these settings, please refer to the latest IntelliVue Patient Monitor Service Guide.

178

Hardware Settings

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Hardware Setting: Main Setup -> Hardware -> Video

Factory Defaults

Item Name

Standby/Boot

Display 1 - Resolution

Display 1 - Display Type

Display 1 - Size

Display 2 - Resolution

2

Display 2 - Display Type

2

Display 2 - Size

2

Display 3 - Resolution

3

Display 3 - Display Type

3

Display 3 - Size

3

Oper.

Mode

MP90 MP60/70 MP40/50 MP20/30 MP5

C S M

x x x x x x x x x x

Classic

XGA (1024 x 768)

LCD

15” (305x230mm)

XGA (1024 x 768) not applicable

SVGA

1

LCD

1

12.1”

1

LCD

15”

XGA (1024 x 768)

LCD

15” not applicable

1.Setting can only be viewed, but not changed.

2.Setting only affects dual CPU MP90 monitors.

3.Setting only affects dual CPU MP90 monitors with a connected D80 Intelligent Display.

MP2/X2

Video Settings Configuration Implications

Standby/Boot

This setting can be changed in service mode only. It lets you change the presentation of the Standby/Boot Screen from the Classic look (photo of nurse and child in the background) to the

Basic

(black background) look.

Resolution

This setting can be changed in service mode only. It only affects MP90 monitors with more than one CPU and allows you to set the correct display resolution for external display. If you are using a display with a single fixed (native) resolution (such as LCD or Flat Panel displays), the optimal display quality can only be reached if the configured Resolution matches the native resolution of the display. Available choices range from 640x480(VGA) to 1280x1024(SXGA).

Display Type

This setting can be changed in service mode only. It only affects MP90 monitors with more than one CPU and lets you set the correct display type for an external display. Available choices are

LCD

and CRT. The Display Type setting effects the available choices for the setting Size (see below). This is necessary because the size measurement of a CRT display encompasses the full face of the picture tube, including the part hidden by the bezel, whereas on LCD displays, only the viewable screen is measured.

Size

This setting can be changed in service mode only. It only affects MP90 monitors with more than one CPU and lets you set the correct size of the external display. Size refers to the width of the display measured diagonally from one corner to the opposite corner of the viewable screen. The available choices depend on the choice made for the setting Display Type and range from 10.4”(210x160mm) to

60”(1330x750mm)

. It is important to configure the Size correctly to enable the monitor to calculate the correct sweep speed of measurement waves across the screen.

179

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Hardware Settings

Example: you are using a 22” LCD display with a horizontal dimension of 490mm, but leave the Size at the factory default value which is 15”, equaling a horizontal dimension of 300mm. An ECG wave with a wave speed set to 25mm/sec would normally need 19.6 sec to be drawn across a screen that is 490mm wide. With Size incorrectly set to 15” (300mm), the ECG wave will only need 12 sec. This is 1.6 times faster than it actually should be, resulting in an effective wave speed of about 41 mm/s.

The Size setting also affects the distance between menu entries in setup menus. If you want to optimize monitor operation for use with a touchscreen, make sure that both Size and Menu Line Spacing

(see "Configuring User Interface Settings" on page 110) are set correctly.

Configuring Interfaces and Input Device Settings

MP20-90

Only

Interfaces and Input Device settings can be changed in service mode only and allow technical personnel to configure the behavior of connected interface boards and input devices. For detailed configuration implications, please refer to the latest IntelliVue Service Guide.

Hardware Setting: Main Setup -> Hardware -> Interfaces

Factory Defaults

Interface

Remote Device IF

Input Device IF

MIB/RS232

Driver

SpeedPoint

Mouse/Keyb

Keyb/Mouse

Mouse/Keyb

Keyb/Mouse

Touch 1

Touch 2

GM

DtOut1

DtOut2

Oper.

Mode

Setting

C S M

x x x x x x x x x x

Same Display

1

Same Display

1

Same Display

1

Same Display

1

Same Display

1

Same Display

1

Same Display

1

n/a n/a n/a

1.Setting available on MP90 monitors with multiple main displays only.

180

Hardware Settings

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Configuring SRR Channels

X2/MP2/

MP5 only

Hardware Setting: Main Setup -> Hardware -> SRR Channel

SRR channel settings only apply for monitors that have a short range radio interface installed. They must be set to match the hospital’s wireless infrastructure. SRR channel settings are hardware settings and will be set by service personnel at installation.

Factory Defaults

Item Name

Channel

Oper.

Mode

X2/MP2/MP5

C S M

x x 11

SRR Channel Settings Configuration Implications

Channel

Use this setting to configure the SRR channel the monitor should use. SRR provides a total of

16 channels in the ISM (2.4 GHz) band. The ISM band is not exclusively reserved for SRR applications. It is also used by, for example, the 2.4 GHz Wireless LAN (WLAN), the 2.4 GHz IntelliVue Telemetry network, Bluetooth devices, and cordless phones using the 2.4GHz ISM band. Depending on the hospital’s existing wireless infrastructure, a number of SRR channels might already be occupied by other wireless applications.

For detailed instructions on setting up SRR channels in a new or existing wireless infrastructure, refer to the IntelliVue Service Guide and contact a Philips service representative.

Configuring Wireless LAN Settings

MP2-90 only

Hardware Setting: Main Setup -> Network -> Setup WLAN

Wireless LAN settings only apply for monitors that have a Wireless LAN interface installed. They must be set to match the hospital’s wireless infrastructure (access point, wireless switch, etc.). Wireless LAN

Settings are hardware settings and will typically be set by service personnel at installation.

Note: Unlike other hardware settings, Wireless LAN settings need to be manually stored to make them effective. Use the Store entry in the Setup Wireless LAN menu to do so.

Wireless LAN settings can also be configured using the IntelliVue Support Tool.

Factory Defaults

Item Name

Country

1

IP Address

1

Mode

SSID

Security Mode

Oper.

Mode

MP2 - MP90

C S M

x x x x x x x x

1000

0.0.0.0

none

BMWLANICN

WPA(PSK)

181

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Hardware Settings

Factory Defaults

Item Name

WPA Password

2

WEP Key Size

3

WEP Key

3

WEP Key Index

3

x x

Oper.

Mode

MP2 - MP90

C S M

x x x x x x

BMWLANICNPSK

104

BMWLANICNWEP1

1

1.Setting available in service mode only.

2.Setting available only if Security mode is set to WPA.

3.Setting available only if Security mode is set to WEP.

WLAN Configuration Implications

Country

This setting is available in service mode only. The recommended value is 1000. If set to this value, the monitor automatically adjusts the regulatory domain to match the configuration of the infrastructure.

IP Address

This setting is available in service mode only. See the IntelliVue Service Guide for details.

Mode

This lets you select the WLAN IEEE 802.11 mode that the hospital is using, such as

802.11Ah, 802.11G

or 802.11bg.

SSID

(Service Set ID) This is a security setting and will typically be configured by service personnel at installation.

Security Mode

Another security setting that will typically be configured by service personnel at installation. It is recommended to use WPA-PSK.

WPA Password

A security setting that will typically be configured by service personnel at installation.

It is available only if Security Mode is set to WPA. The four stars (****) that you see in the menu are a placeholder for the actual password. They do not indicate that the password is only four characters in length.

WEP Key A security setting that will typically be configured by service personnel at installation. It is available only if Security Mode is set to WEP. The four stars (****) that you see in the menu are a placeholder for the actual password. They do not indicate that the password is only four characters in length.

WEP Key Size/WEP Key Index

Security settings that will typically be configured by service personnel at installation. These settings are available only if Security Mode is set to WEP.

182

Hardware Settings

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Configuring Bed Information Settings

Hardware Setting: Main Setup -> Bed Information

Item Name

Equipment Label

Hospital Label

IP Address

Subnet Mask

Default Gateway

IGMP

CI Mode

CI Address

CI TTL

Oper.

Mode

MP2 - MP90

MP5T

C S M

X2

x x x x x x x x x x x

<empty>

<empty>

0.0.0.0

0.0.0.0

0.0.0.0

Off

Broadcast

0.0.0.0

1

Bed Information Configuration Implications

Equipment Label

The equipment label must be entered for each individual monitor. It is stored with the monitor, it is not cloned. If the monitor is connected to an Information Center, the equipment label on the bedside monitor is the equivalent of the monitor label on the Information Center. These labels must match exactly. The maximum length for the equipment label is 16 characters; Note that as the

IntelliVue Information Center will display only up to 12 characters, if your monitor will be connected to an Information Center, you should use labels not longer than 12 characters.

Hospital Label

The hospital label must be entered for each individual monitor. It is stored with the monitor, it is not cloned. Note that as an Information Center will display only up to 12 characters, if your monitor will be connected to an Information Center, you should use labels not longer than 12 characters.

The maximum length for the hospital label is 30 characters.

IP Address

This setting will typically be configured by service personnel at installation. See the

IntelliVue Service Guide for details.

Subnet Mask

This setting will typically be configured by service personnel at installation. See the

IntelliVue Service Guide for details.

Default Gateway

This setting will typically be configured by service personnel at installation. See the IntelliVue Service Guide for details.

IGMP

This setting will typically be configured by service personnel at installation. See the IntelliVue

Service Guide for details.

CI Mode

This setting will typically be configured by service personnel at installation. See the IntelliVue

Service Guide for details.

CI Address

This setting will typically be configured by service personnel at installation. See the

IntelliVue Service Guide for details.

183

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Monitor Database Configuration

CI TTL

This setting will typically be configured by service personnel at installation. See the IntelliVue

Service Guide for details.

Monitor Database Configuration

Main Setup -> Databases -> Database Config

The monitor’s database is divided into sections that store events, trends, calculations, and print information separately. In config mode, you can configure the size of the trends, events, and print sections to suit your monitoring needs. The calculations database always stores up to 50 calculations, this configuration cannot be changed. The overall database size is defined by the purchased database option.

1

2

Select Main Setup -> Databases -> Database Config to enter the Database

Configurations

menu.

To configure the database, a. you can use the pop-up keys to change the overall database configuration,

– Select the Select Smallest pop-up key to select the configuration that takes up least database space. This setting applies across all database sections.

– Select the Select Default pop-up key to return to the default configuration.

– Select the Select Active pop-up key to return to the configuration that was loaded prior to your changes. This cancels any changes you have made.

OR

3

b. you can use the menu items to change individual sections of the database.

Trends: in the Database Configurations menu, the currently active database configuration is shown, for example, the entry 32P [email protected] [email protected] [email protected] tells you that the trends section of the database contains trend information on 32 measurement parameters from the past 4 hours at a resolution of 12 seconds, from the past 24 hours at a resolution of 1 minute, and from the past 48 hours at a resolution of 5 minutes.

To change the setting, select the database section you wish to change, then select the required configuration from the list of available settings.

Event Surveillance: In the Database Configurations menu, select Event

Surveillance

, then select the event database configuration you require from the list of available configurations.

Print Database: In the Database Configurations menu, select Print Database, then select the database configuration you require from the list of available configurations.

Select the Store Config pop-up key to store your changes. You will be prompted to confirm this action. Selecting Confirm stores your changes.

CAUTION

Selecting the Store Config pop-up key causes a coldstart, i.e. it discharges the patient, resets all settings to the default profile, and erases all information in the database. The monitor will automatically be switched off and then on again.

184

Monitor Database Configuration

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Trend Database

This table illustrates the default trend database configurations for the different H and database options:

Default Trend Database Configurations

Database

Option

MP2 - MP90, MP5T, X2

H10 / H40

Standard

Database

Extended

Database

(Option

C03)

H20 H30

No. of

Parameters

Period Resolution No. of

Parameters

Period Resolution No. of

Parameters

Period Resolution

16

16

16

32

32

32

4 h 12 sec

24 h 1 min

48 h 5 min

4 h 12 sec

24 h 1 min

48 h 5 min

12

12

12

24

24

24

9 h 12 sec

24 h 1 min

24 h 5 min

9 h 12 sec

24 h 1 min

24 h 5 min

16

16

16

32

32

32

5 h 12 sec

24 h 1 min

24 h 5 min

5 h 12 sec

24 h 1 min

24 h 5 min

Additional Configurations for the Standard Database

Option H20

• 16 Parameters [email protected], [email protected], [email protected]

Option H30

• 16 Parameters [email protected], [email protected], [email protected]

Additional Configurations for the Extended Database Option (C03)

MP60-90 only

Option H10/H40

• 32 Parameters [email protected], [email protected], [email protected]

• 24 Parameters [email protected], [email protected]

Option H20

• 24 Parameters [email protected], [email protected], [email protected]

• 12 Parameters [email protected], 24h @1min, 24h @5min

Option H30

• 32 Parameters [email protected], [email protected], [email protected]

• 24 Parameters [email protected], [email protected], [email protected]

Aperiodic Trend Database

The IntelliVue patient monitor provides a second trend database exclusively reserved for aperiodic parameters. Aperiodic parameters are parameters that are measured intermittently, such as NBP, C.O.,

C.I., PAWP (Wedge), manually entered measurements, or lab results from external devices obtained from the VueLink or IntelliBridge plug-in module.

185

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Monitor Database Configuration

The aperiodic database can store a maximum of 200 individual measurements, with NBP measurements not counting towards that total number.

Note that the information stored in the aperiodic database does not contribute to the maximum number of parameters as defined by the monitor’s database option (Standard or #C03). This means that aperiodic parameters do not count towards the max. number of trended parameters allowed and therefore do not

have to be considered when configuring the Trend Priorities, see "Configuring Trend Priorities" on page

122.

Event Surveillance Database

This table illustrates the default event database configurations available with different event options:

Database capability

Option C06, Basic

Event Surveillance

Option C07, Advanced Event

Surveillance

None None

25 events for 24 hours 25 events for 24 hours

25 events for 8 hours

50 events for 8 hours

50 events for 24 hours

Option C04, Neonatal Event

Review (NER)

None

25 events for 24 hours

25 events for 8 hours

50 events for 8 hours

50 events for 24 hours

Print Database

Default Print Database Configurations

Options MP20 - MP90 MP2/X2

MP5

Large

Database capability

Small

Report types differ considerably in their storage space requirements. ECG Reports, for example, are large reports and require much space, whereas VitalsReports are much smaller. Therefore, it cannot be clearly specified how many reports can be stored in the print database.

With Print Database set to Small, it can, for example, store about five 3x4 ECG Reports, but only one 12x1 ECG Report.

The Large database is only recommended for monitors used in transport. It is about four times larger than the Small database and can store more reports accordingly. Note that the Large database might not be available for selection if the Event Surveillance database and the Trend database are configured to large sizes.

To disable the Print Database, set it to None.

186

H Option-Specific Settings

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

H Option-Specific Settings

Depending on the H option installed on the monitor, the following settings may be affected regardless of the configuration file loaded onto the monitor:

• Default trend database option and available trend database options, see "Trend Database" on page 185.

• Supported HighResolution Waves, see "Changing the Content of a High Resolution Trend Element" on page 19.

• Support for gas analyzer: only H30 supports the use of a gas analyzer with the IntelliVue monitor.

• Activated Event Groups, see "Configuring Event Surveillance" on page 126.

• Monitor name on Boot/Standby Screen:

– H10: The Philips Critical Care Patient Monitor ...

– H20: The Philips Neonatal Patient Monitor ...

– H30: The Philips Anesthesia Patient Monitor ...

– H40: The Philips Critical/Cardiac Care Patient Monitor ...

187

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Release-Specific Information

Release-Specific Information

G.0 Configuration Changes

For IntelliVue patient monitor Release G.0, the initial configuration settings were modified compared to

Release F.0. These changes are documented below. The table lists new settings, settings which have been renamed, and settings for which the defaults have been changed.

The changes are listed based on the monitor model and option. No ’x’ indicates that the change does not apply for the related model/option between F.0 and G.0.

New or renamed settings in G.0

Settings with changed defaults in G.0

(Text in brackets shows F.0 setting/default)

ECG

ECG/Pulse

Alarms

ECG Al. Off Inop

(ALL ECG IN.)

ECG/Arrhy Alarms

(ECG Alarms)

Arrhythmia

Afib

HR Alarms

SpO

2

SOME ECG... Inop

(SOME ECG IN)

SpO

2 pr, SpO

2 po

Mode

Type of change

Setting Renamed

Setting Renamed

New Setting

New Setting

Setting Renamed

Signal Quality

Average in Mon.

New Labels

New Setting

New Setting

New Setting

Invasive Pressure

(all labels)

Extreme Alarms: Disabled

(Enabled)

Label

SO

2

/ SvO

2

/

ScvO

2

SO

2

/ScvO

2

High Limit

Low Limit

Default Changed

New Setting

New Setting

New Setting

Resp

INOP Severity

Alarms

Light Intensity

Hb/Hct Entry

Color

New Setting

New Setting

New Setting

New Setting

Detection (Auto/Manual) Setting Renamed

Replace TeleBatt

BattReplace Tele)

Tele Disconnect.

Setting Renamed

New Setting

Occlusion New Setting x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

MP20 - 90 MP20 MP5 MP2/

X2

H10 H20 H30 H40 #M20

#M21

All H

Options

x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

188

Release-Specific Information

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

New or renamed settings in G.0

Settings with changed defaults in G.0

(Text in brackets shows F.0 setting/default)

Histogram

Window

Data Source

Period

ECG QT Report

Report Type

Report Size

Type of change

New Setting

New Setting

New Setting

New Setting

Orientation

Target Device

Histogram Report Report Type

Report Size

Reports

Trend Groups:

Standard

Trend Groups

Trend Groups:

External Device

Parameter Scales

Orientation

Target Device

New Setting

New Setting

New Setting

New Setting

New Setting

New Setting

Auto Print Dbs New Setting

HR, SpO

2

, SpO

2 pr,

SpO

2

po, SpO

2

NBP / CO

r, SpO

2 l /

2

, RR, awRR /

Any Press / Any Temp

(HR, SpO

2

, SpO

2

l, SpO

2

r

/ NBP / CO

2

, RR, awRR /

Any Press / Any Temp)

Default Changed

External Device (VueLnk) Setting Renamed

CO

2

, awRR, O

2

, FiO

2

, PIP,

TV, MINVOL, SpMV,

PEEP, pH, PCO

2

, PcO

2

,

PO

2

, MnAwP, RRaw

(CO

2

, awRR, O

2

, FiO

2

PIP, TV, MINVOL,

,

MV (ext), SpMV, PEEP, pH, PCO

2

, PcO

2

, PO

2

,

Pmean (ext), RRaw, Ppeak)

Default Changed

SpO

2

SpO

2

(SpO

2

l)

, SpO

2

r,

Perf (Perf, Perf l, Perf r)

Default Changed

Default Changed

New Setting ScvO

2

SO

2

MnAwp

New Setting

New Setting

(MV ext)

(Pmean ext)

(Ppeak)

Setting Deleted

Setting Deleted

Setting Deleted

MP20 - 90 MP20 MP5 MP2/

X2

H10 H20 H30 H40 #M20

#M21

All H

Options

x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

189

4 Configuration Settings Appendix

Release-Specific Information

New or renamed settings in G.0

Settings with changed defaults in G.0

(Text in brackets shows F.0 setting/default)

Event

Surveillance

Group Type

Protocol Watch

CVP Threshold

CVP Thresh. Unit

Global SmartKeys External Device (VueLink)

General Global

Settings

Tele Discharge

ConfirmAlarmsOff

TeleUnassign

Global Settings:

Demograph.

Fields

TAAP

Middle Name

Lifetime Id

Encounter Id

Type of change

New Setting

New Setting

New Setting

Setting Renamed

Setting Enabled for

Monitor Model

New Setting

New Setting

New Setting

New Setting

New Setting

New Setting

New Setting

New Setting

New Setting

Lifetime Id Lbl

Encounter Id Lbl

Access Rights

Global Settings:

Remote Display

Password

Standby Image

Manual Data

Entry: Labels for

General Use

T1, CVP, Glu, Hct, Hb

(Tskin, Trect, CVP)

Hardware

Data Export (2nd)

SRR

Hardware:

Multiple Display

Event Surv. Window

Hardware:

SRR Channel

Channel

Bed Information

IGMP

CI Mode

CI Address

CI TTL

New Setting

New Setting

Default Changed

New Setting

New Setting

New Setting

New Setting

New Setting

New Setting

New Setting

New Setting

MP20 - 90 MP20 MP5 MP2/

X2

H10 H20 H30 H40 #M20

#M21

All H

Options

x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

190

5

5

Screen & Profile Overview

This appendix documents the Screens and Profiles configured for each monitor model in the factory. If you make changes to Screens or Profiles, this document will no longer reflect the factory default configuration. You then must create you own reference by storing printouts and/or electronic images of the Screens you design.

In the Configuration Overview section starting on page 194, the factory default Profiles supplied with

each possible combination of options are listed.

The Screen Overview section starting on page 215 gives an overview of all initial and demo

configuration Screen names for this monitor release. To view or print bitmaps of all Screens supplied with a specific initial or demo configuration, on the Documentation DVD supplied with your

IntelliVue monitor, navigate to the folder Documentation\G.0\Configuration

Guide\Screen Configurations

and open/print the pdf document that has the same name as the required configuration file.

The initial configuration of your monitor may vary slightly depending on your geography and on the options purchased. The Screens documented here may be subject to slight changes.

About the Screen Configurations

When a Screen is created using the Support Tool, the information in the Screen is saved in two formats:

.rds: this format contains Screen information and can only be read by the Support Tool

.png: a bitmap image is created for each Screen. Each Screen field is labelled to tell you which waves, numerics, SmartKeys, and special elements such as screen trends or ST snippets have been configured onto the Screens, and a date stamp tells you when the Screen was last modified.

Application Areas

The H Option purchased with the monitor defines the clinical application area for which the Screens are designed.

– Option H10 Screens are designed for general purposes

– Option H20 Screens are designed for neonatal application areas

– Option H30 Screens are designed for anesthesia application areas

– Option H40 Screens are designed for cardiac care application areas.

191

5 Screen & Profile Overview

About the Screen Configurations

Wave Options

The A Option purchased with the monitor defines the number of waves that can be shown on any Screen.

With A12, up to twelve waves can be shown on a Screen, with A06, up to six waves can be shown, and so on.

Using the Screen Library

This Appendix lists the Screens that are supplied with the initial monitor configurations and the Screens available in the demo configuration file. The demo configuration includes Screens that feature, for example:

Screen Trends, allowing you to display trend segments embedded in the Screen. These could be entitled e.g.: G-08W-3Press-Split-ScreenTrend-xga-Rev004.rds.

ST Snippets, allowing you to display the current ST snippets superimposed over the baseline snippet permanently on the Screen. These could be entitled e.g.: C-05W-2Press-03ST-snippets-xga-Rev003.rds.

Visitors Screen, allowing you to hide all waves and numerics for the duration of visiting time. This could be entitled e.g.: G-visitor-screen01-xga-Rev005.rds

Example of SXGA Screen. This could be entitled: G-12W-1x3ovl-2x2ovl-1split-sxga-Rev004.rds

Other Screens that are not included in the config files provided by the factory can be found in the screen library of the Support Tool.

192

Sample Screen Image (.bmp)

Sample Screen Image (.bmp)

5 Screen & Profile Overview

1 2 3

4

6

5

8

7

9

11

12

10

Element, abbreviation Contains.

1

Fixed Area

2

Wave field, W

3

Numeric fields, N

4

ST snippet, ST alarm message fields, patient information, etc. Cannot be modified with the Support Tool.

wave label, e.g. “Primary Lead”.

numeric label e.g. “aligned” for numerics automatically assigned with the adjacent wave.

ST label, e.g. “ST II”.

5

SmartKey list list of SmartKeys in the order they will appear on Screen from left to right.

6

High Res Trends, HW high resolution trends label, e.g. “btbHR”.

7

Screen trends, T

8

Alignment Groups

Screen trend label, e.g. Temp. numbers in gray shaded boxes indicate different alignment groups

9

Fixed Area Permanent Keys, current operating mode, monitor status prompts. Cannot be modified with Support Tool.

10 Smart Key area, SKA SmartKeys in the order listed at 5.

11 Filename and path

12 Checksum the Screen filename and the path on the harddrive where the Screen was stored. The .rds format contains the Screen itself, the .bmp format contains the reference image.

Unique identifier for the Screen

193

5 Screen & Profile Overview

MP60/MP70/MP80/MP90 Configuration Overview

MP60/MP70/MP80/MP90 Configuration Overview

Option H10

The H10 initial configuration filename is H10 Axx, XGA, MP60-90, initial, G.0x.xx, Rev xxx.cfg.

Profiles

Profile

Name

Adult

Pedi

Neo

Default Locked

yes no no yes yes yes

Patient

Cat.

Adult

Pedi

Neo

Paced Mode Display 1

Paced

Non-Paced

Non-Paced

Screen A

Screen A

Screen A

Display 2

(MP90 only)

Screen A

Screen A

Screen A

Monitor

Settings Block

Monitor A

Monitor A

Monitor A

Meas.

Settings Block

Measmt. Adult

Measmt. Pedi

Measmt. Neo

Monitor Settings Blocks

Name

Monitor A

Locked

yes

Measurement Settings Blocks

Name

Measmt. Adult

Measmt. Pedi

Measmt. Neo

Locked

yes yes yes

Screens

A12 Locked A08

Service A

Screen A

Screen B

Screen C

Screen D

Screen E

Screen F no no no no no no no

Service A

Screen A

Screen B

Screen C

Screen D

Screen E

Screen F

ProtocolWatch no

Horizon

ProtocolWatch no Horizon

Big Numerics

12 Lead ECG

Visitors no no

Big Numerics

12 Lead ECG no Visitors

Locked A06 Locked A04 Locked

no no no no no no no no

Service A

Screen A

Screen B no no no

Service A

Screen A

Screen B no no no

Screen C

Screen D

Screen E no

ProtocolWatch no

Horizon no no

ProtocolWatch

Horizon

Big Numerics

EEG CSA no Visitors no no no no no no no

EEG CSA

12 Lead ECG no Visitors no no no

194

MP60/MP70/MP80/MP90 Configuration Overview

5 Screen & Profile Overview

Option H20

The H20 initial configuration filename is H20 Axx, XGA, MP60-90, initial, G.0x.xx, Rev xxx.cfg.

Profiles

Profile

Name

Default Locked

Patient

Cat.

Neo

Pedi yes no yes yes

Neo

Pedi

Paced Mode Display 1

Non-Paced A12: OxyCRG A

Non-Paced

A08: OxyCRG A

A06: OxyCRG A

A04: OxyCRG

Display 2

(MP90 only)

A12: OxyCRG A

A08: OxyCRG A

A06: OxyCRG A

A04: OxyCRG

Monitor

Settings Block

Meas.

Settings Block

Monitor A

Monitor A

Measmt. Neo

Measmt. Pedi

Monitor Settings Blocks

Name

Monitor A

Locked

yes

Measurement Settings Blocks

Name

Measmt. Neo

Measmt. Pedi

Locked

yes yes

Screens

A12 Locked A08

Service A

OxyCRG A

OxyCRG B

OxyCRG C

Screen A

Screen B

Screen C no no no no no no no

Service A

OxyCRG A

OxyCRG B

Screen A

Screen B

Screen C

Screen D

ProtocolWatch no

Horizon no

Big Numerics no

12 Lead ECG no

Visitors

ProtocolWatch

Horizon

Big Numerics

12 Lead ECG no Visitors

Locked A06

no no no no no no no

Service A

OxyCRG A

OxyCRG B

Screen A

Screen B

Screen C

Screen D no no no no

ProtocolWatch

Horizon

Big Numerics

12 Lead ECG no Visitors

Locked A04 Locked

no no no no no no no

Service A

OxyCRG

Screen A no no no no no

EEG CSA

12 Lead ECG

Visitors no no no

Screen B no

ProtocolWatch no

Horizon

Big Numerics no no no no no

195

5 Screen & Profile Overview

MP60/MP70/MP80/MP90 Configuration Overview

Option H30

The H30 initial configuration filename is H30 Axx, XGA, MP60-90, initial, G.0x.xx, Rev xxx.cfg.

Profiles

Profile

Name

Default Locked

Adult yes

Pedi

Neo no no yes yes yes

Patient

Cat.

Adult

Pedi

Neo

Paced Mode Display 1

Display 2

(MP90 only)

Paced

Non-Paced

Non-Paced

Screen A A12: Screen E

Screen A

Screen A

A08: Screen D

A06: Screen B

A04: Screen B

Monitor

Settings Block

Meas.

Settings Block

Monitor A

Monitor A

Monitor A

Measmt. Adult

Measmt. Pedi

Measmt. Neo

Monitor Settings Blocks

Name

Monitor A

Locked

yes

Measurement Settings Blocks

Name

Measmt. Adult

Measmt. Pedi

Measmt. Neo

Locked

yes yes yes

Screens

A12

Service A

Screen A

Screen B

Screen C

Screen D

Screen E

Screen F

ProtocolWatch

Horizon

Big Numerics

12 Lead ECG

Visitors

Locked A08

no no no no no no no

Service A

Screen A

Screen B

Screen C

Screen D

Screen E

Screen F no ProtocolWatch no Horizon no no

Big Numerics

12 Lead ECG no Visitors

Locked A06

no no no no no no no

Service A

Screen A

Screen B

Screen C

Screen D

Screen E

Screen F no ProtocolWatch no Horizon no no

Big Numerics

12 Lead ECG no Visitors

Locked A04

no no no no no no no

Service A

Screen A

Screen B

Screen C

ProtocolWatch

Horizon

Big Numerics no no no no

12 Lead ECG

Visitors

Locked

no no no no no no no no no no

196

MP60/MP70/MP80/MP90 Configuration Overview

5 Screen & Profile Overview

Option H40

The H40 initial configuration filename is H40 Axx, XGA, MP60-90, initial, G.0x.xx, Rev xxx.cfg.

Profiles

Profile

Name

Adult

Pedi

Neo

Default Locked

yes no no yes yes yes

Patient

Cat.

Adult

Pedi

Neo

Paced Mode Display 1

Paced Screen A

Non-Paced Screen A

Non-Paced Screen A

Display 2

(MP90 only)

Monitor

Settings Block

Meas.

Settings Block

12 Lead ECG Monitor A

12 Lead ECG Monitor A

12 Lead ECG Monitor A

Measmt. Adult

Measmt. Pedi

Measmt. Neo

Monitor Settings Blocks

Name

Monitor A

Locked

yes

Measurement Settings Blocks

Name

Measmt. Adult

Measmt. Pedi

Measmt. Neo

Locked

yes yes yes

Screens

A12

Service A

Screen A

Screen B

Screen C

Screen D

Screen E

Screen F

ProtocolWatch

Horizon

Big Numerics

12 Lead ECG

Visitors

Locked A08

no no no no no no no no

Service A

Screen A

Screen B

Screen C

Screen D

Screen E

Screen F

ProtocolWatch no Horizon no Big Numerics no 12 Lead ECG no Visitors

Locked A06

no no no no no no no no no no

Locked A04 Locked

Service A

Screen A

Screen B

Screen C no no no no

Screen D

Screen E no no

ProtocolWatch no

Horizon no

EEG CSA no Visitors no

Horizon

Big Numerics no no

EEG CSA no

12 Lead ECG no no

12 Lead ECG no no

Service A

Screen A no no

Screen B no

ProtocolWatch no

197

5 Screen & Profile Overview

MP40/MP50 Configuration Overview

MP40/MP50 Configuration Overview

Option H10

The H10 initial configuration filename is H10 Axx, SVGA, MP40-50, initial, G.0x.xx, Rev xxx.cfg.

Profiles

Profile

Name

Adult

Pedi

Neo

Default Locked

yes no no yes yes yes

Patient

Cat.

Adult

Pedi

Neo

Paced Mode

Paced

Non-Paced

Non-Paced

Display

Monitor

Settings Block

Screen A Monitor A

Screen A Monitor A

Screen A Monitor A

Meas.

Settings Block

Measmt. Adult

Measmt. Pedi

Measmt. Neo

Monitor Settings Blocks

Name

Monitor A

Locked

yes

Measurement Settings Blocks

Name

Measmt. Adult

Measmt. Pedi

Measmt. Neo

Locked

yes yes yes

Screens

A08 Locked A06 Locked A04

Service A

Screen A

Screen B

Screen C

Screen D

Screen E

Screen F

Screen G no no no no no no no no

Service A

Screen A

Screen B

Screen C

Screen D

Screen E

Screen F

Screen G no no no no no no no no

Service A

Screen A

Screen B

Screen C

Screen D

Screen E

Screen F

Screen G

ProtocolWatch no

Horizon

ProtocolWatch no Horizon no ProtocolWatch no Horizon

Big Numerics

12 Lead ECG

Visitors no no

Big Numerics

12 Lead ECG no Visitors no no

Big Numerics

12 Lead ECG no Visitors

Locked

no no no no no no no no no no no no no

198

MP40/MP50 Configuration Overview

5 Screen & Profile Overview

Option H20

The H20 initial configuration filename is H20 Axx, SVGA, MP40-50, initial, G.0x.xx, Rev xxx.cfg.

Profiles

Profile

Name

Default Locked

Neo

Pedi yes no yes yes

Patient

Cat.

Neo

Pedi

Paced Mode Display

Non-Paced A08: OxyCRG A

Non-Paced

A06: OxyCRG A

A04: OxyCRG

Monitor

Settings Block

Meas.

Settings Block

Monitor A

Monitor A

Measmt. Neo

Measmt. Pedi

Monitor Settings Blocks

Name

Monitor A

Locked

yes

Measurement Settings Blocks

Name

Measmt. Neo

Measmt. Pedi

Locked

yes yes

Screens

A08 Locked A06 Locked A04 Locked

Service A

OxyCRG A

OxyCRG B

Screen A

Screen B

Screen C

Screen D no no no no no no no

Service A

OxyCRG A

OxyCRG B

Screen A

Screen B

Screen C

Screen D no no no no no no no

Service A

OxyCRG

Screen A

Screen B

Screen C

Screen D

Screen E no no no no no no no

Screen E no

ProtocolWatch no

Horizon

Big Numerics no

Screen E no

ProtocolWatch no no Horizon

Big Numerics no

Screen F no Horizon

Big Numerics no

ProtocolWatch no no no

12 Lead ECG no

Visitors

12 Lead ECG no Visitors no 12 Lead ECG no Visitors no no

199

5 Screen & Profile Overview

MP40/MP50 Configuration Overview

Option H30

The H30 initial configuration filename is H30 Axx, SVGA, MP40-50, initial, G.0x.xx, Rev xxx.cfg.

Profiles

Profile

Name

Default Locked

Adult yes

Pedi

Neo no no yes yes yes

Patient

Cat.

Adult

Pedi

Neo

Paced Mode Display

Paced Screen A

Non-Paced Screen A

Non-Paced Screen A

Monitor

Settings Block

Meas.

Settings Block

Monitor A

Monitor A

Monitor A

Measmt. Adult

Measmt. Pedi

Measmt. Neo

Monitor Settings Blocks

Name

Monitor A

Locked

yes

Measurement Settings Blocks

Name

Measmt. Adult

Measmt. Pedi

Measmt. Neo

Locked

yes yes yes

Screens

A08

Service A

Screen A

Screen B

Screen C

Screen D

Screen E

Screen F

Screen G

ProtocolWatch

Horizon

Big Numerics

12 Lead ECG

Visitors

Locked A06

no no no no no no no no

Service A

Screen A

Screen B

Screen C

Screen D

Screen E

Screen F

Screen G no ProtocolWatch no Horizon no no

Big Numerics

12 Lead ECG no Visitors

Locked A04

no no no no no no no no no

Service A

Screen A

Screen B

Screen C

Screen D

Screen E

Screen F

Screen G

ProtocolWatch no no

Big Numerics

12 Lead ECG

Locked

no no no no no no no no no no no no no

200

MP40/MP50 Configuration Overview

5 Screen & Profile Overview

Option H40

The H40 initial configuration filename is H40 Axx, SVGA, MP40-50, initial, G.0x.xx, Rev xxx.cfg.

Profiles

Profile

Name

Default Locked

Adult yes

Pedi no

Neo no yes yes yes

Patient

Cat.

Adult

Pedi

Neo

Paced Mode Display

Paced Screen A

Non-Paced Screen A

Non-Paced Screen A

Monitor

Settings Block

Meas.

Settings Block

Monitor A

Monitor A

Monitor A

Measmt. Adult

Measmt. Pedi

Measmt. Neo

Monitor Settings Blocks

Name

Monitor A

Locked

yes

Measurement Settings Blocks

Name

Measmt. Adult

Measmt. Pedi

Measmt. Neo

Locked

yes yes yes

Screens

A08

Service A

Screen A

Screen B

Screen C

Screen D

Screen E

Screen F

Screen G

ProtocolWatch

Horizon

Big Numerics

12 Lead ECG

Visitors

Locked A06

no no no no no no no no

Service A

Screen A

Screen B

Screen C

Screen D

Screen E

Screen F

Screen G no ProtocolWatch no Horizon no no

Big Numerics

12 Lead ECG no Visitors

Locked A04

no no no no no no no no

Service A

Screen A

Screen B

Screen C

Screen D

Screen E

Screen F

Screen G no ProtocolWatch no Horizon no no

Big Numerics

12 Lead ECG no Visitors

Locked

no no no no no no no no no no no no no

201

5 Screen & Profile Overview

MP20/MP30 Configuration Overview

MP20/MP30 Configuration Overview

For an overview of the configurations supplied with the models MP20 Junior and MP20L, see “MP20

Junior & MP20L Configuration Overview” on page 206.

Option H10

The H10 initial configuration filename is H10 Axx, SVGA, MP20-30, initial, G.0x.xx, Rev xxx.cfg.

Screens

A06

Service A

Screen A

Screen B

Screen C

Screen D

Screen E

Screen F

Screen G

Horizon

Big Numerics

12 Lead ECG

Visitors

Profiles

Profile

Name

Adult

Pedi

Neo

Default Locked

yes no no yes yes yes

Patient

Cat.

Adult

Pedi

Neo

Paced Mode

Paced

Non-Paced

Non-Paced

Display

Monitor

Settings Block

Screen A Monitor A

Screen A Monitor A

Screen A Monitor A

Meas.

Settings Block

Measmt. Adult

Measmt. Pedi

Measmt. Neo

Monitor Settings Blocks

Name

Monitor A

Locked

yes

Measurement Settings Blocks

Name

Measmt. Adult

Measmt. Pedi

Measmt. Neo

Locked

yes yes yes

Locked A04

no no no no no no no no

Service A

Screen A

Screen B

Screen C

Screen D

Screen E

Screen F

Screen G no Horizon no Big Numerics no 12 Lead ECG no Visitors

Locked A03

no no no no no no no no

Service A

Screen A

Screen B

Screen C

Screen D

Screen E

Screen F

Screen G no Horizon no Big Numerics no 12 Lead ECG no Visitors

Locked

no no no no no no no no no no no no

202

MP20/MP30 Configuration Overview

5 Screen & Profile Overview

Option H20

The H20 initial configuration filename is H20 Axx, SVGA, MP20-30, initial, G.0x.xx, Rev xxx.cfg.

Profiles

Profile

Name

Pedi

Neo

Default Locked

no no yes yes

Patient

Cat.

Pedi

Neo

Paced Mode Display

Non-Paced

Non-Paced

A06: OxyCRG A

A04: OxyCRG

A03: CRG

Monitor

Settings Block

Meas.

Settings Block

Monitor A

Monitor A

Measmt. Pedi

Measmt. Neo

Monitor Settings Blocks

Name

Monitor A

Locked

yes

Measurement Settings Blocks

Name

Measmt. Pedi

Measmt. Neo

Locked

yes yes

Screens

A06

Service A

OxyCRG A

OxyCRG B

Screen A

Screen B

Screen C

Screen D

Screen E

Horizon

Big Numerics

12 Lead ECG

Visitors

Locked A04

no no no no no no no

Service A

OxyCRG

Screen A

Screen B

Screen C

Screen D

Screen E no Screen F no Horizon no no

Big Numerics

12 Lead ECG no Visitors

Locked

no no no no no no no no no no

A03

Service A

CRG

Screen A

Screen B

Screen C

Screen D

Screen E

Screen F

Big Numerics

12 Lead ECG

Locked

no no no no no no no no no no no no

203

5 Screen & Profile Overview

MP20/MP30 Configuration Overview

Option H30

The H30 initial configuration filename is H30 Axx, SVGA, MP20-30, initial, G.0x.xx, Rev xxx.cfg.

Screens

A06

Service A

Screen A

Screen B

Screen C

Screen D

Screen E

Screen F

Screen G

Horizon

Big Numerics

12 Lead ECG

Visitors

Profiles

Profile

Name

Adult

Pedi

Neo

Default Locked

yes no no yes yes yes

Patient

Cat.

Adult

Pedi

Neo

Paced Mode

Paced

Non-Paced

Non-Paced

Display

Monitor

Settings Block

Screen A Monitor A

Screen A Monitor A

Screen A Monitor A

Meas.

Settings Block

Measmt. Adult

Measmt. Pedi

Measmt. Neo

Monitor Settings Blocks

Name

Monitor A

Locked

yes

Measurement Settings Blocks

Name

Measmt. Adult

Measmt. Pedi

Measmt. Neo

Locked

yes yes yes

Locked A04

no no no no no no no no

Service A

Screen A

Screen B

Screen C

Screen D

Screen E

Screen F

Screen G no Horizon no Big Numerics no 12 Lead ECG no Visitors

Locked A03

no no no no no no no no

Service A

Screen A

Screen B

Screen C

Screen D

Screen E

Screen F

Screen G no Horizon no Big Numerics no 12 Lead ECG no Visitors

Locked

no no no no no no no no no no no no

204

MP20/MP30 Configuration Overview

5 Screen & Profile Overview

Option H40

The H40 initial configuration filename is H40 Axx, SVGA, MP20-30, initial, G.0x.xx, Rev xxx.cfg.

Screens

A06

Service A

Screen A

Screen B

Screen C

Screen D

Screen E

Screen F

Screen G

Horizon

Big Numerics

12 Lead ECG

Visitors

Profiles

Profile

Name

Adult

Pedi

Neo

Default Locked

yes no no yes yes yes

Patient

Cat.

Adult

Pedi

Neo

Paced Mode

Paced

Non-Paced

Non-Paced

Display

Monitor

Settings Block

Screen A Monitor A

Screen A Monitor A

Screen A Monitor A

Meas.

Settings Block

Measmt. Adult

Measmt. Pedi

Measmt. Neo

Monitor Settings Blocks

Name

Monitor A

Locked

yes

Measurement Settings Blocks

Name

Measmt. Adult

Measmt. Pedi

Measmt. Neo

Locked

yes yes yes

Locked A04

no no no no no no no no

Service A

Screen A

Screen B

Screen C

Screen D

Screen E

Screen F

Screen G no Horizon no Big Numerics no 12 Lead ECG no Visitors

Locked A03

no no no no no no no no

Service A

Screen A

Screen B

Screen C

Screen D

Screen E

Screen F

Screen G no Horizon no Big Numerics no 12 Lead ECG no Visitors

Locked

no no no no no no no no no no no no

205

5 Screen & Profile Overview

MP20 Junior & MP20L Configuration Overview

MP20 Junior & MP20L Configuration Overview

MP20L is available in the US only.

Option H10

The H10 initial configuration filename is:

• for the MP20 Junior: H10 A03 M20, SVGA, MP20, initial, G.0x.xx, Rev xxx.cfg.

• for the MP20L: H10 A03 M21, SVGA, MP20, initial, G.0x.xx, Rev xxx.cfg.

Profiles

Profile

Name

Adult

Pedi

Neo

Default Locked

yes no no yes yes yes

Patient

Cat.

Adult

Pedi

Neo

Paced Mode

Paced

Non-Paced

Non-Paced

Display

Monitor

Settings Block

Screen A Monitor A

Screen A Monitor A

Screen A Monitor A

Meas.

Settings Block

Measmt. Adult

Measmt. Pedi

Measmt. Neo

Monitor Settings Blocks

Name

Monitor A

Locked

yes

Measurement Settings Blocks

Name

Measmt. Adult

Measmt. Pedi

Measmt. Neo

Locked

yes yes yes

Screens:

MP20 Junior (#M20)

A03

Service A

Screen A

Screen B

Big Numerics

Screen C

Screen D

Screen E

Screen F

Screen G

12 Lead ECG

Locked

no no no no no no no no no no

MP20L (#M21)

A03

Service A

Screen A

Screen B

Big Numerics

Locked

no no no no

206

MP20 Junior & MP20L Configuration Overview

Option H20 (MP20 Junior only)

The H20 initial configuration filename for the MP20 Junior is:

H20 A03 M20, SVGA, MP20, initial, G.0x.xx, Rev xxx.cfg.

Profiles

Profile

Name

Pedi

Neo

Default Locked

no no yes yes

Patient

Cat.

Pedi

Neo

Paced Mode Display

Non-Paced

Non-Paced

A03: Screen A

5 Screen & Profile Overview

Monitor

Settings Block

Meas.

Settings Block

Monitor A

Monitor A

Measmt. Pedi

Measmt. Neo

Monitor Settings Blocks

Name

Monitor A

Locked

yes

Measurement Settings Blocks

Name

Measmt. Pedi

Measmt. Neo

Locked

yes yes

Screens

A03

Service A

Screen A

Screen B

Big Numerics

Screen C

Screen D

Screen E

Screen F

Screen G

12 Lead ECG

Locked

no no no no no no no no no no

207

5 Screen & Profile Overview

MP5 Configuration Overview

MP5 Configuration Overview

Option H10

The H10 initial configuration filename is H10 Axx, SVGA, MP5, initial, G.0x.xx, Rev xxx.cfg.

Profiles

Profile

Name

Adult

Pedi

Neo

Default Locked

yes no no yes yes yes

Patient

Cat.

Adult

Pedi

Neo

Paced Mode

Paced

Non-Paced

Non-Paced

Display

Monitor

Settings Block

3 Waves Monitor A

3 Waves Monitor A

3 Waves Monitor A

Meas.

Settings Block

Measmt. Adult

Measmt. Pedi

Measmt. Neo

Monitor Settings Blocks

Name

Monitor A

Locked

yes

Measurement Settings Blocks

Name

Measmt. Adult

Measmt. Pedi

Measmt. Neo

Locked

yes yes yes

Screens

A04

Service A

1 Wave

2 Waves

3 Waves

4 Waves

Vital Signs

Split Screen A

Split Screen B

Other Bed

12 Lead ECG

Locked

no no no no no no no no no no

A03

Service A

1 Wave

2 Waves

3 Waves

Vital Signs

Split Screen

Other Bed

12 Lead ECG

Locked

no no no no no no no no

208

MP5 Configuration Overview

Option H10/B10

The H10/B10 initial configuration filename is

H10 A03, B10, SVGA, MP5, initial, G.0x.xx, Rev xxx.cfg.

5 Screen & Profile Overview

Profiles

Profile

Name

Pedi

Neo

Default Locked

no no yes yes

Patient

Cat.

Pedi

Neo

Paced Mode

Non-Paced

Non-Paced

Display

Monitor

Settings Block

3 Waves Monitor A

3 Waves Monitor A

Meas.

Settings Block

Measmt. Pedi

Measmt. Neo

Monitor Settings Blocks

Name

Monitor A

Locked

yes

Measurement Settings Blocks

Name

Measmt. Adult

Measmt. Pedi

Measmt. Neo

Locked

yes yes yes

Screens

A03

Service A

Big Numerics

1 Wave

Horizon

Vital Signs A

Vital Signs B

Other Bed

Visitors

Locked

no no no no no no no no

209

5 Screen & Profile Overview

MP5 Configuration Overview

Option H10/B11

The H10/B11 initial configuration filename is

H10 A03, B11, SVGA, MP5, initial, G.0x.xx, Rev xxx.cfg.

Profiles

Profile

Name

Pedi

Neo

Default Locked

no no yes yes

Patient

Cat.

Pedi

Neo

Paced Mode

Non-Paced

Non-Paced

Display

Monitor

Settings Block

3 Waves Monitor A

3 Waves Monitor A

Meas.

Settings Block

Measmt. Pedi

Measmt. Neo

Monitor Settings Blocks

Name

Monitor A

Locked

yes

Measurement Settings Blocks

Name

Measmt. Adult

Measmt. Pedi

Measmt. Neo

Locked

yes yes yes

Screens

A03

Service A

Big Numerics

1 Wave

Horizon

Vital Signs A

Vital Signs B

Other Bed

Visitors

Locked

no no no no no no no no

210

MP5 Configuration Overview

Option H10/B14

The H10/B14 initial configuration filename is

H10 A03, B14, SVGA, MP5, initial, G.0x.xx, Rev xxx.cfg.

5 Screen & Profile Overview

Profiles

Profile

Name

Pedi

Neo

Default Locked

no no yes yes

Patient

Cat.

Pedi

Neo

Paced Mode

Non-Paced

Non-Paced

Display

Monitor

Settings Block

3 Waves Monitor A

3 Waves Monitor A

Meas.

Settings Block

Measmt. Pedi

Measmt. Neo

Monitor Settings Blocks

Name

Monitor A

Locked

yes

Measurement Settings Blocks

Name

Measmt. Adult

Measmt. Pedi

Measmt. Neo

Locked

yes yes yes

Screens

A03

Service A

Big Numerics

1 Wave A

1 Wave B

2 Waves

Horizon

Vital Signs A

Vital Signs B

Other Bed

Visitors

Locked

no no no no no no no no no no

211

5 Screen & Profile Overview

Monitor Settings Blocks

Name

Monitor A

Locked

yes

MP5 Configuration Overview

Option H20

The H20 initial configuration filename is H20 Axx, SVGA, MP5, initial, G.0x.xx, Rev xxx.cfg.

Profiles

Profile

Name

Pedi

Neo

Default Locked

no no yes yes

Patient

Cat.

Pedi

Neo

Paced Mode

Non-Paced

Non-Paced

Display

Monitor

Settings Block

3 Waves Monitor A

3 Waves Monitor A

Meas.

Settings Block

Measmt. Pedi

Measmt. Neo

Measurement Settings Blocks

Name

Measmt. Adult

Measmt. Pedi

Measmt. Neo

Locked

yes yes yes

Screens

A04

Service A

1 Wave

2 Waves

3 Waves

4 Waves

OxyCRG

Vital Signs

Split Screen A

Split Screen B

Other Bed

Locked

no no no no no no no no no no

A03

Service A

1 Wave

2 Waves

3 Waves

CRG

Vital Signs

Split Screen

Other Bed

Locked

no no no no no no no no

212

MP5T Configuration Overview

5 Screen & Profile Overview

MP5T Configuration Overview

Option H10

The initial configuration filename is H10 A03, SVGA, MP5T, initial, G.0x.xx, Rev xxx.cfg.

Profiles

Profile

Name

Adult

Pedi

Neo

Default Locked

yes no no yes yes yes

Patient

Cat.

Adult

Pedi

Neo

Paced Mode

Paced

Non-Paced

Non-Paced

Display

Monitor

Settings Block

3 Waves Monitor A

3 Waves Monitor A

3 Waves Monitor A

Meas.

Settings Block

Measmt. Adult

Measmt. Pedi

Measmt. Neo

Monitor Settings Blocks

Name

Monitor A

Locked

yes

Measurement Settings Blocks

Name

Measmt. Adult

Measmt. Pedi

Measmt. Neo

Locked

yes yes yes

Screens

Service A

1 Wave

2 Waves

3 Waves

Vital Signs

ST Map

12 Lead ECG

Locked

no no no no no no no

213

5 Screen & Profile Overview

MP2/X2 Configuration Overview

MP2/X2 Configuration Overview

The initial configuration filename for the MP2 is MP2, QVGA, initial, G.0x.xx, Rev xxx.cfg

The initial configuration filename for the X2 is X2, QVGA, initial, G.0x.xx, Rev xxx.cfg

Profiles

Profile

Name

Default Locked

Adult

Pedi yes no

Neo no

Outdoor no yes yes yes no

Patient

Cat.

Adult

Pedi

Neo

Adult

Paced Mode

Paced

Non-Paced

Non-Paced

Paced

Display

Monitor

Settings Block

1 Wave A Monitor A

1 Wave A Monitor A

1 Wave A Monitor A

1 Wave A Outdoor

Meas.

Settings Block

Measmt. Adult

Measmt. Pedi

Measmt. Neo

Outdoor

Monitor Settings Blocks

Name

Monitor A

Outdoor

Locked

yes no

Measurement Settings Blocks

Name

Measmt. Adult

Measmt. Pedi

Measmt. Neo

Outdoor

Locked

yes yes yes no

Screens

Service A

Big Numerics

10 Numerics

Vital Signs A

1 Wave A

1 Wave B

1 Big Wave

Vital Signs B

2 Waves A

2 Waves B

3 Waves

Vital Signs

Horizon

ST Map

12 Lead ECG

Visitors

Locked

no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no

214

Screen Overview

5 Screen & Profile Overview

Screen Overview

The tables starting on the next page list the file names of all Screens supplied with the initial and demo configurations for IntelliVue patient monitor release G.0. There is a section for each of the monitor models. For some of the models, you will find a list of Demo Screens available when using the demo configuration file in a monitor. These Screens are also part of the Support Tool Screen Library.

To view or print bitmaps of all Screens supplied with a specific initial or demo configuration, on the

Documentation DVD supplied with your IntelliVue monitor, navigate to the folder

Documentation\G.0\Configuration Guide\Screen Configurations\MPxx-

MPxx

and open/print the pdf document that has the same name as the required configuration file. For example if you want to print all Screens contained in the initial G.0 configuration for an MP70 with application area option H10 and wave option A08, you would open the

“H10 A08, XGA, MP60-90, initial, G.0x.xx, Rev xxx.pdf”.

Screen Overview -Table of Contents

Monitor Model Screens

MP60/70/80/90

MP40/50

MP20/30

MP60-90 Option H10 Screens

MP60-90 Option H10 Screens (continued)

MP60-90 Option H30 Screens

MP60-90 Option H40 Screens

MP60-90 Demo Configuration Screens

MP40/50 Option H10 Screens

MP40/50 Option H20 Screens

MP40/50 Option H30 Screens

MP40/50 Option H40 Screens

MP40/50 Demo Configuration Screens

MP20/30 Option H10 Screens

MP20/30 Option H20 Screens

MP20/30Option H30 Screens

MP20 Junior & MP20L

MP5

MP20/30 Option H40 Screens

MP20/30Demo Configuration Screens

MP20 M20/M21 Option H10 Screens

MP20 M20 Option H20 Screens

MP5 Option H10 Screens

MP5 Option H20 Screens

MP5 Option H30 Screens

MP5 Option H40 Screens

MP5 Demo Configuration Screens

MP5 with Options B10, B11, B14

MP5 with Options B10/B11/B14 Screens

MP5T

MP5T Screen Overview

MP2

MP2 Screen Overview

X2

X2 Screen Overview

Page

239

240

241

242

243

244

233

234

235

235

236

237

238

216

217

220

222

224

225

226

227

228

229

230

231

232

215

5 Screen & Profile Overview

MP60/MP70/MP80/MP90 Screen Overview

MP60/MP70/MP80/MP90 Screen Overview

MP60-90 Option H10 Screens

Name

Service A

Screen A

Screen B

Screen C

Screen D

Screen E

Screen F

Protocol Watch

Horizon

Big Numerics

12 Lead ECG

Visitors

H10 A12, XGA, MP90

File

S-01W-01HighRes-service_A-xga

G-12W-5Press-1x4ovl-1split01-xga

G-08W-3Press-xga

G-08W-3Press-1x3ovl-xga

G-08W-3Press-2x2ovl-xga

G-06W-2Press-xga

G-06W-2Press-1x3ovl-xga

G-04W-PW-SSC-01-xga

G-06W-Hor06Tr-01-xga

G-03W-bigNumerics-xga

C-13W-12Lead-Ovv-Split-ST-snippets-STmap-01-xga

G-00W-visitor-screen01-xga

Service A

Screen A

Screen B

Screen C

Screen D

Screen E

Screen F

Protocol Watch

Horizon

Big Numerics

12 Lead ECG

Visitors

H10 A08, XGA, MP60-90

S-01W-01HighRes-service_A-xga

G-08W-3Press-xga

G-08W-3Press-1x3ovl-xga

G-08W-3Press-2x2ovl-xga

G-06W-2Press-xga

G-06W-2Press-1x3ovl-xga

G-04W-2Press-xga

G-04W-PW-SSC-01-xga

G-06W-Hor06Tr-01-xga

G-03W-bigNumerics-xga

C-13W-12Lead-Ovv-Split-ST-snippets-STmap-01-xga

G-00W-visitor-screen01-xga

Service A

Screen A

Screen B

Screen C

Screen D

Screen E

Protocol Watch

Horizon

Big Numerics

EEG CSA

12 Lead ECG

Visitors

H10 A06, XGA, MP60-90

S-01W-01HighRes-service_A-xga

G-06W-2Press-xga

G-06W-2Press-1x2ovl-xga

G-06W-2Press-1x3ovl-xga

G-04W-2Press-xga

G-04W-2Press-1x2ovl-xga

G-04W-1Tr-PW-SSC-01-xga

G-06W-Hor06Tr-01-xga

G-03W-bigNumerics-xga

G-05W-CSA-xga

C-13W-12Lead-Ovv-Split-ST-snippets-STmap-01-xga

G-00W-visitor-screen01-xga

216

MP60/MP70/MP80/MP90 Screen Overview

5 Screen & Profile Overview

MP60-90 Option H10 Screens (continued)

Name

Service A

Screen A

Screen B

Protocol Watch

Horizon

Big Numerics

EEG CSA

12 Lead ECG

Visitors

H10 A04, XGA, MP60-90

File

S-01W-01HighRes-service_A-xga

G-04W-2Press-xga

G-04W-2Press-1x2ovl-xga

G-04W-1Tr-PW-SSC-01-xga

G-04W-Hor06Tr-01-xga

G-03W-bigNumerics-xga

G-04W-CSA-xga

C-13W-12Lead-Ovv-Split-ST-snippets-STmap-01-xga

G-00W-visitor-screen01-xga

217

5 Screen & Profile Overview

MP60/MP70/MP80/MP90 Screen Overview

MP60-90 Option H20 Screens

Name

Service A

Oxy CRG A

Oxy CRG B

Oxy CRG C

Screen A

Screen B

Screen C

Protocol Watch

Horizon

Big Numerics

12 Lead ECG

Visitors

H20 A12, XGA, MP90

File

S-01W-01HighRes-service_A-xga

N-07W-04HighRes-3split01-xga

N-03W-03HighRes-2Press-xga

N-03W-04HighRes-Events-xga

G-08W-3Press-xga

G-08W-3Press-1x3ovl-xga

G-06W-2Press-xga

G-04W-PW-SSC-01-xga

G-06W-Hor06Tr-01-xga

G-03W-bigNumerics-xga

C-13W-12Lead-Ovv-Split-ST-snippets-STmap-01-xga

G-00W-visitor-screen01-xga

Service A

Oxy CRG A

Oxy CRG B

Screen A

Screen B

Screen C

Screen D

Protocol Watch

Horizon

Big Numerics

12 Lead ECG

Visitors

H20 A08, XGA, MP60-90

S-01W-01HighRes-service_A-xga

N-03W-03HighRes-2Press-xga

N-03W-04HighRes-Events-xga

G-08W-3Press-xga

G-08W-3Press-1x3ovl-xga

G-06W-2Press-xga

G-04W-2Press-xga

G-04W-PW-SSC-01-xga

G-06W-Hor06Tr-01-xga

G-03W-bigNumerics-xga

C-13W-12Lead-Ovv-Split-ST-snippets-STmap-01-xga

G-00W-visitor-screen01-xga

Service A

Oxy CRG A

Oxy CRG B

Screen A

Screen B

Screen C

Screen D

Protocol Watch

Horizon

Big Numerics

12 Lead ECG

Visitors

H20 A06, XGA, MP60-90

S-01W-01HighRes-service_A-xga

N-02W-03HighRes-1Press-xga

N-03W-03HighRes-2Press-xga

G-06W-2Press-xga

G-06W-2Press-1x3ovl-xga

G-04W-2Press-xga

G-04W-2Press-1x2ovl-xga

G-04W-1Tr-PW-SSC-01-xga

G-06W-Hor06Tr-01-xga

G-03W-bigNumerics-xga

C-13W-12Lead-Ovv-Split-ST-snippets-STmap-01-xga

G-00W-visitor-screen01-xga

218

MP60/MP70/MP80/MP90 Screen Overview

5 Screen & Profile Overview

MP60-90 Option H20 Screens (continued)

H20 A04, XGA, MP60-90

Name

Service A

File

S-01W-01HighRes-service_A-xga

OxyCRG N-01W-03HighRes-xga

Screen A G-04W-2Press-xga

Screen B G-04W-2Press-1x2ovl-xga

Protocol Watch

Horizon

Big Numerics

G-04W-1Tr-PW-SSC-01-xga

G-04W-Hor06Tr-01-xga

G-03W-bigNumerics-xga

EEG CSA

12 Lead ECG

Visitors

G-04W-CSA-xga

C-13W-12Lead-Ovv-Split-ST-snippets-STmap-01-xga

G-00W-visitor-screen01-xga

219

5 Screen & Profile Overview

MP60/MP70/MP80/MP90 Screen Overview

MP60-90 Option H30 Screens

Name

Service A

Screen A

Screen B

Screen C

Screen D

Screen E

Screen F

Protocol Watch

Horizon

Big Numerics

12 Lead ECG

Visitors

H30 A12, XGA, MP90

File

S-01W-01HighRes-service_A-xga

A-11W-5Press-1x4ovl-2split01-1Tr-BIS-xga

A-07W-1Tr-BIS-01-xga

A-08W-3Press-1x3ovl-xga

A-08W-3Press-2x2ovl-xga

A-06W-2Press-xga

A-06W-2Press-1x3ovl-xga

G-04W-PW-SSC-01-xga

A-06W-Hor06Tr-01-xga

A-03W-BigN-BIS01-xga

A-13W-12Lead-Split-ST-snippets-STmap-01-xga

G-00W-visitor-screen01-xga

Service A

Screen A

Screen B

Screen C

Screen D

Screen E

Screen F

Protocol Watch

Horizon

Big Numerics

12 Lead ECG

Visitors

Service A

Screen A

Screen B

Screen C

Screen D

Screen E

Screen F

Protocol Watch

Horizon

Big Numerics

12 Lead ECG

Visitors

H30 A08, XGA, MP60-90

S-01W-01HighRes-service_A-xga

A-07W-1Tr-BIS-01-xga

A-08W-3Press-1x3ovl-xga

A-08W-3Press-2x2ovl-xga

A-06W-2Press-xga

A-06W-2Press-1x3ovl-xga

A-04W-2Press-xga

G-04W-PW-SSC-01-xga

A-06W-Hor06Tr-01-xga

A-03W-BigN-BIS01-xga

A-13W-12Lead-Split-ST-snippets-STmap-01-xga

G-00W-visitor-screen01-xga

H30 A06, XGA, MP60-90

S-01W-01HighRes-service_A-xga

A-04W-1Tr-BIS-01-xga

A-06W-2Press-1-xga

A-06W-2Press-1x2ovl-xga

A-06W-2Press-1x3ovl-xga

A-04W-2Press-xga

A-04W-2Press-1x2ovl-xga

G-04W-1Tr-PW-SSC-01-xga

A-06W-Hor06Tr-01-xga

A-03W-BigN-BIS01-xga

A-13W-12Lead-Split-ST-snippets-STmap-01-xga

G-00W-visitor-screen01-xga

220

MP60/MP70/MP80/MP90 Screen Overview

5 Screen & Profile Overview

MP60-90 Option H30 Screens (continued)

Name

Service A

Screen A

Screen B

Screen C

Protocol Watch

Horizon

Big Numerics

EEG CSA

12 Lead ECG

Visitors

H30 A04, XGA, MP60-90

File

S-01W-01HighRes-service_A-xga

A-04W-BIS01-xga

A-04W-2Press-1-xga

A-04W-2Press-1x2ovl-1-xga

G-04W-1Tr-PW-SSC-01-xga

A-04W-Hor06Tr-01-xga

A-03W-BigN-BIS01-xga

A-04W-CSA-xga

A-13W-12Lead-Split-ST-snippets-STmap-01-xga

G-00W-visitor-screen01-xga

221

5 Screen & Profile Overview

MP60/MP70/MP80/MP90 Screen Overview

MP60-90 Option H40 Screens

Name

Service A

Screen A

Screen B

Screen C

Screen D

Screen E

Screen F

Protocol Watch

Horizon

Big Numerics

12 Lead ECG

Visitors

H40 A12, XGA, MP90

File

S-01W-01HighRes-service_A-xga

C-12W-5Press-1x4ovl-1split01-xga

C-08W-3Press-xga

C-08W-3Press-1x3ovl-xga

C-08W-3Press-2x2ovl-xga

C-06W-2Press-xga

C-06W-2Press-1x3ovl-xga

G-04W-PW-SSC-01-xga

C-06W-Hor06Tr-01-xga

G-03W-bigNumerics-xga

C-13W-12Lead-Ovv-Split-ST-snippets-STmap-01-xga

G-00W-visitor-screen01-xga

Service A

Screen A

Screen B

Screen C

Screen D

Screen E

Screen F

Protocol Watch

Horizon

Big Numerics

12 Lead ECG

Visitors

H40 A08, XGA, MP60-90

S-01W-01HighRes-service_A-xga

C-08W-3Press-xga

C-08W-3Press-1x3ovl-xga

C-08W-3Press-2x2ovl-xga

C-06W-2Press-xga

C-06W-2Press-1x3ovl-xga

C-04W-2Press-xga

G-04W-PW-SSC-01-xga

C-06W-Hor06Tr-01-xga

G-03W-bigNumerics-xga

C-13W-12Lead-Ovv-Split-ST-snippets-STmap-01-xga

G-00W-visitor-screen01-xga

Service A

Screen A

Screen B

Screen C

Screen D

Screen E

Protocol Watch

Horizon

Big Numerics

EEG CSA

12 Lead ECG

Visitors

H40 A06, XGA, MP60-90

S-01W-01HighRes-service_A-xga

C-06W-2Press-xga

C-06W-2Press-1x2ovl-xga

C-06W-2Press-1x3ovl-xga

C-04W-2Press-xga

C-04W-2Press-1x2ovl-xga

G-04W-1Tr-PW-SSC-01-xga

C-06W-Hor06Tr-01-xga

G-03W-bigNumerics-xga

C-05W-CSA-xga

C-13W-12Lead-Ovv-Split-ST-snippets-STmap-01-xga

G-00W-visitor-screen01-xga

222

MP60/MP70/MP80/MP90 Screen Overview

5 Screen & Profile Overview

MP60-90 Option H40 Screens (continued)

Name

Service A

Screen A

Screen B

Protocol Watch

Horizon

Big Numerics

EEG CSA

12 Lead ECG

Visitors

H40 A04, XGA, MP60-90

File

S-01W-01HighRes-service_A-xga

C-04W-2Press-xga

C-04W-2Press-1x2ovl-xga

G-04W-1Tr-PW-SSC-01-xga

C-04W-Hor06Tr-01-xga

G-03W-bigNumerics-xga

C-04W-CSA-xga

C-13W-12Lead-Ovv-Split-ST-snippets-STmap-01-xga

G-00W-visitor-screen01-xga

223

5 Screen & Profile Overview

MP60/MP70/MP80/MP90 Screen Overview

MP60-90 Demo Configuration Screens

Name

Service A

Big Numerics

4 Waves A

6 Waves A

Overlapping

Split Screen

Graph Trends

HighResTrend

Vital Signs A

Horizon

Protocol Watch

2 Other Beds

Telemetry

Loops

Cardiac Output

Wedge

VueLink

12 Lead ECG

ST Segments

Remote Applic.

Visitors

DEMO, XGA, MP60-90

File

S-01W-01HighRes-service_A-xga

G-03W-bigNumerics-02-xga

G-04W-2Press-xga

A-06W-1Tr-2Press-xga

G-08W-3Press-2x2ovl-xga

G-08W-3Press-Split-ScreenTrend-xga

G-00W-8Tr-only-01-xga

N-03W-04HighRes-3Press-EventSum-xga

G-05W-2Tr-TrA-01-xga

A-06W-Hor06Tr-01-xga

G-04W-1Tr-PW-SSC-01-xga

G-04W-2Ovv02W-01-xga

G-01W-Tele02W-02-xga

G-06W-Loops-SpiroData-01-xga

A-04W-cardiacOut-xga

A-06W-wedge1-xga

A-07W-2Press-1x2ovl-VueLink-1Tr-xga

C-13W-12Lead-Ovv-Split-ST-snippets-STmap-01-xga

C-05W-2Press-03ST-snippets-xga

G-01W-PT-01-xga

G-00W-visitor-screen01-xga

Name

Service A

Overlapping

Split Screen

Graph Trends

HighResTrend

Vital Signs

Horizon

Protocol Watch

Other Bed

4 Other Beds

Telemetry

Loops

Cardiac Output

Wedge

VueLink

12 Lead ECG

Remote Applic A

Remote Applic B

Wide Screen

Tall Screen

12 Waves

DEMO, SXGA, MP90

File

S-01W-01HighRes-service_A-xga

G-08W-3Press-2x2ovl-xga

G-08W-3Press-Tr-left-split-xga

G-00W-8Tr-only-01-xga

N-03W-04HighRes-3Press-EventSum-xga

G-05W-2Tr-TrA-01-xga

G-08W-Hor06Tr-01-sxga

G-04W-PW-SSC-01-xga

G-06W-1Ovv02W-1Tr-01-xga

G-03W-4Ovv02W-Tr-left-split-sxga

G-01W-Tele02W-02-xga

G-06W-Loops-SpiroData-01-xga

A-04W-cardiacOut-xga

A-06W-wedge1-xga

A-07W-2Press-1x2ovl-VueLink-1Tr-xga

C-13W-12Lead-Ovv-Split-ST-snippets-STmap-01-xga

G-01W-PT-01-xga

G-00W-PT-Full-2nd-01-xga

G-08W-TrA-wide-10Tr-01-xga

G-07W-tall-02W-Loops-TrA-sxga

G-12W-1x3ovl-2x2ovl-1split-sxga

224

MP40/MP50 Screen Overview

MP40/MP50 Screen Overview

MP40/50 Option H10 Screens

H10 A08, SVGA, MP40-50

Name

Service A

Screen A

Screen B

Screen C

Screen D

File

S-02W-nbp-diag-svga

G-08W-3Press-01-svga

G-06W-2Press-01-svga

G-06W-2Press-1x2ovl-01-svga

G-06W-2Press-split-Tr-01-svga

Screen E

Screen F

Screen G

G-04W-1Press-01-svga

G-04W-1Press-1Tr-02-svga

G-04W-1Press-split-Tr-01-svga

Protocol Watch

Horizon

G-03W-1Tr-PW-SSC-01-svga

G-04W-Hor06Tr-01-svga

Big Numerics G-03W-bigNumerics-01-svga

12 Lead ECG C-13W-12Lead-STmap-01-svga

Visitors G-00W-visitor-screen-01-svga

Service A

Screen A

Screen B

Screen C

Screen D

Screen E

Screen F

Screen G

H10 A06, SVGA, MP40-50

S-02W-nbp-diag-svga

G-06W-2Press-01-svga

G-06W-2Press-1x2ovl-01-svga

G-06W-2Press-split-Tr-01-svga

G-04W-1Press-01-svga

G-04W-1Press-1Tr-02-svga

G-04W-1Press-split-Tr-01-svga

G-03W-1Tr-02-svga

Protocol Watch

Horizon

G-03W-1Tr-PW-SSC-01-svga

G-04W-Hor06Tr-01-svga

Big Numerics G-03W-bigNumerics-01-svga

12 Lead ECG C-13W-12Lead-STmap-01-svga

Visitors G-00W-visitor-screen-01-svga

Service A

Screen A

Screen B

Screen C

Screen D

Screen E

Screen F

Screen G

H10 A04, SVGA, MP40-50

S-02W-nbp-diag-svga

G-04W-1Press-01-svga

G-04W-1Press-1Tr-02-svga

G-04W-2Press-1x2ovl-01-svga

G-04W-1Press-split-Tr-01-svga

G-03W-01-svga

G-03W-1Tr-02-svga

G-03W-split-Tr-01-svga

Protocol Watch

Horizon

G-03W-1Tr-PW-SSC-01-svga

G-03W-Hor05Tr-01-svga

Big Numerics G-03W-bigNumerics-01-svga

12 Lead ECG C-13W-12Lead-STmap-01-svga

Visitors G-00W-visitor-screen-01-svga

5 Screen & Profile Overview

225

5 Screen & Profile Overview

MP40/50 Option H20 Screens

H20 A08, SVGA, MP40-50

Name File

Service A

OxyCRG A

OxyCRG B

Screen A

Screen B

Screen C

Screen D

Screen E

Protocol Watch

S-02W-nbp-diag-svga

N-03W-03HW-event-01-svga

N-01W-03HW-event-01-svga

G-08W-3Press-01-svga

G-06W-2Press-01-svga

G-06W-2Press-1x2ovl-01-svga

G-04W-1Press-01-svga

G-04W-1Press-1Tr-02-svga

G-03W-1Tr-PW-SSC-01-svga

Horizon

Big Numerics

G-04W-Hor06Tr-01-svga

G-03W-bigNumerics-01-svga

12 Lead ECG C-13W-12Lead-STmap-01-svga

Visitors G-00W-visitor-screen-01-svga

H20 A06, SVGA, MP40-50

Service A

OxyCRG A

OxyCRG B

Screen A

Screen B

Screen C

Screen D

S-02W-nbp-diag-svga

N-03W-03HW-event-01-svga

N-01W-03HW-event-01-svga

G-06W-2Press-01-svga

G-06W-2Press-1x2ovl-01-svga

G-04W-1Press-01-svga

G-04W-1Press-1Tr-02-svga

Screen E

Protocol Watch

Horizon

Big Numerics

G-03W-1Tr-02-svga

G-03W-1Tr-PW-SSC-01-svga

G-04W-Hor06Tr-01-svga

G-03W-bigNumerics-01-svga

12 Lead ECG C-13W-12Lead-STmap-01-svga

Visitors G-00W-visitor-screen-01-svga

H20 A04, SVGA, MP40-50

Service A

OxyCRG

Screen A

Screen B

Screen C

Screen D

Screen E

S-02W-nbp-diag-svga

N-01W-03HW-event-01-svga

G-04W-1Press-01-svga

G-04W-1Press-1Tr-02-svga

G-04W-2Press-1x2ovl-01-svga

G-03W-01-svga

G-03W-1Tr-02-svga

Screen F

Protocol Watch

Horizon

Big Numerics

G-03W-split-Tr-01-svga

G-03W-1Tr-PW-SSC-01-svga

G-03W-Hor05Tr-01-svga

G-03W-bigNumerics-01-svga

12 Lead ECG C-13W-12Lead-STmap-01-svga

Visitors G-00W-visitor-screen-01-svga

MP40/MP50 Screen Overview

226

MP40/MP50 Screen Overview

MP40/50 Option H30 Screens

H30 A08, SVGA, MP40-50

Name File

Service A

Screen A

Screen B

Screen C

Screen D

Screen E

Screen F

Screen G

Protocol Watch

S-02W-nbp-diag-svga

A-08W-3Press-01-svga

A-05W-2Press-1Tr-BIS-01-svga

A-06W-2Press-01-svga

A-06W-2Press-1Tr-01-svga

A-06W-2Press-1x2ovl-01-svga

A-06W-2Press-split-Tr-01-svga

A-04W-1Press-1Tr-02-svga

G-03W-1Tr-PW-SSC-01-svga

Horizon

Big Numerics

A-04W-Hor06Tr-01-svga

A-03W-bigNumerics-01-svga

12 Lead ECG A-13W-12Lead-STmap-01-svga

Visitors G-00W-visitor-screen-01-svga

H30 A06, SVGA, MP40-50

Service A

Screen A

Screen B

Screen C

Screen D

Screen E

Screen F

Screen G

S-02W-nbp-diag-svga

A-05W-2Press-1Tr-BIS-01-svga

A-06W-2Press-01-svga

A-06W-2Press-1Tr-01-svga

A-06W-2Press-1x2ovl-01-svga

A-06W-2Press-split-Tr-01-svga

A-04W-1Press-1Tr-02-svga

A-04W-1Press-02-svga

Protocol Watch

Horizon

Big Numerics

G-03W-1Tr-PW-SSC-01-svga

A-04W-Hor06Tr-01-svga

A-03W-bigNumerics-01-svga

12 Lead ECG A-13W-12Lead-STmap-01-svga

Visitors G-00W-visitor-screen-01-svga

H30 A04, SVGA, MP40-50

Service A

Screen A

Screen B

Screen C

Screen D

Screen E

Screen F

Screen G

Protocol Watch

S-02W-nbp-diag-svga

A-04W-1Press-1TrBIS-01-svga

A-04W-1Press-1Tr-02-svga

A-04W-1Press-02-svga

A-04W-2Press-1x2ovl-02-svga

A-04W-1Press-split-Tr-02-svga

A-03W-01-svga

A-03W-1Tr-01-svga

G-03W-1Tr-PW-SSC-01-svga

Horizon

Big Numerics

A-03W-Hor05Tr-01-svga

A-03W-bigNumerics-01-svga

12 Lead ECG A-13W-12Lead-STmap-01-svga

Visitors G-00W-visitor-screen-01-svga

5 Screen & Profile Overview

227

5 Screen & Profile Overview

MP40/50 Option H40 Screens

H40 A08, SVGA, MP40-50

Name File

Service A

Screen A

Screen B

Screen C

Screen D

Screen E

Screen F

Screen G

Protocol Watch

S-02W-nbp-diag-svga

C-08W-3Press-01-svga

C-06W-2Press-01-svga

C-06W-2Press-1x2ovl-01-svga

C-06W-2Press-split-Tr-01-svga

C-05W-03ST-snippets-01-svga

C-04W-1Press-1Tr-02-svga

C-04W-1Press-split-Tr-01-svga

G-03W-1Tr-PW-SSC-01-svga

Horizon

Big Numerics

C-04W-Hor06Tr-01-svga

G-03W-bigNumerics-01-svga

12 Lead ECG C-13W-12Lead-STmap-01-svga

Visitors G-00W-visitor-screen-01-svga

H40 A06, SVGA, MP40-50

Service A

Screen A

Screen B

Screen C

Screen D

Screen E

Screen F

S-02W-nbp-diag-svga

C-06W-2Press-01-svga

C-06W-2Press-1x2ovl-01-svga

C-06W-2Press-split-Tr-01-svga

C-05W-03ST-snippets-01-svga

C-04W-1Press-01-svga

C-04W-1Press-1Tr-02-svga

Screen G

Protocol Watch

Horizon

Big Numerics

C-04W-1Press-split-Tr-01-svga

G-03W-1Tr-PW-SSC-01-svga

C-04W-Hor06Tr-01-svga

G-03W-bigNumerics-01-svga

12 Lead ECG C-13W-12Lead-STmap-01-svga

Visitors G-00W-visitor-screen-01-svga

H40 A04, SVGA, MP40-50

Service A

Screen A

Screen B

Screen C

Screen D

Screen E

Screen F

Screen G

Protocol Watch

S-02W-nbp-diag-svga

C-04W-1Press-01-svga

C-04W-1Press-1Tr-02-svga

C-04W-2Press-1x2ovl-01-svga

C-04W-1Press-split-Tr-01-svga

C-03W-03ST-snippets-01-svga

C-03W-1Tr-02-svga

C-03W-split-Tr-01-svga

G-03W-1Tr-PW-SSC-01-svga

Horizon

Big Numerics

C-03W-Hor05Tr-01-svga

G-03W-bigNumerics-01-svga

12 Lead ECG C-13W-12Lead-STmap-01-svga

Visitors G-00W-visitor-screen-01-svga

MP40/MP50 Screen Overview

228

MP40/MP50 Screen Overview

5 Screen & Profile Overview

MP40/50 Demo Configuration Screens

DEMO, SVGA, MP40-50

Name

Service A

Big Numerics

4 Waves A

5 Waves A

6 Waves A

Split Screen A

HighResTrend

Vital Signs A

Protocol Watch

Horizon

Other Bed

Telemetry

File

S-02W-nbp-diag-svga

G-03W-bigNumerics-02-svga

G-04W-1Press-1Tr-02-svga

A-05W-2Press-1Tr-BIS-01-svga

G-06W-2Press-01-svga

G-06W-2Press-split-Tr-01-svga

N-01W-03HW-event-01-svga

G-04W-TrA-01-svga

G-03W-1Tr-PW-SSC-01-svga

A-03W-Hor05Tr-01-svga

G-03W-1Ovv01W-01-svga

G-01W-Tele02W-01-svga

Loops

Demo A

Cardiac Output

G-04W-2TrBIS-Loops-01-svga

G-03W-Loops-Spiro-01-svga

G-04W-2Press-cardiac-out-01-svga

Wedge

VueLink

G-03W-1Press-wedge-01-svga

G-03W-1Press-vuelink-01-svga

12 Lead ECG C-13W-12Lead-STmap-01-svga

ST Segments C-05W-03ST-snippets-01-svga

Remote Applic.

Visitors

G-02W-PT-01-svga

G-00W-visitor-screen-01-svga

229

5 Screen & Profile Overview

MP20/MP30 Screen Overview

MP20/30 Option H10 Screens

H10 A06, SVGA, MP20-30

Name

Service A

Screen A

Screen B

Screen C

Screen D

File

S-02W-nbp-diag-svga

G-06W-2Press-01-svga

G-06W-2Press-1x2ovl-01-svga

G-06W-2Press-split-Tr-01-svga

G-04W-1Press-01-svga

Screen E

Screen F

Screen G

G-04W-1Press-1Tr-02-svga

G-04W-1Press-split-Tr-01-svga

G-03W-1Tr-02-svga

Horizon

Big Numerics

G-04W-Hor06Tr-01-svga

G-03W-bigNumerics-01-svga

12 Lead ECG C-13W-12Lead-STmap-01-svga

Visitors G-00W-visitor-screen-01-svga

H10 A04, SVGA, MP20-30

Service A

Screen A

Screen B

Screen C

Screen D

Screen E

Screen F

Screen G

S-02W-nbp-diag-svga

G-04W-1Press-01-svga

G-04W-1Press-1Tr-02-svga

G-04W-2Press-1x2ovl-01-svga

G-04W-1Press-split-Tr-01-svga

G-03W-01-svga

G-03W-1Tr-02-svga

G-03W-split-Tr-01-svga

Horizon

Big Numerics

G-03W-Hor05Tr-01-svga

G-03W-bigNumerics-01-svga

12 Lead ECG C-13W-12Lead-STmap-01-svga

Visitors G-00W-visitor-screen-01-svga

Service A

Screen A

Screen B

Screen C

Screen D

Screen E

Screen F

H10 A03, SVGA, MP20-30

S-02W-nbp-diag-svga

G-03W-01-svga

G-03W-02-svga

G-03W-1Tr-02-svga

G-03W-1x2ovl-01-svga

Screen G

Horizon

Big Numerics

G-03W-split-Tr-01-svga

G-02W-ovv-1Tr-01-svga

G-02W-ovv-01-svga

G-03W-Hor05Tr-01-svga

G-03W-bigNumerics-01-svga

12 Lead ECG C-13W-12Lead-STmap-01-svga

Visitors G-00W-visitor-screen-01-svga

MP20/MP30 Screen Overview

230

MP20/MP30 Screen Overview

MP20/30 Option H20 Screens

H20 A06, SVGA, MP20-30

Name

Service A

OxyCRG A

OxyCRG B

Screen A

Screen B

File

S-02W-nbp-diag-svga

N-03W-03HW-event-01-svga

N-01W-03HW-event-01-svga

G-06W-2Press-01-svga

G-06W-2Press-1x2ovl-01-svga

Screen C

Screen D

Screen E

G-04W-1Press-01-svga

G-04W-1Press-1Tr-02-svga

G-03W-1Tr-02-svga

Horizon

Big Numerics

G-04W-Hor06Tr-01-svga-Rev004

G-03W-bigNumerics-01-svga

12 Lead ECG C-13W-12Lead-STmap-01-svga

Visitors G-00W-visitor-screen-01-svga

H20 A04, SVGA, MP20-30

Service A

OxyCRG

Screen A

Screen B

Screen C

Screen D

Screen E

Screen F

S-02W-nbp-diag-svga

N-01W-03HW-event-01-svga

G-04W-1Press-01-svga

G-04W-1Press-1Tr-02-svga

G-04W-2Press-1x2ovl-01-svga

G-04W-1Press-split-Tr-01-svga

G-03W-01-svga

G-03W-1Tr-02-svga

Horizon

Big Numerics

G-03W-Hor05Tr-01-svga

G-03W-bigNumerics-01-svga

12 Lead ECG C-13W-12Lead-STmap-01-svga

Visitors G-00W-visitor-screen-01-svga

Service A

CRG

Screen A

Screen B

Screen C

Screen D

Screen E

H20 A03, SVGA, MP20-30

S-02W-nbp-diag-svga

N-01W-02HW-event-01-svga

G-03W-01-svga

G-03W-02-svga

G-03W-1Tr-02-svga

Screen F

Horizon

Big Numerics

G-03W-1x2ovl-01-svga

G-03W-split-Tr-01-svga

G-02W-ovv-1Tr-01-svga

G-03W-Hor05Tr-01-svga

G-03W-bigNumerics-01-svga

12 Lead ECG C-13W-12Lead-STmap-01-svga

Visitors G-00W-visitor-screen-01-svga

5 Screen & Profile Overview

231

5 Screen & Profile Overview

MP20/30Option H30 Screens

H30 A06, SVGA, MP20-30

Name

Service A

Screen A

Screen B

Screen C

Screen D

File

S-02W-nbp-diag-svga

A-05W-2Press-1Tr-BIS-01-svga

A-06W-2Press-01-svga

A-06W-2Press-1Tr-01-svga

A-06W-2Press-1x2ovl-01-svga

Screen E

Screen F

Screen G

Horizon

A-06W-2Press-split-Tr-01-svga

A-04W-1Press-1Tr-02-svga

A-04W-1Press-02-svga

A-04W-Hor06Tr-01-svga

Big Numerics A-03W-bigNumerics-01-svga

12 Lead ECG A-13W-12Lead-STmap-01-svga

Visitors G-00W-visitor-screen-01-svga

H30 A04, SVGA, MP20-30

Service A

Screen A

Screen B

Screen C

Screen D

Screen E

Screen F

Screen G

S-02W-nbp-diag-svga

A-04W-1Press-02-svga

A-04W-1Press-1Tr-02-svga

A-04W-2Press-1x2ovl-02-svga

A-04W-1Press-split-Tr-02-svga

A-03W-01-svga

A-03W-1Tr-02-svga

A-03W-split-Tr-01-svga

Horizon

Big Numerics

A-03W-Hor05Tr-01-svga

A-03W-bigNumerics-02-svga

12 Lead ECG A-13W-12Lead-STmap-01-svga

Visitors G-00W-visitor-screen-01-svga

Service A

Screen A

Screen B

Screen C

Screen D

Screen E

Screen F

H30 A03, SVGA, MP20-30

S-02W-nbp-diag-svga

A-03W-02-svga

A-03W-01-svga

A-03W-1Tr-02-svga

A-03W-1x2ovl-01-svga

Screen G

Horizon

Big Numerics

A-03W-split-Tr-01-svga

A-02W-01-svga

A-02W-1Tr-01-svga

A-03W-Hor05Tr-01-svga

A-03W-bigNumerics-02-svga

12 Lead ECG A-13W-12Lead-STmap-01-svga

Visitors G-00W-visitor-screen-01-svga

MP20/MP30 Screen Overview

232

MP20/MP30 Screen Overview

MP20/30 Option H40 Screens

H40 A06, SVGA, MP20-30

Name

Service A

Screen A

Screen B

Screen C

File

S-02W-nbp-diag-svga

C-06W-2Press-01-svga

C-06W-2Press-1x2ovl-01-svga

C-06W-2Press-split-Tr-01-svga

Screen D

Screen E

Screen F

Screen G

C-05W-03ST-snippets-01-svga

C-04W-1Press-01-svga

C-04W-1Press-1Tr-02-svga

C-04W-1Press-split-Tr-01-svga

Horizon

Big Numerics

C-04W-Hor06Tr-01-svga

G-03W-bigNumerics-01-svga

12 Lead ECG C-13W-12Lead-STmap-01-svga

Visitors G-00W-visitor-screen-01-svga

H40 A04, SVGA, MP20-30

Service A

Screen A

Screen B

Screen C

Screen D

Screen E

Screen F

S-02W-nbp-diag-svga

C-04W-1Press-01-svga

C-04W-1Press-1Tr-02-svga

C-04W-2Press-1x2ovl-01-svga

C-04W-1Press-split-Tr-01-svga

C-03W-03ST-snippets-01-svga

C-03W-1Tr-02-svga

Screen G

Horizon

C-03W-split-Tr-01-svga

C-03W-Hor05Tr-01-svga

Big Numerics G-03W-bigNumerics-01-svga

12 Lead ECG C-13W-12Lead-STmap-01-svga

Visitors G-00W-visitor-screen-01-svga

Service A

Screen A

Screen B

Screen C

Screen D

Screen E

Screen F

Screen G

H40 A03, SVGA, MP20-30

S-02W-nbp-diag-svga

C-03W-01-svga

C-03W-02-svga

C-03W-1Tr-02-svga

G-03W-1x2ovl-01-svga

C-03W-split-Tr-01-svga

C-02W-ovv-1Tr-01-svga

C-02W-ovv-01-svga

Horizon

Big Numerics

C-03W-Hor05Tr-01-svga

G-03W-bigNumerics-01-svga

12 Lead ECG C-13W-12Lead-STmap-01-svga

Visitors G-00W-visitor-screen-01-svga

5 Screen & Profile Overview

233

5 Screen & Profile Overview

MP20/30Demo Configuration Screens

DEMO, SVGA, MP20-30

Name

Service A

Big Numerics

2 Waves A

2 Waves B

3 Waves A

3 Waves B

4 Waves A

4 Waves B

Split Screen A

Split Screen B

HighResTrend

Vital Signs A

Horizon

Other Bed

File

S-02W-nbp-diag-svga

G-03W-bigNumerics-02-svga

G-02W-ovv-01-svga

G-02W-ovv-1Tr-01-svga

G-03W-01-svga

G-03W-1Tr-02-svga

G-04W-1Press-01-svga

G-04W-1Press-1Tr-02-svga

G-04W-1Press-split-Tr-01-svga

G-06W-2Press-split-Tr-left-01-svga

N-01W-03HW-event-01-svga

G-04W-TrA-01-svga

A-03W-Hor05Tr-01-svga

G-03W-1Ovv01W-01-svga

Telemetry

Cardiac Output

G-01W-Tele02W-01-svga

G-03W-1Press-cardiac-out-01-svga

Wedge G-01W-wedge-01-svga

12 Lead ECG C-13W-12Lead-STmap-01-svga

ST Segments

Demo A

Visitors

C-03W-03ST-snippets-01-svga

C-04W-1Press-Hor06Tr-svga

G-00W-visitor-screen-01-svga

MP20/MP30 Screen Overview

234

MP20 Junior (M20) & MP20L (M21) Screen Overview

5 Screen & Profile Overview

MP20 Junior (M20) & MP20L (M21) Screen

Overview

Note that the MP20L is available in the US only.

MP20 M20/M21 Option H10 Screens

H10 A03 M20, SVGA, MP20

Name

Service A

Screen A

Screen B

Big Numerics

Screen C

Screen D

S-02W-nbp-diag-svga

G-03W-1Tr-22-svga

G-02W-ovv-1Tr-21-svga

G-03W-bigNumerics-24-svga

G-02W-ovv-21-svga

G-03W-21-svga

File

Screen E

Screen F

Screen G

G-03W-22-svga

G-03W-1x2ovl-21-svga

G-03W-split-Tr-21-svga

12 Lead ECG C-13W-12Lead-23-svga

Service A

Screen A

Screen B

Big Numerics

H10 A03 M21, SVGA, MP20

S-02W-nbp-diag-svga

G-03W-1Tr-22-svga

G-02W-ovv-1Tr-21-svga

G-03W-bigNumerics-24-svga

MP20 M20 Option H20 Screens

H20 A03 M20, SVGA, MP20

Name

Service A

Screen A

Screen B

Big Numerics

Screen C

File

S-02W-nbp-diag-svga

G-03W-1Tr-22-svga

G-02W-ovv-1Tr-21-svga

G-03W-bigNumerics-24-svga

G-02W-ovv-21-svga

Screen D

Screen E

Screen F

Screen G

G-03W-21-svga

G-03W-22-svga

G-03W-1x2ovl-21-svga

G-03W-split-Tr-21-svga

12 Lead ECG C-13W-12Lead-23-svga

235

5 Screen & Profile Overview

MP5 Screen Overview

MP5 Option H10 Screens

Name

Service A

1 Wave

2 Waves

3 Waves

4 Waves

Vital Signs

Split Screen A

Split Screen B

Other Bed

12 Lead ECG

H10 A04, SVGA, MP5

File

S-02W-nbp-diag-svga

G-01W-1Tr-51-svga

G-02W-1Tr-51-svga

G-03W-1Tr-51-svga

G-04W-1Tr-51-svga

G-01W-TrA-51-svga

G-03W-split-Tr-1Tr-51-svga

G-04W-split-Tr-1Tr-51-svga

G-03W-1Ovv01W-52-svga

C-13W-12Lead-STmap-51-svga

Service A

1 Wave

2 Waves

3 Waves

Vital Signs

Split Screen

Other Bed

12 Lead ECG

H10 A03, SVGA, MP5

S-02W-nbp-diag-svga

G-01W-1Tr-51-svga

G-02W-1Tr-51-svga

G-03W-1Tr-51-svga

G-01W-TrA-51-svga

G-03W-split-Tr-1Tr-51-svga

G-02W-1Ovv01W-51-svga

C-13W-12Lead-STmap-51-svga

MP5 Screen Overview

236

MP5 Screen Overview

MP5 Option H20 Screens

H20 A04, SVGA, MP5

Name File

Service A

1 Wave

2 Waves

3 Waves

4 Waves

S-02W-nbp-diag-svga

G-01W-1Tr-51-svga

G-02W-1Tr-51-svga

G-03W-1Tr-51-svga

G-04W-1Tr-51-svga

OxyCRG

Vital Signs

N-01W-03HW-51-svga

G-01W-TrA-51-svga

Split Screen A G-03W-split-Tr-1Tr-51-svga

Split Screen B G-04W-split-Tr-1Tr-51-svga

Other Bed G-03W-1Ovv01W-52-svga

Service A

1 Wave

2 Waves

3 Waves

CRG

Vital Signs

Split Screen

Other Bed

H20 A03, SVGA, MP5

S-02W-nbp-diag-svga

G-01W-1Tr-51-svga

G-02W-1Tr-51-svga

G-03W-1Tr-51-svga

N-01W-02HW-51-svga

G-01W-TrA-51-svga

G-03W-split-Tr-1Tr-51-svga

G-02W-1Ovv01W-51-svga

5 Screen & Profile Overview

237

5 Screen & Profile Overview

MP5 Option H30 Screens

Name

Service A

1 Wave

2 Waves

3 Waves

4 Waves A

4 Waves B

Vital Signs

Split Screen A

Split Screen B

Other Bed

H30 A04, SVGA, MP5

File

S-02W-nbp-diag-svga

G-01W-1Tr-51-svga

A-02W-GM-1Tr-51-svga

G-03W-1Tr-51-svga

G-04W-1Tr-51-svga

A-04W-GM-51-svga

G-01W-TrA-51-svga

G-03W-split-Tr-1Tr-51-svga

G-04W-split-Tr-1Tr-51-svga

G-03W-1Ovv01W-52-svga

Service A

1 Wave

2 Waves

3 Waves A

3 Waves B

Vital Signs

Split Screen

Other Bed

H30 A03, SVGA, MP5

S-02W-nbp-diag-svga

G-01W-1Tr-51-svga

A-02W-GM-1Tr-51-svga

G-03W-1Tr-51-svga

A-03W-GM-51-svga

G-01W-TrA-51-svga

G-03W-split-Tr-1Tr-51-svga

G-02W-1Ovv01W-51-svga

MP5 Screen Overview

238

MP5 Screen Overview

MP5 Option H40 Screens

H40 A04, SVGA, MP5

Name

Service A

1 Wave

2 Waves

3 Waves

4 Waves

File

S-02W-nbp-diag-svga

G-01W-1Tr-51-svga

G-02W-1Tr-51-svga

G-03W-1Tr-51-svga

G-04W-1Tr-51-svga

ST MAP

Vital Signs

C-04W-ST-Map-1Tr-51-svga

G-01W-TrA-51-svga

Split Screen A G-03W-split-Tr-1Tr-51-svga

Split Screen B G-04W-split-Tr-1Tr-51-svga

Other Bed C-03W-1Ovv01W-51-svga

Telemetry

12 Lead ECG

G-01W-Tele02W-51-svga

C-13W-12Lead-STmap-51-svga

Service A

1 Wave

2 Waves

3 Waves

ST MAP

Vital Signs

Split Screen

Other Bed

Telemetry

12 Lead ECG

H40 A03, SVGA, MP5

S-02W-nbp-diag-svga

G-01W-1Tr-51-svga

G-02W-1Tr-51-svga

G-03W-1Tr-51-svga

C-03W-ST-Map-1Tr-51-svga

G-01W-TrA-51-svga

G-03W-split-Tr-1Tr-51-svga

C-02W-1Ovv01W-51-svga

G-01W-Tele02W-51-svga

C-13W-12Lead-STmap-51-svga

5 Screen & Profile Overview

239

5 Screen & Profile Overview

MP5 Demo Configuration Screens

Name

Service A

1 Wave

2 Waves

3 Waves

4 Waves

Vital Signs

Split Screen A

Split Screen B

Other Bed

12 Lead ECG

Visitors

Big Numerics

3 Waves A

4 Waves A

Overlapping

ST MAP

Horizon

OxyCRG

Telemetry

DEMO, SVGA, MP5

File

S-02W-nbp-diag-svga

G-01W-1Tr-51-svga

G-02W-1Tr-51-svga

G-03W-1Tr-51-svga

G-04W-1Tr-51-svga

G-01W-TrA-51-svga

G-03W-split-Tr-1Tr-51-svga

G-04W-split-Tr-1Tr-51-svga

C-03W-1Ovv01W-51-svga

C-13W-12Lead-STmap-51-svga

G-00W-visitor-screen-01-svga

G-03W-bigNumerics-55-svga

A-03W-GM-51-svga

A-04W-GM-51-svga

G-04W-2Press-1x2ovl-51-svga

C-04W-ST-Map-1Tr-51-svga

G-04W-Hor06Tr-51-svga

N-01W-03HW-51-svga

G-01W-Tele02W-51-svga

MP5 Screen Overview

240

MP5 Options B10/B11/B14 Screen Overview

5 Screen & Profile Overview

MP5 Options B10/B11/B14 Screen Overview

MP5 with Options B10/B11/B14 Screens

Name

Service A

Big Numerics

1 Wave

Horizon

Vital Signs A

Vital Signs B

Other Bed

Visitors

Name

Service A

Big Numerics

1 Wave

Horizon

Vital Signs A

Vital Signs B

Other Bed

Visitors

Name

Service A

Big Numerics

1 Wave A

1 Wave B

2 Waves

Horizon

Vital Signs A

Vital Signs B

Other Bed

Visitors

H10 A03, B10, SVGA, MP5

File

S-02W-nbp-diag-svga

G-00W-1Tr-60-svga

G-01W-1Tr-60-svga

G-01W-1Tr-Hor03Tr-60-svga

G-00W-TrA-60-svga

G-01W-TrA-60-svga

G-01W-1Tr-1Ovv01W-60-svga

G-00W-visitor-screen-01-svga

H10 A03, B11, SVGA, MP5

File

S-02W-nbp-diag-svga

G-00W-1Tr-61-svga

G-01W-1Tr-60-svga

G-01W-1Tr-Hor04Tr-61-svga

G-00W-TrA-60-svga

G-01W-TrA-60-svga

G-01W-1Tr-1Ovv01W-60-svga

G-00W-visitor-screen-01-svga

H10 A03, B14, SVGA, MP5

File

S-02W-nbp-diag-svga

G-00W-1Tr-64-svga

G-01W-1Tr-60-svga

G-01W-1Tr-64-svga

G-02W-1Tr-64-svga

G-01W-1Tr-Hor04Tr-64-svga

G-00W-TrA-60-svga

G-01W-TrA-60-svga

G-01W-1Tr-1Ovv01W-60-svga

G-00W-visitor-screen-01-svga

241

5 Screen & Profile Overview

MP5T Screen Overview

Name

Service A

1 Wave

2 Waves

3 Waves

Vital Signs

ST MAP

12 Lead ECG

H10 A03, SVGA, MP5T

File

S-02W-nbp-diag-svga

G-01W-1Tr-51-svga

G-02W-1Tr-51-svga

G-03W-1Tr-52-svga

G-01W-TrA-51-svga

C-03W-ST-Map-1Tr-51-svga

C-13W-12Lead-STmap-51-svga

MP5T Screen Overview

242

MP2 Screen Overview

MP2 Screen Overview

MP2, QVGA

Name

Service A

Big Numerics

10 Numerics

Vital Signs A

1 Wave A

S-01W-04N-qvga

File

G-00W-06N-02-qvga

G-00W-10N-01-qvga

G-00W-03N-1TrT-01-qvga

G-01W-03N-01-qvga

1 Wave B

1 Big Wave

Vital Signs B

2 Waves A

2 Waves B

3 Waves

Vital Signs

Horizon

ST MAP

G-01W-07N-01-qvga

G-01W-big-05N-01-qvga

G-01W-05N-1TrT-01-qvga

G-02W-04N-01-qvga

G-02W-08N-01-qvga

G-03W-05N-01-qvga

G-00W-03N-TrA-01-qvga

G-00W-03N-1TrH-01-qvga

C-01W-03N-ST-Map-01-qvga

12 Lead ECG C-13W-12Lead-01-qvga

Visitors G-00W-Visitors-01-qvga

5 Screen & Profile Overview

MP2, Tele, QVGA

Name

Service A

Big Numerics

10 Numerics

Vital Signs A

1 Wave A

1 Wave B

1 Big Wave

Vital Signs B

2 Waves A

2 Waves B

3 Waves

Vital Signs

Horizon

S-01W-04N-qvga

File

G-00W-06N-02-qvga

G-00W-10N-01-qvga

G-00W-03N-1TrT-01-qvga

G-01W-03N-01-qvga

G-01W-07N-01-qvga

G-01W-big-05N-01-qvga

G-01W-05N-1TrT-01-qvga

G-02W-04N-01-qvga

G-02W-08N-01-qvga

G-03W-05N-01-qvga

G-00W-03N-TrA-01-qvga

G-00W-03N-1TrH-01-qvga

Telemetry

ST MAP

G-00W-Tele01W-01-qvga

C-01W-03N-ST-Map-01-qvga

12 Lead ECG C-13W-12Lead-01-qvga

Visitors G-00W-Visitors-01-qvga

243

5 Screen & Profile Overview

X2 Screen Overview

X2, QVGA

Name File

Service A

Big Numerics

10 Numerics

Vital Signs A

1 Wave A

1 Wave B

1 Big Wave

Vital Signs B

S-01W-04N-qvga

G-00W-06N-02-qvga

G-00W-10N-01-qvga

G-00W-03N-1TrT-01-qvga

G-01W-03N-01-qvga

G-01W-07N-01-qvga

G-01W-big-05N-01-qvga

G-01W-05N-1TrT-01-qvga

2 Waves A

2 Waves B

3 Waves

Vital Signs

G-02W-04N-01-qvga

G-02W-08N-01-qvga

G-03W-05N-01-qvga

G-00W-03N-TrA-01-qvga

Horizon

ST MAP

G-00W-03N-1TrH-01-qvga

C-01W-03N-ST-Map-01-qvga

12 Lead ECG C-13W-12Lead-01-qvga

Visitors G-00W-Visitors-01-qvga

X2, Tele, QVGA

Name File

Service A

Big Numerics

10 Numerics

Vital Signs A

1 Wave A

1 Wave B

1 Big Wave

Vital Signs B

2 Waves A

2 Waves B

S-01W-04N-qvga

G-00W-06N-02-qvga

G-00W-10N-01-qvga

G-00W-03N-1TrT-01-qvga

G-01W-03N-01-qvga

G-01W-07N-01-qvga

G-01W-big-05N-01-qvga

G-01W-05N-1TrT-01-qvga

G-02W-04N-01-qvga

G-02W-08N-01-qvga

3 Waves

Vital Signs

Horizon

G-03W-05N-01-qvga

G-00W-03N-TrA-01-qvga

G-00W-03N-1TrH-01-qvga

Telemetry

ST MAP

G-00W-Tele01W-01-qvga

C-01W-03N-ST-Map-01-qvga

12 Lead ECG C-13W-12Lead-01-qvga

Visitors G-00W-Visitors-01-qvga

X2 Screen Overview

244

A

A options

192

accessing profiles

9

addressograph (monitor settings)

105

advanced event surveillance

126

AGM

76

AGT/AGT1/AGT2 settings

(measurement settings)

76

alarm behavior, french (assistance publique homologation standard)

88

alarm latching

38

alarm recordings (monitor settings)

88

alarm settings (monitor settings)

85

aperiodic parameters

122

,

185

aperiodic trend database

185

application area option

27

application areas

191

arrhythmia measurement settings)

36

ask for new pat (unique monitor settings)

157

assistance publique alarm requirements

88

auto alarm limit settings (monitor settings)

89

auto filter

99

auto reports

107

setting up an end case report

107

auto reports (monitor settings)

106

awRR (CO2) (measurement settings)

63

awRR (gas analyzer) (measurement settings)

82

B

basic event surveillance

126

bed information settings (hardware settings)

183

BIS settings (measurement settings)

71

breadcrumb trail

25

C

C.O. (measurement settings)

55

C.O. window settings (monitor settings)

96

calculation settings (monitor setting)

100

CCO (measurement settings)

56

changing default profile

13

profile name

13

screen layout

21

screens

18

settings block name

13

settings blocks

11

clamps for extreme limit alarms

35

clock (screen setting)

20

CO2 (measurement settings)

62

combining settings blocks

10

configuration implications

25

configuration mode additional settings

2

description of

2

entering

6

leaving

6

configuration overview

MP2/X2

214

MP20 Junior & MP20L

206

MP20/30

202

MP40/50

198

MP5

208

MP5T

213

MP60-90

194

configuration pop-up keys

9

configuration tables

25

configuration with the support tool

7

configuring for different telemetry use models

153

configuring printers central printer

174

local printer

173

one local and one central printer

175

printing a test report

175

to capture events during transport

175

configuring screens

17

confirm pop-up key

9

country-specific settings (unique monitor settings)

164

CPP (Cerebral Perfusion

Pressure)

53

CPP (measurement settings)

53

creating screens

18

creating a new profile

12

CSA buffer configuration

145

CSA configuration

98

CSA report (monitor settings)

108

CSA window (monitor settings)

98

D

database

184

database config

184

database options event database

186

delete pop-up key

9

deleting a settings block or profile

13

Delta SpO2

45

Delta SpO2(measurement settings)

45

Delta Temp

75

Delta Temp (measurement settings)

75

demograph. fields (global settings)

158

Derived measurements

CPP

53

Delta SpO2

45

Delta Temp

75

PPV

54

Sp-vO2

59

SVR

57

DES settings (measurement settings)

81

display

5

using a second

14

,

18

using a third

14

,

18

display, independent

14

,

18

drug calculator configuration

(unique monitor setting)

146

E

EC10

76

ECG (measurement settings)

30

ECG application (monitor settings)

99

ECG reports (monitor settings)

108

ECG/Pulse alarms (measurement settings)

33

EEG (measurement settings)

67

EEG montages (measurement settings)

69

EEG-CSA buffer configuration

(unique monitor setting)

145

EEG-CSA Window configuration

(monitor setting)

98

electrocautery artifact

99

embedded other bed window (screen setting)

24

embedded trend window (screen setting)

23

end case report

107

ENF settings (measurement settings)

80

enhanced condition

133

Enter MeasValues (global settings)

161

1

2

entering configuration mode

6

event annotations (unique monitor settings)

133

event database options

186

event episode

132

event settings (unique monitor settings)

126

event surveill.

126

event surveillance options

126

example screen

193

exiting configuration mode

6

extreme bradycardia limits

34

extreme tachycardia limits

34

F

factory defaults

26

french alarm behavior

88

function keys (unique monitor settings)

144

G

G.0 configuration changes

188

gas analyzer (measurement settings)

76

gas analyzer CO2 settings

(measurement settings)

81

global settings

5

,

147

ask for new pat

157

country-specific settings

164

demographic fields

158

Enter MeasValues

161

printer configuration

171

remote display settings

159

timer selection and order

160

global smartkeys changing selection and sequence

144

global smartkeys (unique monitor settings)

143

global trend style (monitor settings)

93

GM

76

graph trends window

94

graphical trend report (monitor settings)

109

H

H options

27

,

191

H option-specific settings

187

HAL settings (measurement settings)

79

hardware settings

5

,

176

bed information

183

input devices

180

interfaces

180

multiple displays

177

SRR channels

181

video

178

WLAN

181

histogram window

94

horizon trends (monitor settings)

92

I

implications of configuration changes

25

inop severity (monitor settings)

90

input device settings (hardware settings)

180

IntelliBridge

76

intellivue support tool

6

interface settings (hardware settings)

180

invasive pressure (measurement settings)

47

ISO settings (measurement settings)

79

item name

26

L

leaving configuration mode

6

levels of event surveillance

126

license key

7

load pop-up key

9

loading a settings block

11

locking a profile

13

locking a settings block

13

loops window settings (monitor settings)

97

M

M options

27

MAC (measurement settings)

83

manual data entry settings

161

Max Hold

63

MDF (mean dominant frequency)

68

mean dominant frequency

(MDF)

68

measurement settings

5

AGT/AGT1/AGT2

76

arrhythmia

36

awRR (CO2)

63

awRR (gas analyzer)

82

BIS

71

C.O.

55

CCO

56

CO2

62

CO2 (gas analyzer)

81

CPP

53

Delta SpO2

45

Delta Temp

75

DES

81

ECG

30

ECG/Pulse alarms

33

EEG

67

EEG montages

69

ENF

80

gas analyzer

76

HAL

79

invasive pressure

47

ISO

79

MAC

83

N2O

78

NBP

46

O2

77

PPV

54

predictive temp

74

Pulse (Pressure)

53

Pulse (SpO2)

44

pulse/system pulse

35

QT analysis

41

respiration

64

RRspir

67

ScvO2

58

SEV

80

SO2

58

spirometry

65

SpO2

42

Sp-vO2

59

ST analysis

39

SvO2

58

SVR

57

tcGas

60

temperature

72

VueLink

75

measurement settings block

3

modifying a profile

10

monitor database

184

monitor installation

5

monitor installation, hardware settings

5

monitor settings

5

addressograph

105

alarm recordings

88

alarms

85

auto alarm limits

89

auto reports

106

C.O. window

96

calculations

100

CSA report

108

CSA window

98

ECG application

99

ECG reports

108

EEG-CSA Window

98

french alarm behavior

88

global trend style

93

graphical trend report

109

horizon trends

92

inop severity

90

loops window

97

network

115

reports

101

screen trends

91

ST Map

95

trend reports

109

trend window

93

user interface

110

vital signs recording

95

vital signs report

109

wedge window

97

monitor settings block

3

MP20 model option

27

multiple display settings (hardware settings)

177

N

N2O settings (measurement settings)

78

network settings (monitor setting)

115

new pop-up key

9

not applicable settings in tables

27

NPB (measurement settings)

46

Nurse Call Relay

Inop/alarm latency

87

nurse call relay relay sensitivity

87

O

O2 settings (measurement settings)

77

oper. mode

26

options application area (H option)

27

MP20 model (M option)

27

P

paced mode setting

4

parameter scales

123

patient category setting

4

peak power frequency (PPF)

68

pop-up key confirm

9

delete

9

load

9

new

9

rename

9

set default

9

store

9

pop-up keys, configuration

9

PPF (peak power frequency)

68

PPV (measurement settings)

54

PPV (Pulse Pressure Variation)

54

predictive temp (measurement settings)

74

previewing a profile

11

print database

172

,

186

printer configuration (global setting)

171

profile

3

accessing

9

changing

2

changing default

13

changing the combination of settings blocks

10

components

3

creating new

11

,

12

deleting

13

locking

13

modifying

10

previewing display settings

11

previewing measurement settings

11

previewing monitor settings

11

renaming

13

structure

3

unlocking

13

profile settings

28

ProtocolWatch (unique monitor settings)

134

ProtocolWatch symbol (screen setting)

21

Pulse(Pressure) (measurement settings)

53

Pulse(SpO2) (measurement settings)

44

pulse/system pulse (measurement settings)

35

Q

QT analysis (measurement settings)

41

R

recording settings (unique monitor setting)

135

release-specific information

188

remote display settings (global settings)

159

rename pop-up key

9

renaming a settings block or profile

13

report configuration (monitor setting)

101

reports scheduled

107

respiration (measurement settings)

64

RRspir (measurement settings)

67

S

scheduled reports

107

screen example

193

screen layout

193

screen layout, changing

21

screen overview

MP2

243

MP20 Junior & MP20L

235

MP20/30

230

MP40/50

225

MP5

236

MP5 with options B10/B11/

B14

241

MP5T

242

MP60-90

216

X2

244

screen settings

17

clock on main screen

20

embedded other bed window

24

embedded trend window

23

ProtocolWatch symbol on main screen

21

screen trend settings

22

smartkeys

21

timer on main screen

20

wave channel speed

22

screen trend (screen setting)

22

screen trends

192

screen trends (monitor settings)

91

screens changing

18

creating new

18

in profiles

5

ScvO2 (measurement settings)

58

second display

14

,

18

SEF numeric (BIS)

71

SEF numeric (EEG)

68

set default pop-up key

9

settings block deleting

13

loading

11

locking

13

renaming

13

unlocking

13

settings blocks

10

changing

11

SEV settings (measurement settings)

80

smartkeys changing selection and sequence

21

3

4

deleting

21

sorting

21

smartkeys (screen setting)

21

SO2 (measurement settings)

58

spectral edge frequency numeric (BIS)

71

spectral edge frequency numeric (EEG)

68

spirometry (measurement settings)

65

SpO2 (measurement settings)

42

Sp-vO2 (measurement settings)

59

SR numeric (BIS)

71

SRR channel settings (hardware settings)

181

ST analysis (measurement settings)

39

ST Map settings (monitor settings)

95

ST snippets

192

store pop-up key

9

support tool

6

what can be configured

7

support tool license key

7

support tool screen library

192

suppression ratio (BIS)

71

SvO2 (measurement settings)

58

SVR (measurement settings)

57

SVR (Systemic Vascular Resistance)

57

T

tcGas (measurement settings)

60

telemetry label (X2, MP5)

158

temperature settings (measurement settings)

72

third display

14

,

18

timer (screen setting)

20

timer selection and order

142

timer selection and order (global settings)

160

timer settings (unique monitor setting)

139

total power numeric (BIS)

72

total power numeric (EEG)

68

trend database for aperiodic parameters

185

trend group settings (unique monitor settings)

119

trend priority (unique monitor settings)

122

trend report settings (monitor settings)

109

trend scale settings (unique monitor settings)

123

trend units settings (unique monitor settings)

123

trend window settings (monitor settings)

93

trigger condition

132

U

undo changes

12

unique monitor settings

118

drug calculator

146

EEG-CSA buffer

145

event annotations

133

events

126

function keys

144

global smartkeys

143

ProtocolWatch

134

recordings

135

timers

139

trend groups

119

trend priority

122

trend scales

123

trend units

123

unlocking a profile

13

unlocking a settings block

13

user interface settings (monitor setting)

110

using an X2 or MP5 with a telemetry label

158

V

video settings (hardware)

178

visitors screen

192

vital signs recording (monitor settings)

95

vital signs report (monitor settings)

109

vital signs window

93

VueLink settings (measurement settings)

75

W

wave channel speed (screen setting)

22

wave options

192

wedge window settings (monitor settings)

97

which monitor models is this guide for

1

who is this guide for

1

WLAN settings (hardware settings)

181

X

XDS remote display

12

,

14

,

15

,

18

,

115

5

6

Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement

Table of contents